environmental impact assessment · ´environmental impact assessment study for the proposed...

Project Proponent

Central Pulp Mills

Fort Songadh, Distt. Tapi-394660

Gujarat

EIA Consultant Technical Consultant

Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited

QCI Accredited EIA Consulting Organization Esvin House, Perungudi,

Parry House 3rd Floor, Chennai-600 096

No:2, N.S.C Bose Road [email protected]

www.cholarisk.com

January 2019

Environmental Impact Assessment For

the Proposed Modernization and Expansion Plan (MEP) of

Existing Paper/Board Manufacturing Plant at JKPL Unit: CPM, Fort

Songadh, Dist Tapi, Gujarat

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.cholarisk.com/

EIA for the Proposed Modernization and Expansion Plan (MEP) of Existing Paper/Board Manufacturing Plant at JKPL Unit: CPM, Fort Songadh, Dist Tapi, Gujarat

Document Ref: PJ-ENVIR-201865-1768

Dated: January 2019

Declaration

Prepared by Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited and SPB-PC

JK Paper Limited, Unit CPM, Fort Songadh, Dist. Tapi has conducted the

“Environmental Impact Assessment Study for the proposed Modernization and

Expansion Plan (MEP) of the existing Paper/Board Manufacturing Plant by

increasing the mill’s paper/board capacity from 1,60,800 TPA to 3,60,800 TPA

consisting of installation of a New Board Machine, Bleached Hard Wood Pulp

mill (HWP), Bleached Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP) mill,

Augmentation/modernization of Chemical Recovery, Utilities and Services to

support the post MEP operations.

The EIA report preparations have been undertaken in compliance with the Terms

of Reference (ToR) issued by MoEF & CC. Information and content provided in

the report is factually correct for the purpose and objective for such study

undertaken.

We hereby declare the ownership of contents (information and data) of EIA/EMP

Report.

For on behalf of JK Paper Ltd, Unit CPM, Tapi

Signature :

Name :

Designation :

Date :

DECLARATION BY PROJECT PROPONENT



Dated: January 2019

Declaration


This EIA report has been prepared by “Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

(CMSRSL), in line with EIA Notification, dated 14th September 2006, seeking

prior Environmental Clearance from the Ministry of Environment, Forests and

Climate Change, New Delhi.

This work has been undertaken in accordance with ISO 9001:2008 Quality

Management System with all reasonable skill, care and diligence within the terms

of the contract with the client, incorporating our General Terms & Conditions of

Business and taking account of the resources devoted to it by agreement with the

client.

We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of any matters

outside the scope of the above.

Further, this report is confidential to the client and the use of this report by

unauthorized third parties without written authorization from CMSRSL shall be

at their own risk.

For and on behalf of Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

Approved by :N.V.Subba Rao

Sign :

Designation : Chief Executive

Date :17h January 2019

DECLARATION BY EIA CONSULTANT



Dated: January 2019

Declaration


I, hereby, certify that I was part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

Sector as per NABET Scheme

24

Pulp & paper industry excluding manufacturing of paper from wastepaper and manufacture of paper from ready pulp without bleaching

Sector as per EIA Notification

5(i)

Pulp & paper industry excluding manufacturing of paper from wastepaper and manufacture of paper from ready pulp without bleaching

EIA Coordinator: Name :V.S.Bhaskar

Signature : Date : 17th January 2019 Period of Involvement : June 2018 to till date Contact Information : M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited

“ParryHouse, 3rd Floor,No. 2, NSC Bose Road, Chennai – 600 001 [email protected] +91-044- 3044 5620

Functional Area Experts:

S.No.

Functional Areas Name of the

Expert/s Involvement

(Period and Task) Signature

1

AP- Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring & Control

Mr. V S Bhaskar

June 2018 to till date Task: Site visit, design of Ambient air quality monitoring network, evaluation of result of ambient air quality monitoring, inferring baseline data collected, identification of potential impact to air quality during construction and operation phase, developing and finalizing EMP to minimize impact to air quality.

PROJECT DECLARATION BY EIA CONSULTANT

mailto:[email protected]



Dated: January 2019

Declaration


S.No.




2

AQ- Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling & Prediction

Mr. V S Bhaskar

June 2018 to till date

Task: Supervision of air quality modeling and identification of impacts due to proposed expansion. Finalization of mitigation measures with client.

3

WP- Water Pollution Monitoring Prevention & Control

Mr. V S Bhaskar

June 2018 to till date Task: Site visit, Finalization of sampling locations, finalizing water balance for the project, inference of baseline data collected identification of impacts and preparation of mitigation plan.

4 MSW – Municipal Solid Waste

Ms. Sathya.S

June 2018 to till date Task: Identification of solid waste to be generated from the industry and suggesting mitigation plan and coordination with EIA coordinator & functional area experts in report writing

5 SE- Socio-Economic Aspects

Mr. Karthick C S

June 2018 to till date Task: Undertaking primary socio-economic survey, identification of social impact due to proposed project, preparation of mitigation plan, development of CSR plan.

6 EB- Ecology and Biodiversity

Dr. T. Balakrishna

June 2018 to till date Task: Field survey. Impact prediction and suggesting mitigation measures. Preparation of ecology management plan.

7 LU- Land Use T.P.Natesan

June 2018 to till date Task: Preparation of land use land cover maps for the study area using GIS/ related tools followed by ground truth verification.

8 HG- Hydrology Ground Water & Water

T.P.Natesan June 2018 to till date Task: Aquifer details, groundwater potential,



Dated: January 2019

Declaration


S.No.




Conservation GEO- Geology

determination of ground use pattern, Study of local hydro-geology, development of rainwater harvesting program, preparation of contour map for the study area and estimation of groundwater direction.

9 RH- Risk & Hazard Management

Mr. V S Bhaskar

June 2018 to till date Task: Identification of risk due to storage of fuel and raw materials, interpreting consequence contours, suggesting risk mitigation measures.

Other Team involved:

1. Ms. Sujatha Gurudev –Functional Area Associate 2. Mr. Mahendra B.- Functional Area Associate 3. Ms. Supritha Vijayakumar – Technical Associate 4. Ms. Shalini Sourav- Technical Associate 5. Ms. Megha Merin Joy- Technical Associate

Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization/ Authorized

Person

I, N.V.Subbarao, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA

Report for the “Environmental Impact Assessment Study for Proposed Modernization

and Expansion by Increasing Paper/Board Production from 1,60,800 TPA to 3,60,800

TPA by installing a new board manufacturing unit of capacity 2,00,000 TPA.” I also confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any

misleading information mentioned in this statement.

Signature :

Name : N V Subbarao

Name of the EIA Consultant Organization : M/s.Cholamandalam MS Risk

Services Ltd

NABET Certificate No. :NABET/EIA/1619/SA076



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1. Introduction

JK Paper Ltd. has two large integrated paper manufacturing units namely JK Paper

Mills at Rayagada, Odisha and Central Pulp Mills (CPM) at Songadh, Gujarat with a

combined capacity of 4,55,000 TPA. It is the market leader in Branded Copier paper

segment and among the top players in Coated Paper and high-end Packaging Boards

and is a leading exporter of Branded Copier Papers from India.

Unit CPM, Songadh commenced production in 1968 and was acquired by JK Group in

1992. Unit CPM, Songadh is spreading in an area of 363 acres of land comprising

main plant and its supporting facilities, colony, green belt and plantation area.

1.1. Proposed Project

In the view of upgrading the existing paper and pulp mill at unit CPM, the

management of JKPL has proposed to increase the paper/board production capacity

from 1,60,800 TPA to 3,60,800 TPA by installing a new board manufacturing unit of

capacity 2,00,000 TPA. The existing pulp mill of capacity 60,000 BD TPA will be

replaced with ECF based Chemical Wood Pulp (CWP) mill of capacity 1,60,000 BD TPA

which will be shifted from JKPL, Rayagada unit and re-installed. A new Bleached

Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP) of capacity 1,00,000 AD TPA, De-Inking

Plant (DIP) of capacity 150 BD TPD and Secondary Fibre Treatment (SFT) Plant of

capacity 400 BD TPD are proposed to cater to the fibre demand of the varieties of

Boards for the proposed new Board machine. The supporting facilities for the proposed

increase in capacities such as chemical recovery section, power plant, effluent

treatment plant (ETP) will be augmented/upgraded based on the requirement.

1.2. EIA Study

The proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) involves manufacturing of additional product

including pulp, the proposed project falls under category “A” under sector 5(i) of the

EIA notification 2006. In addition, it is proposed to increase the existing captive power

plant capacity from 30.25 MW to 72.00 MW which falls under category “B” under

sector 1(d) of the EIA Notification 2006. Since the existing mill site does not fall under



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


any notified industrial area, public consultation will be conducted as per the

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification 2006.

The EIA study was undertaken by M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited, a

NABET accredited EIA consultant organization in conformity with the guidelines of

Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), covering all the

aspects of the conditions mentioned in the Terms of Reference issued by MoEF &CC

F.No. IA-J-11011/416/2008-IA.II(I), dated, 9th October 2018.

2. Environmental Management Aspects in the Existing Facility

The existing facility is permitted and consented to produce 1,60,800 TPA of writing

and printing paper and packaging board and pulp production capacity of 60,000 BD

TPA as per the Environmental Clearance obtained from Ministry of Environment, Forest

& Climate Change (MoEF&CC). The facility is granted with Consolidated Consent and

Authorization (CC&A) from GPCB vide their Consent No. AWH-63794 dated

28.07.2014, valid up to 10.04.2019 under Water (P & CP) Act 1974 and Air (P & CP)

Act 1981 as amended and under Hazardous Waste (M &H and TM) Rules 2008. JKPL,

Unit CPM is regularly submitting the compliance report to Regional Office, MoEF&CC,

and the facility has obtained certified compliance report for Environmental Clearance

2008 from MoEF&CC Regional Office, Bhopal vide letter No. 5-266/2008(ENV)/316

dated 07/08/2018.

The mill has total land area of 363 acres (Plant area 201 acres and Colony area 162

acres). The total areas of green belt and plantation constitutes to about 120 acres

covering about 33% of total area. The existing facility consists of paper machines,

board machine, pulp mill, captive power plant, chemical recovery section, lime kiln,

effluent treatment plant and other supporting facilities. The facility is permitted to

generate 30.25 MW of power from the captive power plant. The facility is permitted to

draw 5 MGD (22,730 m3/day) of water from Ukai Left Bank Main Canal. Currently the

fresh water consumption is about 20,500 m3/day including domestic and industrial

applications.



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


The flue gases generated from Boilers is the only source of emission which is vented

out through stacks of adequate dimensions after passing through ESPs and pollution

control systems. Electrostatic Precipitators (ESP) are installed on all 4 power boilers,

recovery boiler and also lime kiln to control the dust emissions to levels below the

stipulated norms of GPCB. Continuous emission monitoring systems have been

installed on all the stacks. In order to control the fugitive emissions from the coal and

ash handling areas, water sprinkling systems are installed.

Odour emissions are controlled at the existing facility by use of “closed feed” system in

the batch reactors. 100 % processing of black liquor in the evaporator for further

processing in the recovery boiler has been adopted. Ambient Air quality in the existing

facility is monitored once in a month and the data is submitted annually to GPCB.

The total wastewater generated at the existing facility is about 17,500 m³/day. The

existing ETP is designed for a capacity to handle 30,000 m³/day effluents. An online

wastewater quality monitoring system is installed to monitor the final treated

wastewater quality which is connected to GPCB server. The treated wastewater quality

conforms to the GPCB prescribed discharge limits.

More then 85% of the treated wastewater is utilized for irrigation needs and further

efforts are being made to utilize treated effluent for irrigation purpose. River water

quality data of the upstream and downstream of the Godanala confluence was

reported to be in line with water quality objectives stipulated by CPCB. Apart from

utilizing the treated wastewater for the existing greenbelt and plantation in the

company owned lands, it also being supplied to irrigation needs of the local farmers.

About 1050 acres of land in the nearby areas is getting benefitted due to utilization of

treated wastewater in the area.

Wood dust generated during the process of wood chipping is used as a fuel along with

coal in coal fired boiler. Fly ash from boilers is disposed as per fly ash management

rule 2009 and is utilized for the manufacturing of bricks and cement. Hazardous

waste generated from the existing facility includes ETP sludge and used oil which is

sold to board manufacturers and given to authorized recyclers respectively.



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


3. Details of the Proposed Project

The proposed Mill Modernization and Expansion Plan (MEP) is conceptualized to

increase the mill’s paper/board capacity to 360,800 tpa (increase by 200,000 tpa) with

Bleached Hard Wood Pulp (HWP) and Bleached Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp

(BCTMP). The details of the Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) are presented in detail in the

below Table;

Table-1: Plant Capacities (Existing v/s Post MEP)

S.No Description Unit Existing Post MEP

Incremental

Proposal

1 Paper/Board Machines section

1.1 PM#1&2 (PWP) tpa 60,000 60,000 - Existing will continue

1.2 PM#3 (Board) tpa 100,800 100,800 - Existing will continue

1.3 PM#4 (New Board)

tpa - 200,000 200,000 New Unit

1.4 Total Paper/board Production

tpa 160,800 360,800 200,000 -

tpd 480 1,080 600 -

1.5 Deinking Plant BD tpd - 150 150 New or Existing SFT will be converted to DIP

1.6 Secondary Fibre Treatment (SFT) Plant

BD tpd 200 600 400 Existing will be used with New 400 tpd SFT plant

2 Pulp Mill

2.1 Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp mill

BD tpa 60,000 160,000 100,000 Relocating and Reinstallation from JKPL unit, Rayagada, Orissa, with Upgradation. The existing pulp mill of capacity 60,000 BD tpa will be retired.

BD tpd 175 460 285

2.2 BCTMP mill AD tpa 100,000 100,000 New Unit

AD tpd 300 300

2.3 ClO2 plant tpd 2 15 15

Existing Non-integrated ClO2plant will be retired and New integrated ClO2 plant will be installed.

2.4 Oxygen Generation Plant

Nm3/hr 200 500 500

Installation of new O2generation plant of capacity 500 Nm3/hr. The existing O2 generation plant will be retired.

2.5 Pulp Wet lapping machine

tpd 150 150 New wet lap machine

3 Recovery plant

3.1 Evaporator

tph of water

evaporation

70 300 230

Existing Evaporator will be used for BCTMP waste liquor evaporation along with Reinstalled evaporator with upgradation

3.2 Recovery boiler

tpd of black liquor solids

335 950 950

Existing recovery boilerwill be retired and a new Recovery boiler will be installed

3.3 Lime kiln tpd of 90 230 140 Existing will be used



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary



Incremental

Proposal

lime alongwith re-installed lime kiln from JKPM or JKPM lime kiln will be re-installed with upgradation.

3.4 Recausticising plant

Whilte liquor

cum/day 1,000 3,000 2000

Existing plant will be upgraded with additional equipment.

4 Power Plant

4.1 Power Boilers tph of steam

170 360 190

CFB#1-20 (To be Retired) CFB#2 - 30 (To be Retired) CFB#3-50 (Operating), CFB#4 - 70 (Operating) New CFB#5 - 150 tph

(Operating) New CFB#6 - 90 tph (Standby)

4.2 Turbo Generators

MW 30.25 72.00 41.75

TG#1 - 3.125 (To be Retired), TG#2 - 3.125 (To be Retired) TG#3 - 12 (Operating), TG#4 - 12 (Operating) New TG#5 - 30 MW and New TG#6 18 MW will be installed

5 Others

5.1 PG Plant Nm³/hr 3000 10000 7000 New 7000 Nm³/h will be installed

5.2

Precipitated Calcium Carbonate (PCC) Plant (CaCO3)

tpm 1200 1200 -

Existing capacity is adequate. No change

5.3 Silicate Nano Fibers (CaSiO3)

tpm 1500 1500 - Existing capacity is adequate. No change

5.4 GCC plant tpd -- 100 100 New 100 tpd GCC plant will be installed

6 Water and Wastewater

6.1 Water Intake and Treatment Plant

m³/day 35,000 45,000 10000 Intake pump station and WTP will be upgraded.

6.2 Waste Water Treatment

m³/day

30,000

45,000

15000

The existing ETP will be upgraded up to tertiary level to meet the additional hydraulic volumes during the post project scenario

Some of the salient features of the proposed MEP are as below;

Replacing existing chlorine-based pulp mill with Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF)

process

Replacing existing conventional old digesters with state-of-the-art RDH cooking

Replacing old recovery boiler with new high pressure and efficient recovery

boiler

Installation of new BCTMP plant to substitute costly imported pulp

Making the mill more self-reliant on pulp for board/paper making



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


Generating more bio-fuel (black liquor solids) based energy

State-of-the-art Multilayer Coated Board Machine with energy efficiency

High pressure, high efficiency FBC boiler for better power generation through

co-generation

Higher efficiency turbo generators with low specific steam/t kWh

High efficiency ESP for coal fired boiler, Recovery boiler and Lime kiln to meet

stringent Particulate Matter (PM) norms

Non-Condensable Gases (NCG) collection system to collect Non-Condensable

Gases and incinerate in Lime kiln

Producer Gas (PG) plant to fire gas in lime kiln to reduce consumption of costly

furnace oil.

Adopting water conservation and efficient water management

Recycle and water conservation to reduce specific fresh water consumption

Upgradation of Wastewater treatment plant by segregating the colored and non-

colored effluents with tertiary treatment

3.1. Project Requirements

Major raw material for the proposed MEP is wood. The additional requirement of

3,52,000 TPA of wood/bamboo will be sourced from own plantation along with

purchase from local supply to meet any shortages. JKPL, Unit CPM has implemented

social and farm forestry plantations of Eucalyptus, Subabul and Casuarina within 350

Km radius of the mill covering different parts of Gujarat, Maharashtra and Madhya

Pradesh is about 1,35,000 acres of land. In addition, JKPL unit CPM has developed an

action plan for enhancing captive plantation by planting saplings within the facility.

The MEP proposals in the pulp mill are more focused on eliminating elemental

chlorine in bleaching, conservation of energy, water and reduction in specific chemical

consumption in bleaching. To meet the additional steam demand for power generation,

the Captive power plant capacity will be increased from 30.25 MW to 72.00 MW by

adding a new 30 MW TG, 18 MW TG and 150 tph CFBC boiler and 90 tph CFB boiler.

The existing two TGs of capacity 3.125 MW each and existing two boilers of capacities

20 tph and 30 tph will be retired.

Black liquor (generated in-house), indigenous, imported coal, lignite, furnace oil and

pet coke are the fuels. Coal/lignite will be used for power and steam generation.



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


Furnace oil with producer gas will be used in lime mud reburning kiln and furnace oil

will be used in start-up and stabilising the operations of chemical recovery boiler.

The total fresh water requirement will be increased from 20,500 m3/day to 37,000

m3/day whereas the specific water consumption will reduce from 40 m3/t to 32m3/t of

paper/board production. Necessary In principle Permission has been obtained for

additional quantity from Narmada Water Resource Water Supply and Kalpsar

Department.

Since the available free space in the mill will be used for project facilities, no additional

land is required.

4. Summary of Baseline Monitoring Studies

The project site (existing mill) is located at Village Gunsada, Bhimpura, Singalkhanch,

Fort Songadh Taluk, Tapi District in the State of Gujarat. The study area covers 10

km radius around the boundaries of the project site. As a part of EIA, the primary

baseline data monitoring has been conducted for three (3) months i.e., from 24th

September 2018 to 23rd December 2018 and the data has been generated by

MoEF&CC approved & NABL accredited Environmental Testing Laboratory M/s.

Vardan Enviro laboratory, Gurgaon. This baseline studies include Ambient Air

Quality Monitoring (AAQM), Soil Quality analysis, Water Quality analysis (Ground and

Surface water), and noise monitoring within 10 km radius of the Plant site as per the

Terms of Reference (ToR) issued by the MoEF&CC.

Eight (8) locations within the 10 km radius around the study area were selected for

soil sampling including three (3) locations where treated wastewater is utilized for

land irrigation. The pH of the soil ranges from 7.2 to 8.32 indicating that soil is

classified into moderately alkaline. The concentration of chlorides varied from 55.45

mg/100g to 93.79 mg/100g. Available Nitrogen level in the soil was found ranged

from 196 kg/ha to 362kg/ha (low to medium category). Calcium is in the range of

45.01 mg/100g to 73.26 mg/100g. No contamination of soil including the samples

where treated wastewater is utilized for land irrigation was observed.

The continuous weather monitoring station was installed near the proposed project

site at a height of 6m above the ground level and hourly measurements of the

following parameters were measured at site during the study period i.e. from 24th



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


September 2018 to 23rd December 2018. The predominant wind direction during the

study period was from East and North East. Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) monitoring

was conducted at eight (8) locations in the study area as per CPCB guidelines. The

average concentrations of PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOX in the study area ranged from

27.9 µg/m3 to 51.5 µg/m3, 57.8 µg/m3 to 86.5 µg/m3, 14.1 µg/m3 to 26 µg/m3 and

24.4 µg/m3 to 28.9 µg/m3 which is within the permissible range of 60 µg/m3, 100

µg/m3, 80 µg/m3 and 80 µg/m3 respectively as per NAAQ standards prescribed by

CPCB. Noise levels were recorded at the Mill site and other seven locations in the

study area. The observed values are complying with the NAAQ standards w.r.t. noise

prescribed by CPCB.

To assess the water quality of the study area, the water samples were collected at

Upstream and downstream of the Tapi River which is the major source of water for

the project. pH of Tapi River, Upstream and downstream water is in the range of 8.04

mg/l to 8.05 mg/l which is moderately alkaline. The TDS levels in the surface water of

upstream and downstream was found be 490 mg/l and 498 mg/l respectively. The

Fluoride concentration of Upstream and downstream was found to 0.65mg/l and

0.60mg/l respectively. The microbiological content as total coliform of upstream and

downstream was found to be 220 MPN/100 ml. All the values observed from the

analysis of river water were found to be within the permissible limits as per drinking

water, IS: 10500 –2012 “Specification for drinking Water”. To assess the ground water

quality of the study area, eight (8) ground water sampling locations were selected. The

analysis results of ground water samples indicate that the average pH ranged in

between 7.2 to 8.2. TDS ranged from 351.21 mg/l to 670 mg/l. The heavy metal

concentration was found to be Below Detectable Limit and fluoride concentrations

were observed to be in the ranges of 0.35mg/l to 0.58 mg/l. All the values observed

from the analysis of ground water were found to be within the permissible limits as

per drinking water, IS: 10500 –2012 “Specification for drinking Water”.

Flora and fauna studies were carried out during 26th – 29th September 2018 to assess

the list of terrestrial plant and animal species that occur in the core zone and the

buffer zone up to 10 km distance from the core zone boundary. As diversity of the

project concerned Zone III (10Km radius from project boundary) showed higher



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


diversity value than zone I (Core) and zone II (5Km radius from project site) since its

diversity enhanced by the reservoir, River and forest.

Primary Socioeconomic Survey was undertaken from 26th Sep 2018 to 29th Sep 2018.

During this survey, primary data in relation to geographical features, settlements,

roads and amenities in the respective villages were observed. The discussion was

mainly focused on mapping the existing amenities in the respective villages, felt basic

needs, Problems if any due to the existing project operation.

5. Prediction of Impacts and Environmental Management Plan

Unlike Greenfield projects, the proposed project will be limited to minor construction

activities such as earth work, foundations and flooring etc. Construction related

environmental impacts will be limited to plant site which are reversible in nature. The

proposed MEP is within the plant premises; hence, there will not be any change in the

land use pattern in the study area. The existing green cover in the plant will be

maintained 33% of the total area without any change in the landscape and

environmental and ecological setting.

The major source of emissions are Particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur dioxide (SO2) and

oxides of nitrogen (NOx) from the proposed coal fired boiler, augmentation in chemical

recovery boiler and lime kiln. Prediction of impacts on air environment has been

carried out by employing mathematical model (ISCST3 dispersion model).

The emission rates for the proposed coal fired boiler were estimated based on the new

thermal power plant standard dated 2015 for PM, SO2 and NOX (i.e. 30 mg/Nm3, 100

mg/Nm3 and 100 mg/Nm3 respectively). The emission rates for the proposed chemical

recovery boiler are estimated based on MoEF&CC limits for boilers used in the other

industries including paper and pulp, as per MoEF&CC notification dated 29th January

2018 which is 600 mg/Nm3 and 300 mg/Nm3 respectively for SO2 and NOx. Whereas,

the emission rates for the proposed limekiln are estimated based MoEF&CC standard

for lime kiln dated 22nd March 2018 which is 400 mg/Nm3 and 500 mg/Nm3

respectively for SO2 and NOx. Based on the findings of the detailed air quality

modelling exercise, it has been inferred that the resultant cumulative concentration



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


for estimated air pollutant emissions at around 10 Kms radius distance from proposed

project will comply with the NAAQ Standards and the peak predicted Ground Level

Concentrations (GLCs) i.e. 1.59 µg/m3, 9.48 µg/m3 and 6.03 µg/m3 respectively for

PM, SO2 and NOx will be observed within 2 km from the project site.

Dedicated Electrostatic Precipitators (ESP) will be installed for control of Particulate

Matter (PM) emissions from the proposed boiler in the captive power plant, proposed

chemical recovery boiler and lime kiln. High Efficient ESP will be designed to achieve

emission norms of 30 mg/Nm3 for the proposed coal fired boiler. It is proposed to

adopt dry limestone addition method for capturing SO2 emissions within the

combustion chamber of the proposed CFBC boiler. Stacks of adequate height will be

installed for the proposed coal fired boiler, chemical recovery boiler and lime kiln as

per the minimum stack height norms by CPCB for efficient dispersion of gases. The

NCGs and Mercaptans formed at the pulp mill section digesters, blow tank systems

and evaporators will be controlled by installing NCG gas extraction system

To control the wind-borne coal dust fugitive dust emissions, closed type storage sheds

and coal conveyer will be provided with water sprinkling system arrangement.

Necessary dust collection systems will be installed at coal handling, conveyors and

storage areas.

The major noise emitting sources at the project site are from proposed new Board

machine, Turbo Generator and Chipper. Board Machine will be housed inside building

and Entire Turbo Generators will be housed in co-generation power house with

suitable accoustic enclosure.

The specific water consumption per tonne of paper/board production will reduce

considerably from 40m3/t to 32 m3/t during the post MEP scenario due to the

adoption of ECF Bleaching technologies and other efficient water use processes and

water conservation operations. The additional fresh water required for the proposed

project (16,500 m3/day) will also be sourced from Ukai Left Bank Canal as per the

existing scenario. The specific wastewater generation per tonne of product will reduce

from 36 m3/T to 29 m3/T during the Post MEP scenario. The existing ETP of capacity



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


30,000 m3/day will be upgraded with addition of required new pollution abatement

equipment and processes to meet the additional hydraulic volumes during the post

MEP. The AOx levels in the treated wastewater will be maintained within the GPCB

limit of 8 mg/l. The treated wastewater quality will comply with the prescribed

MoEF&CC/GPCB limits.

About 27,800 m3/day of treated wastewater is proposed to be 100 % utilized for land

irrigation. The mill has about 1050 acres currently available for the utilization of

treated wastewater for land irrigation. Considering the application rate of 45

m3/ha/day for clayey soil as per the MoEF&CC notification dated 14th January 2016,

about 475 acres of additional land is required for the complete utilization of treated

wastewater for land irrigation. Thus, CPM unit has approached nearby farmers to

meet the additional land requirement for reusing the treated wastewater for irrigation.

Additional pumping and pipeline systems will be installed for disposal of additional

treated wastewater for irrigation in the area. However, considering the challenges in

utilizing 100% of the treated wastewater quantity for irrigation due to variations in the

cropping pattern, JKPL unit CPM requests MoEF&CC to grant permission to discharge

treated wastewater of about 15% into Goda Nala during off crop seasons and monsoon

after conforming to the discharge standards prescribed by GPCB. Continuous

monitoring studies will be undertaken by JKPL Unit CPM to monitor treated

wastewater quality, soil quality, river water quality and ground water quality to ensure

no adverse impacts are caused due to the discharge of treated wastewater into

River/Land.

No major solid wastes are generated from the paper and pulp mill and associated

processes. As per the existing practices, the wood dust will be used as alternative fuel

in Boiler, fly ash will be used for Cement/Brick manufacturing, lime grit will be used

as backfilling material at abandoned stone quarry, ETP sludge will be sold to board

manufacturers and spent oil will be disposed to authorized recyclers.



Dated: January 2019

Executive Summary


6. Conclusions

Full-fledged wastewater treatment facilities and high efficiency Electrostatic

Precipitators (ESP) and other pollution abatement measures will result in

minimizing the adverse impacts on the environment

The NCGs and Mercaptans formed at the pulp mill section digesters, blow tank

systems and evaporators will be controlled by installing NCG gas extraction

system

Total investment for the installation of project is Rs 1500 Crore. Out of which,

about Rs. 55 crore is allocated towards pollution control and monitoring

systems.

The management of JKPL, Unit CPM has spent about Rs.39.68 Lakhs on

various CSR activities in the financial year 2017-2018. In addition to CSR

activities, need based CER plan is developed. Rs. 375 Lakhs has been

embarked for the local community development within the vicinity of the project

area for 5 years as a part of Corporate Environment Responsibility.

The project will create direct employment to about 300 persons. In addition, it

would generate indirect employment to about 1000 persons in the industries

and service organizations and material handling, etc., which will be supported

by the operations of the mill.

This project will have significant beneficial effects in terms of growth and development

of the regional economy



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


Table of Contents

1. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 7

1.1 Overview of JK Organization ........................................................................... 7

1.2 Overview of JK Paper Ltd ................................................................................ 7

1.3 Awards and Achievements............................................................................... 7

1.4 Project of Interest ............................................................................................ 7

1.5 Existing Plant Location ................................................................................... 7

1.6 Need for the EIA study .................................................................................... 7

1.6.1 Project Screening (Cat A) and ToR ................................................................ 7

1.6.2 EIA Study .................................................................................................... 7

1.7 Overview of the Methodology of the EIA Study ................................................. 7

1.8 Regulatory Context.......................................................................................... 7

1.8.1 Ambient Air Quality Standards .................................................................... 7

1.8.2 Air Emission Discharge Standards ............................................................... 7

1.8.3 Minimum Stack Height Standards ............................................................... 7

1.8.4 Ambient Noise Standards ............................................................................. 7

1.8.5 Pulp and Paper mill- Specific Wastewater Discharge Standards ................... 7

1.8.6 Hazardous and other Waste (Management, and Transboundary Movement) Rule, 2016 ............................................................................................................. 7

1.9 Structure of EIA .............................................................................................. 7

2. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ASPECTS IN THE EXISTING FACILITIES ........ 7

2.1. Overview of the Existing Facilities ................................................................... 7

2.2. Land Use of the Existing Facilities................................................................... 7

2.3. Process description of Existing Facilities ......................................................... 7

2.3.1. Manufacturing Process of Paper ................................................................... 7

2.3.2. Manufacturing Process of Coated Packaging Board ...................................... 7

2.5. Power Requirement and Generation Facilities ................................................. 7

2.6. Water Requirement and Treatment Facilities ................................................... 7

2.7. Summary of Existing Pollution Sources and Environmental Management Plan 7

2.7.1. Air Quality Management Aspects ................................................................. 7

2.7.2. Wastewater Generation and Treatment ........................................................ 7

2.7.3. Utilization of Treated Effluent ...................................................................... 7

2.7.4. Noise Management ....................................................................................... 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


2.7.5. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management..................................................... 7

2.8. Greenbelt and Plantation ................................................................................ 7

2.9. Occupational Health Programs ........................................................................ 7

2.10. Industrial Safety Management ..................................................................... 7

2.11. Summary of Various CSR Programs ............................................................. 7

3. DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED EXPANSION ........................................................... 7

3.1. Overview of the Proposal ................................................................................. 7

3.1.1. Highlights of the Proposal ............................................................................ 7

3.1.2. Salient Features of the Project ..................................................................... 7

3.2. Details of MEP Proposals ................................................................................. 7

3.2.1. Board Machine Section ................................................................................ 7

3.2.2. Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp Mill .............................................................. 7

3.2.3. Bleached Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP) ..................................... 7

3.2.4. Chemical recovery Island ............................................................................. 7

3.2.5. Captive Power Plant ..................................................................................... 7

3.2.6. Water Intake and Treatment ........................................................................ 7

3.2.7. Wastewater Treatment ................................................................................. 7

3.2.8. Infrastructure .............................................................................................. 7

3.2.9. Plant capacities ............................................................................................ 7

3.3. Input Requirements ........................................................................................ 7

3.3.1. Raw Material Requirement ........................................................................... 7

3.3.2. Chemicals Requirement ............................................................................... 7

3.3.3. Steam and Power Requirement .................................................................... 7

3.3.4. Fuel Requirement ........................................................................................ 7

3.3.5. Water Requirement ...................................................................................... 7

3.3.6. Wastewater Generation, Treatment and Utilization of Treated Wastewater ... 7

3.3.7. Solid waste Generation and Disposal ........................................................... 7

3.4. Land Use Planning .......................................................................................... 7

3.5. Project Schedule and Project Cost ................................................................... 7

3.5.1. Project Schedule .......................................................................................... 7

3.5.2. Project Cost.................................................................................................. 7

3.6. Socioeconomic Benefits ................................................................................... 7

3.6.1. Improvement in the Infrastructure ............................................................... 7

3.6.2. Employment ................................................................................................ 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


3.6.3. Development of Ancillary Industries ............................................................. 7

4. BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS .................................................................. 7

4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 7

4.2 Study Area ...................................................................................................... 7

4.3 Scope and Methodology of Baseline Study ....................................................... 7

4.4 Administrative Setup of the study Area district ............................................... 7

4.5 Land Environment .......................................................................................... 7

4.5.1 Physiography and Drainage ......................................................................... 7

4.5.2 Land Use pattern Based on remote sensing data .......................................... 7

4.6 Geology ........................................................................................................... 7

4.6.1 Geology in the region ................................................................................... 7

4.6.2 Geology of the study area ............................................................................. 7

4.7 Geomorphology and Structure ........................................................................ 7

4.8 Soil Environment ............................................................................................ 7

4.8.1 Soil in the Region ......................................................................................... 7

4.9 Seismic Zone ................................................................................................... 7

4.10 Meteorological Data...................................................................................... 7

4.10.1 Climatological Data IMD- Surat Observatory (Nearest IMD station) ....... 7

4.10.2 Site Specific Meteorological Data ........................................................... 7

4.11 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring ................................................................... 7

4.12 Noise Environment ....................................................................................... 7

4.13 Water Environment ...................................................................................... 7

4.13.1 Surface Water Resources in the Study Area ........................................... 7

4.13.2 Surface water quality ............................................................................. 7

4.13.3 Ground water resources ........................................................................ 7

4.13.4 Movement of Ground Water ................................................................... 7

4.13.5 Ground Water Quality ........................................................................... 7

4.14 Ecological Environment ............................................................................... 7

4.14.1 Necessity of Ecology Management Plan .................................................. 7

4.14.2 Objectives of Ecological Monitoring ........................................................ 7

4.14.3 General Ecology and types of Forests and Flora ..................................... 7

4.14.4 Survey Methodology ............................................................................... 7

4.14.5 Quantitative Analysis of Vegetation ....................................................... 7

4.14.6 Results .................................................................................................. 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


4.14.7 Project site Greenbelt ............................................................................. 7

4.14.8 Agriculture in the Study Area ................................................................ 7

4.14.9 Faunal Diversity .................................................................................... 7

4.14.10 Diversity Indices .................................................................................... 7

4.15 Socio Economic Environment ....................................................................... 7

4.15.1 Objective of the Study Area .................................................................... 7

4.15.2 Methodology of The Study ...................................................................... 7

4.15.3 Socioeconomic Indicators considered for the study ................................ 7

4.15.4 Socio Economic Environment ................................................................ 7

4.15.5 Socioeconomic Profile of the Study Area ................................................ 7

5. ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES .................................. 7

5.1. General ........................................................................................................... 7

5.2. Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase ......................... 7

5.2.1. Land Use ..................................................................................................... 7

5.2.2. Air Quality ................................................................................................... 7

5.2.3. Noise Levels ................................................................................................. 7

5.2.4. Water Quality ............................................................................................... 7

5.2.5. Terrestrial Ecology ....................................................................................... 7

5.2.6. Socio-Economics .......................................................................................... 7

5.3. Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase .............................. 7

5.3.1. Impact on Land Use during Operational Phase ............................................ 7

5.3.2. Sources of Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts ..................... 7

5.3.3. Prediction of Ground Level Concentrations of Criteria Pollutants ................. 7

5.3.4. Control of Air Emissions .............................................................................. 7

5.3.5. Non-Condensable Gases and Impacts .......................................................... 7

5.3.6. Traffic Impact Study .................................................................................... 7

5.3.7. Noise Emissions and Compliance Status ...................................................... 7

5.3.8. Impact on Water Environment ..................................................................... 7

5.3.9. Solid Waste Generation and Disposal ........................................................... 7

5.3.10. Impacts on Ecological Environment ....................................................... 7

5.3.11. Impacts on Socio Economic Environment .............................................. 7

6. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES .............................................................................. 7

6.1. Introduction .................................................................................................... 7

6.2. Site Alternative ................................................................................................ 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


6.3. Technology Alternative .................................................................................... 7

7. ENVIROMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ................................................................... 7

7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 7

7.2 Objectives of Environmental Monitoring Plan .................................................. 7

7.1.1. Baseline Monitoring ..................................................................................... 7

7.1.2. Effects/Impact Monitoring: .......................................................................... 7

7.3 Compliance Monitoring: .................................................................................. 7

7.4 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure ....................................... 7

7.5 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure ....................................... 7

7.6 Data Analysis .................................................................................................. 7

7.7 Reporting Schedule ......................................................................................... 7

8. ADDITIONAL STUDIES .......................................................................................... 7

8.1. Public Consultation ......................................................................................... 7

8.2. Risk Assessment Study and Risk Mitigation Measures .................................... 7

8.2.1. Fire Safety.................................................................................................... 7

8.2.2. Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Systems .................................................... 7

8.2.3. Risks due to Storage and Handling of Coal and Risk Control Measures ....... 7

8.3. Occupational Health and Noise Management Plan ....................................... 7

8.2.4. Occupational Safety Management and Surveillance Programme ................... 7

9. PROJECT BENEFITS ............................................................................................. 7

9.1. Improvement in the infrastructure .................................................................. 7

9.2. Improvement in the social infrastructure ........................................................ 7

9.2.1. Employment ................................................................................................ 7

9.2.2. Revenue to State Government ...................................................................... 7

9.2.3. Development of ancillary industries ............................................................. 7

9.2.4. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) ............................................... 7

10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................................ 7

10.1. General ........................................................................................................ 7

10.1.1. Administrative Aspects .......................................................................... 7

10.1.2. Commitment and Policy ......................................................................... 7

10.1.3. Planning ................................................................................................ 7

10.1.4. Implementation ..................................................................................... 7

10.1.5. EHS Management System ...................................................................... 7

10.1.6. Environmental Management Records..................................................... 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


10.1.7. Environmental Management Plan Structure .......................................... 7

10.1.8. Measurement & Evaluation ................................................................... 7

10.2. Environmental Management Plan During Construction Phase ..................... 7

10.2.1. Site Preparation ..................................................................................... 7

10.2.2. Air quality Management during Construction Phase .............................. 7

10.2.3. Noise Level Management During Construction Phase ............................ 7

10.2.4. Water Quality Management during Construction Phase ......................... 7

10.2.5. Solid & Hazardous Waste Management During Construction Phase ...... 7

10.2.6. Ecological Management During the Construction Phase ........................ 7

10.2.7. Socio-Economic Aspects during the Construction Phase ........................ 7

10.3. Environmental Management Plan during Operation Phase ........................... 7

10.3.1. Air Quality Management Plan ................................................................ 7

10.3.2. Noise Management Plan ......................................................................... 7

10.3.3. Water and Wastewater Management ...................................................... 7

10.3.4. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management .............................................. 7

10.3.5. Sustainable Agro Forestry ...................................................................... 7

10.3.6. Ecology and Biodiversity Management Plan ........................................... 7

10.4. Corporate Environment Responsibility ......................................................... 7

10.4.1. Proposed CER Programs: ....................................................................... 7

10.4.2. Proposed CER Budget ............................................................................ 7

10.5. EMP Budget ................................................................................................. 7

11. CONCLUSIONS .................................................................................................. 7

12. DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ...................................................................... 7

12.1. Introduction ................................................................................................. 7

12.2. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant ....................... 7

12.2.1. Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study................... 7

12.2.2. NABET Certificate .................................................................................. 7

12.3. SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited –Technical Consultant ..................... 7

12.3.1. Work-Place Facilities ............................................................................. 7

12.3.2. Structure ............................................................................................... 7

12.3.3. Manning ................................................................................................ 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


List of Tables

Table 1-1 Environmental Setting of the Project Site ................................................................. 7 Table 1-2 National Ambient Air Quality Standards .................................................................. 7 Table 1-3 General Noise Standards ......................................................................................... 7 Table 1-4 Wastewater Discharge Standards ............................................................................ 7 Table 1-5 Discharge Norms of GPCB as per the Consent to Operate of JKPL, Unit CPM dated 08/02/16 .............................................................................................................................. 7 Table 1-6 List of Hazardous Wastes as Applicable to Pulp & Paper Industry ............................ 7 Table 2-1 Chronology of the Existing Environmental Clearances ............................................. 7 Table 2-2 Overview of the Details of the Existing Facilities ...................................................... 7 Table 2-3 Land Use break up of the Existing Facility ............................................................... 7 Table 2-4 Fuel used in Existing Facility and their characteristics ............................................ 7

Table 2-5 Water Consumption in the Existing Facility ............................................................. 7 Table 2-6 Existing Stack Details ............................................................................................. 7 Table 2-7 Stack Emissions as per latest GPCB test report ....................................................... 7 Table 2-8 Treated Effluent Quality as per third party assessment test report ........................... 7 Table 2-9 Solid and Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal .............................................. 7 Table 3-1 Existing and Post MEP Mill Capacities..................................................................... 7 Table 3-2 Raw Materials Requirement .................................................................................... 7 Table 3-3 Chemicals Requirement .......................................................................................... 7 Table 3-4 Steam and Power requirement ................................................................................ 7 Table 3-5 Fuel Requirement ................................................................................................... 7 Table 3-6 Water Balance for the Proposed MEP ....................................................................... 7 Table 3-7 Wastewater Treatment and Discharge after MEP ..................................................... 7 Table 3-8 Solid and Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal .............................................. 7 Table 3-9 Land Use Break up during Post MEP ....................................................................... 7

Table 3-10 Project Cost Break Up ........................................................................................... 7 Table 4-1 Various Environmental Attributes ........................................................................... 7 Table 4-2 Frequency and Monitoring Methodology .................................................................. 7 Table 4-3 Details of the Satellite Data ..................................................................................... 7 Table 4-4Built Up Land in 10 km radius from the Project Site ................................................. 7 Table 4-5 Overall Summary of the Statistics of LU/LC in the study Area ................................. 7 Table 4-6 Geological Succession ............................................................................................. 7 Table 4-7 Details of Soil Sampling Locations ........................................................................... 7 Table 4-8 Physico-Chemical Characteristics of Soil samples Collected within the Study Area ... 7 Table 4-9 Indian Meteorological Department – Climatological Tables 30 Years Data: 1971-2000 (Surat IMD station) ................................................................................................................ 7 Table 4-10 AAQ monitoring stations Location details .............................................................. 7 Table 4-11 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants during the Study Period .................................................................................................................................... 7 Table 4-12 PM2.5 Concentration in the Study Area during the study period .............................. 7

Table 4-13PM10 Concentration in the Study Area during the study period ............................... 7 Table 4-14 SO2 Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period .............................. 7 Table 4-15 NOx Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period ............................. 7 Table 4-16Ammonia Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period ....................... 7 Table 4-17Ozone Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period ............................ 7 Table 4-18 Noise Sampling Locations ..................................................................................... 7 Table 4-19 Recorded Noise Levels ........................................................................................... 7 Table 4-20Surface Water Sampling Locations ......................................................................... 7 Table 4-21Analysis Results of Surface Water Samples ............................................................ 7 Table 4-22 Ground Water Sampling Location Details .............................................................. 7 Table 4-23Analyzed Ground Water Quality for Various parameters in the Study Area .............. 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


Table4-24 Survey Locations of Terrestrial Ecology................................................................... 7 Table 4-25 Density, abundance and frequency of occurrence of flora in the zone I ................... 7 Table 4-26 Density, abundance and frequency of occurrence of flora in the zone II .................. 7 Table 4-27 Density, abundance and frequency of occurrence of flora in the zone III ................. 7 Table 4-28 List of ground level storey herbaceous species observed in the study area .............. 7 Table 4-29 List of Shrub species observed in the study area .................................................... 7 Table 4-30 List of Trees species observed in the study area (Buffer zone) ................................. 7 Table 4-31 List of Agriculture crops observed in the study area ............................................... 7 Table4-32 List of ecologically important plant species observed in the study area .................... 7 Table4-33Mammals in the study area (Buffer zone) ................................................................. 7 Table 4-34Biodiversity indices of the study area ..................................................................... 7 Table 4-35 Administrative Status of Study Area Villages/Towns .............................................. 7 Table 4-36 Summary Socioeconomic Indicator ........................................................................ 7

Table 5-1 Estimations from Proposed 150 tph Boiler (In operation) ......................................... 7 Table 5-2 Estimation of emissions from Proposed Chemical Recovery Boiler ............................ 7 Table 5-3 Estimation of Emissions from Proposed Lime Kiln ................................................... 7 Table 5-4 Emission rate details for air modeling with Indigenous Coal ..................................... 7 Table 5-5 Estimated Resultant GLC’s of Particulate Matter ..................................................... 7 Table 5-6Estimated Resultant GLC’s of Sulphur Dioxide ......................................................... 7 Table 5-7 Estimated Resultant GLC’s of Oxides of Nitrogen ..................................................... 7 Table 5-8 Summary of the Predicted GLCs in the Nearby Areas ............................................... 7 Table 5-9 Estimated NCGs and H2S emissions from the Pulp Mill during Post Project Scenario based on USEPA AP42 emission factors .................................................................................. 7 Table 5-10 PCU Equivalent Factor .......................................................................................... 7 Table 5-11 Average Traffic Count for the Location ................................................................... 7 Table 5-12 Estimated Traffic Volume during Post Project Scenario .......................................... 7 Table 5-13 Water Balance for the Proposed MEP ..................................................................... 7

Table 5-14 Treated Wastewater Characteristics Post MEP ....................................................... 7 Table 5-15 AOx levels in Treated Wastewater Post MEP........................................................... 7 Table 5-16 Utilization of Treated Wastewater (Monsoon and Non-Monsoon Period) .................. 7 Table 5-17 Treated Wastewater Application Rates as per MoEF&CC notification dated 14th January 2016 for different soil conditions ............................................................................... 7 Table 5-18 River Water Quality due to the discharge of treated wastewater .............................. 7 Table 5-19 Soil Quality in the Study Area v/s areas with Application of treated Wastewater ..... 7 Table 5-20 Solid and Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal ............................................ 7 Table 7-1 Environmental Monitoring Program ......................................................................... 7 Table 7-2 Recommended Environmental Monitoring Plan ........................................................ 7 Table 8-1 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health Surveillance Programme ......................................................................................................... 7 Table 10-1 Details of the Area in the Existing mill ................................................................... 7 Table 10-2 Predicted Pre-Construction Runoff ........................................................................ 7 Table 10-3 Predicted Post Construction Run-Off ..................................................................... 7 Table 10-4 Proposed CER Budget ........................................................................................... 7 Table 10-5 EMP Budget Allocation .......................................................................................... 7

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Photographs of Awards and Achievements ............................................................. 7 Figure 1-2 Location of the Project Site .................................................................................... 7 Figure 1-3 Toposheet Showing 10 km radius of the Project Site ............................................... 7 Figure 1-4 Google Earth Imagery showing the boundary of the Existing Plant Mill ................... 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


Figure 2-1 Pulp and Paper Manufacturing Process Flow Diagram ............................................ 7 Figure 2-2 Typical view of Paper, Pulp and Board Plant at the Existing Facility ........................ 7 Figure 2-3 Typical View of Boilers in the Existing Facility ........................................................ 7 Figure 2-4 Typical View of TGs at the Existing Facility ............................................................ 7 Figure 2-5 Water Distribution System at Existing Facility (April 2017 to March 2018) ............. 7 Figure 2-6 Water Treatment Facilities at Existing Plant ........................................................... 7 Figure 2-7 Environmental Management Cell ........................................................................... 7 Figure 2-8 Typical View of Existing Air Pollution Control Systems ........................................... 7 Figure 2-9 Typical View of Existing ETP Facilities ................................................................... 7 Figure 2-10 Flow Diagram of Existing Effluent Treatment Plant .............................................. 7 Figure 2-11 Utilization of treated wastewater for Irrigation and Plantation ............................... 7 Figure 2-12 Typical View Greenbelt and Plantation within the Facility ..................................... 7 Figure 2-13 Photographs of the Existing OHC ......................................................................... 7

Figure 2-14 Fire Safety Systems in the Existing Unit .............................................................. 7 Figure 2-15 Corporate Social Responsibility Initiatives and Activities ...................................... 7 Figure 3-1 Stock Preparation Process Flow Sheet .................................................................... 7 Figure 3-2 Typical Flow Diagram of Coated Board Making ....................................................... 7 Figure 3-3 Typical board machine configuration ..................................................................... 7 Figure 3-4 Process Flow Diagram of the Pulp Mill ................................................................... 7 Figure 3-5 Process Flow Diagram of BCTMP Pulp Mill ............................................................. 7 Figure 3-6 Typical Flow Sheet of Chemical Recovery Island ..................................................... 7 Figure 3-7 Views of areas earmarked for Project facilities ........................................................ 7 Figure 4-1Project Site Showing Nearest State Highway ............................................................ 7 Figure 4-2Topo Map (10 Km radius) of the Study area ............................................................ 7 Figure 4-3Administrative Map of the Tapi district ................................................................... 7 Figure 4-4 Physiographic map of the Study Area ..................................................................... 7 Figure 4-5 Major river Basin of Tapi District ........................................................................... 7

Figure 4-6 Drainage Map of the Study Area ............................................................................ 7 Figure 4-7 Satellite Imagery of 10 km radius from Project Site ................................................ 7 Figure 4-8Flow Chart showing Methodology of Land Use Mapping ........................................... 7 Figure 4-9 Land Use Classification of 10 km radius from the Project Site ................................ 7 Figure 4-10 Built Up Land in Rural Area ................................................................................ 7 Figure 4-11 Agricultural Land in Rural Area ........................................................................... 7 Figure 4-12 Forest Land in Rural Area.................................................................................... 7 Figure 4-13 Photographs showing the land with or without scrub in the study area ................ 7 Figure 4-14Water Bodies in Study Area .................................................................................. 7 Figure 4-15 Land use classes around 10 km radius from the project site................................. 7 Figure 4-16 Geological Map of Tapi District ............................................................................ 7 Figure 4-17 Soil Map of Gujarat ............................................................................................. 7 Figure 4-18 Soil Classification Map of the Study Area ............................................................. 7 Figure 4-19 Soil Quality Monitoring Location in the Study Area .............................................. 7 Figure 4-20 Photographs of Soil Sampling .............................................................................. 7 Figure 4-21 Seismic zone Map of India ................................................................................... 7 Figure 4-22 Seismic Zone Map of Gujarat ............................................................................... 7 Figure 4-23 earthquake Hazard Map ...................................................................................... 7 Figure 4-24 Annual Windrose as per IMD Surat Observatory data (30 years average data-1971-2001) ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Figure 4-25 Seasonal Windrose as per IMD Surat Observatory Data ........................................ 7 Figure 4-26 Map showing the air quality monitoring stations .................................................. 7 Figure 4-27 Site Photographs of AAQ Stations ........................................................................ 7 Figure 4-28 Trends of Ambient PM2.5 Concentration in the Study Area .................................... 7 Figure 4-29Trends of Ambient PM10 Concentration in the Study Area ...................................... 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


Figure 4-30Trends of Ambient SO2 Concentration in the Study Area ....................................... 7 Figure 4-31 Trends of Ambient NOx Concentration in the Study Area ...................................... 7 Figure 4-32Trends of Ambient NH3 Concentration in the Study Area ....................................... 7 Figure 4-33Trends of Ambient Ozone Concentration in the Study Area .................................... 7 Figure 4-34Noise Sampling Locations in the Study Area ......................................................... 7 Figure 4-35 Photograph showing the location of Surface Water Sampling ................................ 7 Figure 4-36Location of Surface Water Sampling during the Study Period ................................. 7 Figure 4-37 Bhurvel Observation well (CGWB) Ground Water Level (BGL) ............................... 7 Figure 4-38 Ground water level zone Pre-Monsoon ................................................................. 7 Figure 4-39 Ground Water level zone Post-Monsoon ............................................................... 7 Figure 4-40 Ground Water Table Pre-Monsoon ....................................................................... 7 Figure 4-41 Ground Water Table Post-Monsoon ...................................................................... 7 Figure 4-42Photographs of Groundwater Sampling ................................................................. 7

Figure 4-43Ground Water Quality Monitoring Sampling Locations in the Study Area ............... 7 Figure 4-44 Forest Blocks in the Study Area ........................................................................... 7 Figure 4-45 Vegetation Structure ........................................................................................... 7 Figure 4-46 Google Map Showing Ecology Survey Locations .................................................... 7 Figure 4-47Plankton sampling at upstream and downstream of Tapi river ............................... 7 Figure 4-48Plantations Green cover inside Existing Mill and their clonal plant production center (Nursery area) .............................................................................................................. 7 Figure 4-49 Photographs shows various Flora species observed in the study area .................... 7 Figure 4-50 Agriculture fields in the Study Area ..................................................................... 7 Figure 4-51 List of birds species observed in the study area .................................................... 7 Figure 4-52 various birds species observed in the study area .................................................. 7 Figure 4-53 Administrative Map showing the Study Area villages ............................................ 7 Figure 4-54 Reconnaissance and Primary Survey .................................................................... 7 Figure 4-55 Typical Gamit Tribe Houses ................................................................................. 7

Figure 4-56Gamit men carrying Bamboo ................................................................................ 7 Figure 4-57Workers Group Distribution ................................................................................. 7 Figure 4-58 Water supply in villages ....................................................................................... 7 Figure 5-1 Predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of Particulate Matter within 10 km Radius of the Study Area ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Figure 5-2 Predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of Sulphur Dioxide within 10 km Radius of the Study Area ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Figure 5-3 Predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of Oxides of Nitrogen within 10 km Radius of the Study Area ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Figure 5-4 Project Site Showing Nearest State Highway ........................................................... 7 Figure 5-5 Predicted Noise Levels from the Proposed Project.................................................... 7 Figure 5-6 Water Balance Diagram for the Proposed MEP ....................................................... 7 Figure 5-7 Recommended ETP Scheme for the proposed Project .............................................. 7 Figure 5-8 Photographs of River Tapi in the Study Area .......................................................... 7 Figure 5-9Predicted dispersion model of TDS in the Ground water .......................................... 7 Figure 8-1 Existing Fire Safety Systems .................................................................................. 7 Figure 8-2 Photographs of the OHC ........................................................................................ 7 Figure 10-1 Certification of JKPL, Unit CPM ........................................................................... 7 Figure 10-2 Integrated Management System Policy of JKPL, Unit CPM .................................... 7 Figure 10-3 Existing Storm Water drain ................................................................................. 7 Figure 10-4 Picture showing Rain water harvesting through storm water drain ....................... 7



Dated: January 2019

Table of Contents


List of Annexure

Annexure No. Description

1. Copy of ToR letter issued by MoEF & CC

2. NABET Accreditation status of the EIA Consultant

3. Summary compliance statement of the issued Terms of Reference

4. Copy of Environmental Clearances of the existing facility

5. Copy of Valid Consolidated Consent and Authorization from GPCB

6. RO Certified EC Compliance Letter

7. Coal Supply Agreement between Western Coalfield Limited & JKPL

8. (a) Water drawl permission letter from the Water Resources department, Gujarat

(b) In-principle permission of 10 MGD for the additional water withdrawl

9. Recent test reports of GPCB Stack monitoring

10. External Laboratory wastewater quality Analysis test report & Test Report of AoX Assessment of treated wastewater

11. External Laboratory Ambient Noise Level Test Reports

12. MoU with Cement/Brick Manufacturing Plants for Usage of Fly Ash

13. Overall Mill Layout Post MEP

14. Baseline Monitoring Soil Quality test report

15. Baseline Monitoring Ambient Air Qaulity Test Reports

16. Baseline Monitoring Noise Monitoring Test Reports

17. Baseline Monitoring Surface Water Quality and Ground Water Quality Test Reports

18. Air Quality Modeling Modelling Input & Output Files

19. A sample MoU with farmer for the additional utilization of treated wastewater for land irrigation



Dated: January 2019

Chapter-1, Introduction


1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Overview of JK Organization

J.K. Organization is a multinational group head-quartered in India with a heritage of

more than 125 years.

It has overseas manufacturing operations in Mexico, Indonesia, Romania, Belgium,

Portugal and UAE. JK Organization includes companies such as JK Tyre, JK Paper, JK

Lakshmi Cement, JK Fenner, Umang Dairies, JK Insurance etc. Products of the JK

Group have a strong brand recall with significant market share in their respective

segments.

1.2 Overview of JK Paper Ltd

JK Paper Ltd. has two large integrated paper manufacturing units namely JK Paper

Mills at Rayagada, Odisha and Central Pulp Mills (CPM) at Songadh, Gujarat with a

combined capacity of 4,55,000 TPA. It is the market leader in Branded Copier paper

segment and among the top players in Coated Paper and high-end Packaging Boards

and is a leading exporter of Branded Copier Papers from India with exports to almost

35 countries. It is the first paper manufacturing company in India to get TPM

Certificate from JIPM, Japan.

Unit CPM, Songadh commenced production in 1968 and was acquired by JK Group in

1992. The packaging board plant was commissioned in the year 2007. The products

manufactured in the unit are writing and printing paper, cut size multipurpose office

paper, multi-layer packaging boards and security paper.

Unit CPM, Songadh is spreading in an area of 363 acres of land comprising main plant

and its supporting facilities, colony, green belt and plantation area. The existing

facility is permitted and consented to produce 1,60,800 TPA of writing and printing

paper and packaging board (Writing and printing paper - 60,000 TPA, Duplex Coated

Board – 1,00,800 TPA) and pulp production capacity of 60,000 BD TPA as per the

Environmental Clearance obtained from Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate

Change (MoEF&CC).



Dated: January 2019



1.3 Awards and Achievements

Various initiatives have brought in recognition for the company and awarded with

several accolades. The industry has well-defined policies including Environmental

Policy, Quality Policy, Energy Policy, Occupational Health & Safety Policy which are

adopted in operational practices.

Figure 1-1 Photographs of Awards and Achievements

Golden Peacock Environment Management

Award 2012 Greentech Environment Award 2015

Greentech Safety Gold Award 2018 HR Leadership Award 2017



Dated: January 2019



1.4 Project of Interest

In the view of upgrading the existing paper and pulp mill at unit CPM, the

management of JKPL has proposed to increase the paper/board production capacity

from 1,60,800 TPA to 3,60,800 TPA by installing a new board manufacturing unit of

capacity 2,00,000 TPA. The existing pulp mill of capacity 60,000 BD TPA will be

replaced with ECF based Chemical Wood Pulp (CWP) mill of capacity 1,60,000 BD TPA

which will be shifted from JKPL, Rayagada unit and re-installed. A new Bleached

Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP) of capacity 1,00,000 AD TPA, De-Inking

Plant (DIP) of capacity 150 BD TPD and Secondary Fibre Treatment (SFT) Plant of

capacity 400 BD TPD are proposed to cater to the fibre demand of the varieties of

Boards for the proposed new Board machine. The supporting facilities for the proposed

increase in capacities such as chemical recovery section, power plant, effluent

treatment plant (ETP) will be augmented/upgraded based on the requirement.

The proposal under the Modernization and Expansion Plan (MEP) of existing

Paper/Board Manufacturing Plant at JKPL Unit: CPM includes the following;

Installation of One New Board Machine



Dated: January 2019



Installation of Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp Mill (To be Shifted from

Rayagada unit and re-installed). The existing old pulp mill will be kept as

standby without increasing the intended overall production capacity.

Installation of BCTMP Mill, DIP and SFT Plants.

Installation of New Chemical Recovery Boiler. (Existing Chemical Recovery

Boiler will be kept as standby)

Augmentation/upgradation of Co-generation Plant

Augmentation/upgradation of Water Treatment Plant

Augmentation/upgradation of Effluent Treatment Plant

Augmentation/upgradation of supporting infrastructure

1.5 Existing Plant Location

The existing plant is situated at Village Gunsada, Bhimpura, Singalkhanch, Fort

Songadh Taluk, Tapi District in the State of Gujarat (Figure 1.2). The plant is located

in the Southern side of the Gujarat State near to the Maharashtra border which is

about 5 km (aerial distance) away from the plant boundary towards southeast

direction. There is a State Highway (SH-174) passing through the main plant and

colony/plantation area. The nearest International Airport is located in Surat which is

about 75 km (aerial distance) away from the plant.

The existing plant, its associated infrastructure and facilities is extended up to 363

acres of land including green belt and plantation of about 120 acres covering 33% of

total area. The site is located at the intersection of latitude 21°12’N and longitude

73°34'E and falls under the Survey of India Topography Map No. 46G/7, 46G/8,

46G/11 and 46G/12. The toposheet showing the 10 km radius of the existing project

site is presented in the Figure 1.3. The Google Earth Imagery showing the boundary

of the total facility is presented in the Figure 1.4. The ecologically notified Poorna

Wildlife Sanctuary (The Gazette of India, S.O. 1259 (E)) is located at 19 km (aerial

distance) from the project boundary.



Dated: January 2019



Figure 1-2 Location of the Project Site



Dated: January 2019



Figure 1-3 Toposheet Showing 10 km radius of the Project Site



Dated: January 2019



Figure 1-4 Google Earth Imagery showing the boundary of the Existing Plant Mill

The environmental setting of the project site is presented in the Table 1.1.

Table 1-1 Environmental Setting of the Project Site

S. No. Particulars Details

1 Latitude 21°12’N

2 Longitude 73°34'E

3 Present land use at the site

Industrial

4 Nearest highway State Highway SH-174 adjacent to the project site

5 Nearest railway station Ukai Songadh Railway Station-6.3 Km, South Surat Railway Station- 75 km, W

6 Nearest airport Surat Airport – 86 Km, W

7 Nearest town / city Town- Songadh-4.3 Km, S Nearest City/District Head Quarters–Vyara- 21 km

8 Water body Ukai Dam- 5 km, N Tapi River- 5 km, N

9 Archaeologically important places

Nil in 10 Km radius

10 National parks / Wildlife Sanctuaries

Nil in 10 Km radius

11 Reserved / Protected Nil in 10 Km radius



Dated: January 2019



S. No. Particulars Details

Forests

12 Seismicity Seismic zone-III as per IS-1893 (Part-1) - 2002

13 Defense Installations Nil in 10 Km radius

14 Major Industries Located around the area

Ukai Thermal Power Plant- 600 m to West of the Project Site.

1.6 Need for the EIA study

According to the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification issued by

Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEF&CC) under

Environment Protection Act, pulp and paper industries (excluding manufacture

of paper from waste paper) are required to obtain environmental clearance for

any expansion or modernisation. In addition to this, any captive co-generation

power plant with a capacity greater than 5 MW should also obtain

environmental clearance.

Since the proposed MEP involves manufacturing of additional product including

pulp, the proposed project falls under category “A” under sector 5(i) of the EIA

notification 2006. In addition, it is proposed to increase the existing captive

power plant capacity from 30.25 MW to 72.00 MW which falls under category

“B” under sector 1(d) of the EIA Notification 2006. Since the existing mill site

does not fall under any notified industrial area, public consultation will be

conducted as per the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification 2006.

1.6.1 Project Screening (Cat A) and ToR

The proposed MEP was appraised by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry-

I), Ministry of Environment Forest and Climate change (MoEF&CC) during the

35th Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) meeting held on 17th to 18th September

2018 and the project was accorded Terms of Reference (ToR) vide File no. IA-J-

enclosed as Annexure 1.

1.6.2 EIA Study

The EIA study was undertaken in conformity with the guidelines of Ministry of

Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) and Expert Appraisal Committee



Dated: January 2019



(EAC), covering all the aspects of the specific conditions mentioned in the terms of

reference issued by MoEF&CC.

This EIA study was undertaken by M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited, a

NABET accredited EIA consultant organisation, with specific project related inputs

required for undertaking the EIA studies from SPB Projects and Consultancy Ltd

(SPB-PC), Chennai.

M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd has been accredited to undertake EIA

studies for Pulp and Paper Sector and Thermal Power Plants as per the NABET

accreditation scheme. A copy of the latest accreditation status is presented in Annexure

2.

1.7 Overview of the Methodology of the EIA Study

This Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report has been prepared based

on the methods and guidelines suggested by MoEF to address all the specific

conditions stipulated in the Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC File no IA-

J-11011/416/2008-IA.II(I), dated, 9th October 2018. A summary compliance

statement to the specific conditions of the terms of reference is presented in

Annexure 3.

The EIA study team, headed by an accredited EIA Coordinator, along with the

approved Functional Area Experts, undertook detailed baseline studies as per

ToR, from 25th September 2018 to 22th December 2018.

Micro-meteorological data comprising hourly readings of wind speed, wind direction, dry

bulb temperature, relative humidity and rainfall were measured by installing

meteorological station. Hourly readings were collected for a period of three (3) months.

Micro-meteorological data was adopted for generating wind-rose diagrams and

also to predict the ground level concentrations due to release of emissions from

the proposed facility.

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) was monitored at eight (8) locations in the study area as per

the methods and procedures recommended by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB)

Air quality sampling was undertaken for a period of 12 weeks with a total of 24 samples

per site were taken as per the MoEF&CC guidelines. Stipulated criteria pollutants such

as particulate matter size less than 10 microns (PM10), particulate matter size less than



Dated: January 2019



2.5 microns (PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2), Ammonia (NH3),

Ozone (O3), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Arsenic (As), Benzene and

Particulate phase Benzo (a) Pyrene (BaP) were analysed at all the locations. The

measured background air quality data was compared with that of the prevailing

National Ambient Air Quality Standards and this will also form the basis for predicting

the cumulative air quality scenario due to the operation of the proposed facility.

Hydro-geological studies were undertaken during the study period. Data on sub-surface

soil profile in the study area was obtained. In addition, a preliminary study on the

regional and local aquifer status was studied based on primary and secondary

published long-term data.

Ground water samples from eight (8) locations were analysed as per the terms of

reference for all the designated parameters. The measured values were compared with

drinking water standards. Secondary data on the regional ground water status was also

collected from the Central Ground Water Board and the State Ground Water Board.

All seasonal streams and rivers located within the study area were mapped through

latest remote sensing data under land use and land cover study. Walkthrough surveys

were undertaken to assess the current status of the water resources. Details about the

major cropping pattern and irrigation methods etc were collected from local village

offices and also published district census data. Details of the surface water quality in

the study area (upstream and downstream of Tapi River) were also collected and

analysed for designated physiochemical, elemental and biological parameters.

Land use and land cover was mapped using remote satellite imagery, IRS-P6, LISS III

satellite. The data was processed using applicable software models and level 1 land use

classification within the study area was developed and level 2 land use classification

within the study area was developed. Digital Elevation Model of the study area was

developed to assess the terrain conditions and also possible flooding scenarios

A walkthrough survey was also undertaken in the study area, major settlements and

plantation areas to verify the land use as a part of the ground truth survey procedures.

Soil samples were collected in the study area (including the areas where treated

wastewater is utilized for land irrigation) as per the terms of reference and all relevant

parameters such as texture, nutrients, heavy metals, oil and grease and other

parameters were analyzed.

Ecological & Biological survey was undertaken in the study area and all spotted

ecological and biological aspects were mapped based on grid sampling method. Bio-



Dated: January 2019



diversity density and abundance were estimated. Walkthrough surveys were conducted

in the study area to assess the ecology.

Primary socio-economic survey was undertaken in the study area to capture the

socioeconomic conditions, major occupation of the people, drinking water and

sanitation facilities, transportation and other amenities in the study area, with a

specific reference to the villages located within five (5) km radius of the existing Mill site.

In addition to the above, district level census data published by National Informatics

Centre (NIC) was also collected from 10 km radius study area for a detailed analysis on

the socio-economic aspects. Based on the socio-economic survey, a need-based

Community Development Plan under Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) was

suggested. Since, existing mill premises will be used for the MEP Studied no land

acquisition involved, detailed Rehabilitation and Resettlement studies are not envisaged

under this study; however, the indirect impacts on the local and regional community

due to the proposed MEP project were studied.

A detailed review on the process and material balance of the proposed operations were

undertaken. Water balance diagrams were developed as per the terms of reference

issued for the proposed MEP project. In addition, a detailed review on the process

technology, material balance, source of raw materials, fuels etc were also studied.

A typical review on the process equipment, various pollution control systems proposed

details of wastes and discharges that are envisaged from the proposed project were also

undertaken. Such inputs are adopted while predicting various environmental impacts

due to operation of the facility and also to suggest an appropriate environmental

management plan and environmental monitoring plan.

As a part of the environmental impact assessment study, an attempt was made to

predict the possible and likely impacts on background environment. Likely air quality

impacts due to release of emissions (captive co-generation power plant and vehicular

emissions) were modelled using ISCST3 model. Ground level concentration of criteria

pollutants such as Particulate Matter, Sulphur Dioxide, Oxides of Nitrogen were

estimated using ISCST3 model. Hourly meteorological data generated was adopted to

assess ground level concentrations. Highest ground level concentrations were predicted

and concentration isopleths of the above-mentioned pollutants were plotted.

The predicted ground level concentrations of the respective pollutants were added to the

prevailing baseline concentrations of the designated pollutants to assess the likely



Dated: January 2019



cumulative post project scenario and such values were compared with the National

Ambient Air Quality Standards.

Noise generating sources were identified and the expected noise levels were estimated.

ISO compliant noise propagation models were adopted to predict likely noise levels at

the facility boundary and nearby villages.

Impact & measures for fugitive emission control was studied. Impact due to utilization

of treated wastewater for green cover and irrigation applications was studied.

In addition to the above aspects, the positive environmental benefits arising from

community development plans under CER (Corporate Environment Responsibility)

budget allocated for the proposed project, ecological and biodiversity enhancement

aspects due to development of plantation and green-cover development in the vicinity of

the Mill site were also studied.

Based on a detailed environmental impact assessment study, a comprehensive report on

the environmental management plan was developed covering the following aspects:

construction phase environmental management plan, air quality management plan,

noise and water quality management plan, wastewater treatment, reuse, recycling and

disposal programme, solid and hazardous waste collection, storage and disposal

programme, fly ash collection and utilization plan, rainwater harvesting plan, socio

economic and community development plan, ecological and biodiversity enhancement

plan. An outline of the proposed environmental management systems, environmental

cell and environmental monitoring programme were also presented in this report.

Although the proposed facility utilizes the limited quantities of flammable and

combustible materials with threshold levels below the stipulated quantities under

Hazardous Waste Management, Handling and Transboundary movement Rules 2016, a

preliminary risk assessment study, was undertaken to assess the residual risks, if any,

due to storage and handling of furnace oil, coal and other combustible material.

CPCB guidelines on risk assessment methods were adopted and qualitative methods

were adhered. Based on the qualitative risk assessment study, a preliminary fire safety

and occupational health management plan was suggested.

1.8 Regulatory Context

The following environmental laws are applicable to the proposed MEP project:

Environment Protection Act 1986, Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1974,



Dated: January 2019



Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981, Manufacture, Storage and Import of

Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989 as amended in 2000, Hazardous and Other Waste

(Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules 2016.

The following guidelines and regulations are applicable for the proposed project: EIA

Notification and its amendments, Emission and wastewater discharge standards

stipulated by Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) and

Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB), Noise level standards, National Ambient Air

Quality Standards, minimum stack height requirements specified by Central Pollution

Control Board, fly ash utilization notifications etc.

1.8.1 Ambient Air Quality Standards

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, with its latest

amendment, to prevent and control air pollution, in line with the general

standards prescribed in the Act. The general standards for National Ambient Air

Quality follow Schedule VII prescribed in Environment (Protection) Rules 1986

and Schedule I of Environment (Protection) Rules 1986. The National ambient

air quality standards are given in Table 1.2

Table 1-2 National Ambient Air Quality Standards

Pollutant

Time Weighte

d Average

Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m3)

Industrial Residential,

Rural & Other Areas

Ecologically Sensitive Areas (notified by

Central Government)

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

50 20

24 hrs** 80 80

Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

40 30

24 hrs ** 80 80

Particulate Matter (Size less than 10 µg) (PM10) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

60 60

24 hrs ** 100 100

Particulate Matter (Size less than 2.5 µg) (PM2.5) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

40 40

24 hrs ** 60 60

Ozone (O3) (µg/m3) 8 hrs ** 100 100

1 hrs ** 180 180

Lead (Pb) (µg/m3)

Annual Average*

0.5 0.5

24 hrs ** 1.5 1.0

Carbon monoxide (CO) (µg/m3)

8 hrs ** 2000 2000

1 hrs ** 4000 4000

Ammonia (NH3) (µg/m3) Annual

Average* 100 100



Dated: January 2019



Pollutant

Time Weighte

d Average

Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m3)

Industrial Residential,

Rural & Other Areas

Ecologically Sensitive Areas (notified by

Central Government)

24 hrs ** 400 400

Benzene (C6H6) Annual* 5 5

Benzo(a) Pyrene (BaP)- Particulate phase only (µg/m3)

Annual* 0.001 0.001

Arsenic (As) (µg/m3) Annual* 0.006 0.006

Nickel (Ni) (µg/m3) Annual* 0.020 0.020

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval. ** 24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However, 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

1.8.2 Air Emission Discharge Standards

According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) emission discharge

standards for paper and pulp industry, particulate matter emissions from point

source emissions from captive co-generation power plant should not exceed 30

mg/Nm3 for new boiler, 50 mg/Nm3 for Thermal Power Plants (units) installed

after 1st Jan 2003 upto 31st December 2016 and 100 mg/Nm3 for Thermal Power

Plants (units) installed before 31st before 2003 as per MoEF&CC notification No.

3305(E) dated 07/12/2015.

1.8.3 Minimum Stack Height Standards

According to the environmental protection rules, a minimum stack height of the thermal

power plant will be defined based on the total sulphur dioxide (SO2) emission released

from the stack using empirical formula (14 x (Q)0.3, where Q is expressed in SO2

emission rate in kg/h).

As per the latest MoEF&CC notification, dated 28th June 2018, for the Thermal Power

Plants with wet Flue Gas Desulphurization (FGD) less than 100 MW, minimum stack

height to be estimated using empirical formula (H= 6.902 (Q×0.277)0.555).

1.8.4 Ambient Noise Standards

Noise levels in the work-zone area should not exceed 85 dB (A) for a cumulative

exposure time of eight (8) hrs. The CPCB has since finalized the Ambient Air

Quality standards in respect of Noise under Section 16 (2) (h) of the Air



Dated: January 2019



(Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 as amended in 1987. General noise

standards are given in Table 1.3

Table 1-3 General Noise Standards

Area Code Category Area Limits in dB (A) Leq

Day Time Night Time

A Industrial area 75 70

B Commercial area 65 55

C Residential area 55 45

D Silence zone 50 40

Definition

Day time: Between 6 AM to 10 PM Night time: Between 10 PM to 6 AM Silence Zone: Areas up to 100 meters around such premises as hospitals, educational institutions and courts. The silence zones are to be declared by the Competent Authority. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and bursting of crackers shall be banned in these zones.

1.8.5 Pulp and Paper mill- Specific Wastewater Discharge Standards

The relevant standards for a Large Pulp and Paper Mill for the wastewater

discharge as per Environment Protection Act, 1986 (EPA) Notifications are

presented in the following Table 1.4. However, the industries shall follow

prescribed standards of respective State Pollution Control Boards (Table 1.5).

Table 1-4 Wastewater Discharge Standards

S.No Parameter Units Tolerance

Limit not to exceed

1 Flow m³/t of paper

200

2 pH - 7 to 8.5

3 Total Suspended Solids mg/l 50

4 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 2100

5 BOD at 27°C for 3 days mg/l 30

6 COD mg/l 250

7 TOCL kg/tonne of

product 2 .0

8 Adsorbable Organic Halogens (AOX)

kg/ tonne of product

<1

Table 1-5 Discharge Norms of GPCB as per the Consent to Operate of JKPL, Unit

CPM dated 08/02/16

S.No Parameter Unit Land for irrigation

1 pH - 6.5- 8.5

2 Temperature ᵒC 40

3 Colour (Pt Co. scale) in units units 100

4 Suspended Solids mg/l 100



Dated: January 2019



S.No Parameter Unit Land for irrigation

5 Oil and Grease mg/l 10

6 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 2100

7 Phenolic Compounds mg/l 1

8 Sulphides mg/l 2

9 Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l 50

10 Chlorides mg/l 600

11 Sulphates mg/l 1000

12 Total Chromium mg/l 2

13 Hexavalent Chromium mg/l 0.1

14 BOD (3 days at 27ᵒC) mg/l 30

15 Chemical Oxygen Demand mg/l 200

16 AOX mg/l 8

17 Sodium Absorption Ratio - 10

18 Total Organic Chloride mg/l 2

19 Percent Sodium % 60

1.8.6 Hazardous and other Waste (Management, and Transboundary

Movement) Rule, 2016

The Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India, has enacted the above

rules so as to ensure effective collection, storage, treatment, transport, reception, import

and disposal of hazardous wastes. Any occupier or unit, generating hazardous wastes

and involved in the collection, storage, treatment, transport, reception import and

disposal of hazardous wastes should obtain authorisation of the Pollution Control

Board.

All units generating or handling hazardous wastes more than the regulatory quantities

will have to apply for the authorisation of the Board in a prescribed form. In the

amendments introduced in the year 2016, Schedule I, rule 3 (1) (17) (i) 38 categories of

processes generating hazardous wastes were listed. The Table 1.6 gives standards

applicable to pulp and paper industry.

Table 1-6 List of Hazardous Wastes as Applicable to Pulp & Paper Industry

S.No Processes Hazardous wastes

1

5. Industrial operations using mineral/synthetic oil as lubricant in hydraulic systems or other applications

5.1 Used/spent oil 5.2 Wastes/residues

containing oil

2 32.Pulp & Paper industry

32.1 Spent chemicals 32.2 Corrosive wastes



Dated: January 2019



S.No Processes Hazardous wastes

arising from use of strong acid and bases 32.3 Sludge containing

adsorbable organic halides

1.9 Structure of EIA

This EIA report is structured into eleven chapters as below.

Chapter 1 – Introduction

Chapter 2 –Existing Environmental Compliance and Management -Overview of the

of the existing facilities and consents issued (EC, NOC etc), Summary of the

environmental compliance, Air pollution sources, stacks as per the NOC and summary

of the emission test results, Water allocation, Water consumption and water balance in

the existing facility, Wastewater quality and ETP data, Summary of various

environmental monitoring programs adopted, Details of the environmental management

cell.

Chapter 3- Proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP)-presents details of the proposed

project, process and material balance, raw-materials and details of various supporting

facilities required for the project, and an outline of the project cost and project

implementation schedules.

Chapter 4 - (Baseline Environmental Status) presents a comprehensive description of

the baseline environmental conditions of the study area. This includes the data

obtained from primary surveys and also secondary published data from various

authentic sources. All the specified environmental components such as meteorological

data, air quality, noise levels, surface and ground water resources, surface and ground

water quality, geological and mineralogical features, soil quality, land use and land

cover in the study area, cropping pattern, ecological and biological environmental

conditions and socioeconomic and cultural aspects of the Mill site. All the relevant

aspects as mentioned in the Terms of Reference (ToR) were thoroughly addressed.

Chapter 5 – (Prediction of Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures)

presents the environmental aspects associated with the proposed project, envisaged

emissions and discharges from the facility, an overview of various pollution control



Dated: January 2019



systems proposed under project planning activities in the detailed project report and

construction and operational phase environmental impacts.

Chapter 6 – (Analysis of Alternatives) Description of each alternative studied and the

selected alternatives are given.

Chapter 7 – (Environmental Monitoring Plan) presents monitoring plan which

include measurement methodologies, frequency, location, data analysis,

reporting schedules, emergency procedures, & detailed budget.

Chapter 8 – (Additional Studies) presents details of the public hearing and an overview

of risk mitigation plan and various occupational health programmes adopted by JKPL at

its existing facilities

Chapter 9 – (Project Benefits) presents the benefits of the project.

Chapter 10–(Environmental Management Plan EMP) presents the

administrative aspects of ensuring that mitigation measures are implemented

and their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA.

Chapter 11–(Summary and Conclusion) presents the summary and Conclusion of EIA

report.

Chapter 12–(Disclosure of Consultant) presents the declaration by the EIA consultant

organization as per the NABET requirements.


PJ-ENVIR-201865-1768 Dated: January 2019

Chapter-2, Environmental Management Aspects in the

Existing Facilities


2. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ASPECTS IN THE EXISTING

FACILITIES

2.1. Overview of the Existing Facilities

This section presents an overview of the existing facilities of JK Paper, Unit CPM,

Songadh, its environmental compliance aspects and Environmental Management

Program implemented in the existing facility.

Unit CPM, Songadh is spreading in an area of 363 acres of land comprising main

plant and its supporting facilities, colony, green belt and plantation area. The

existing facility is permitted and consented to produce 1,60,800 tpa of writing and

printing paper and packaging board (Writing and printing paper - 60,000 tpa,

Duplex Coated Board – 1,00,800 tpa) and pulp production capacity of 60,000 BD

tpa as per the Environmental Clearance obtained from Ministry of Environment,

Forest & Climate Change (MoEF&CC). The public hearing was held on 26/10/2005

as per the process stipulated under notification S.O.318 (E) & S.O.319 (E), dt

10/04/1997 issued by MoEF&CC. The copy of Environmental Clearance is attached

as Annexure 4.

The chronology of the Environmental Clearances obtained in the existing facility is

presented in the Table 2.1.

Table 2-1 Chronology of the Existing Environmental Clearances

SI. No. EC No. Dated Details on Environmental Clearance

1

F. No. J-11-13/61/2005-IA II (I)

October 10, 2005

Environmental Clearance of Duplex Board Plant from MoEF&CC, Delhi

2 F. No. J-11013/61/2005 IA-II

May 2, 2005

Environmental Clearance for Coated Duplex Board Project- 5000 TPM and Chlorine Dioxide Plant- 45 TPM.

3 F.No. J-11011/416/2008-IA-II

October 17, 2008

Expansion of pulp and paper plant (4200 MT/Month to 5000 MT/Month) by installing Oxygen Delignification Plant (ODL)

Public Hearing was exempted as per the para 7 (ii) of EIA notification, 2006.

The facility is granted with Consolidated Consent and Authorization (CC&A) from

GPCB vide their Consent No. AWH-63794 dated 28.07.2014, valid up to




Existing Facilities


10.04.2019 under Water (P & CP) Act 1974 and Air (P & CP) Act 1981 as amended

and under Hazardous Waste (M &H and TM) Rules 2008. The copy of the

Consolidated Consent and Authorization (CC&A) is enclosed as Annexure-5.

JKPL, Unit CPM is regularly submitting the compliance report to Regional Office,

MoEF&CC, and the facility has obtained certified compliance report for

Environmental Clearance 2008 from MoEF&CC Regional Office, Bhopal vide letter

No. 5-266/2008(ENV)/316 dated 07/08/2018. The copy of the same is attached as

Annexure- 6.

The existing facility consists of paper machines, board machine, pulp mill, captive

power plant, chemical recovery section, lime kiln, effluent treatment plant and

other supporting facilities. The capacity details of various units in existing facility is


Table 2-2 Overview of the Details of the Existing Facilities

SL No.

Description Units Existing Capacity

Remarks

1 Paper/Board Machine Section

1.1 Paper Machine-1&2 (PWP) tpa 60,000 -

1.2 Duplex Coated Board tpa 1,00,800 -

1.3 Total Paper/Board Production tpa 1,60,800 -


BD tpd 200 -

2 Pulp Mill

2.1 Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp Mill

BD tpa 60,000

3 stage bleaching using C/D-EoP-D (chlorine, chlorine dioxide, caustic, oxygen and hydrogen peroxide)

2.2 Chlorine Dioxide plant tpd 2 -

2.3 Oxygen Generation Plant Nm3/hr 200 -

3 Recovery Plant

3.1 Evaporator tph of water

evaporation 70 -

3.2 Black liquor solids fired recovery boiler


335 -

3.3 Rotary Lime Kiln tpd of

lime 90 -

3.4 Recausticising plant Whilte liquor

cum/day

1,000 -

4 Steam Generation from Coal Fired Boilers

4.1 CFB#1 TPH 20 Spreader Stoker Boiler,

Standby

4.2 CFB#2 TPH 30 AFBC Boiler, Standby

4.3 CFB#3 TPH 50 AFBC Boiler

4.4 CFB#4 TPH 70 CFBC Boiler

4.5 Total Steam Generation TPH 170




Existing Facilities


SL No.

Description Units Existing Capacity

Remarks

5 Captive Power Generation

5.1 TG#1 MW 3.125 Standby

5.2 TG#2 MW 3.125 Standby

5.3 TG#3 MW 12 -

5.4 TG#4 MW 12 -

5.5 Total Captive Power Plant Capacity

MW 30.25 -

6 Others

6.1 Producer Gas (PG) Plant Nm³/h 3000

6.2 Precipitated Calcium Carbonate (PCC) Plant (CaCO3)

tpm 1200 utilizes CO2 gas from Lime Kiln Flue gas which is used as filler in paper manufacturing

6.3 Silicate Nano Fibers (CaSiO3) TPM 1500 To increase filler loading and reduce the specific energy consumption.



m3/day 35,000

Water allocation from Narmada W.R.W.S and Kalpasar Department is about 5 MGD (22,700 m3/day).

7.2 Wastewater Treatment Plant m3/day 30,000 -

2.2. Land Use of the Existing Facilities

The mill has total land area of 363 acres (Plant area 201 acres and Colony area 162

acres). The total areas of green belt and plantation constitutes to about 121 acres

covering about 33% of total area.

Table 2-3 Land Use break up of the Existing Facility

S.No Category Post MEP

A Plant area

A.1 Plant & Building 20

A.2 Materials storage 21

A.3 Roads/Drains 8

A.4 Vacant area (for future development) 96

A.5 Green belt/ green cover within mill area 56

Total Plant area 201

B Colony area

B.1 Built up area 54

B.2 Vacant area 43

B.3 Green belt/Green cover 65

Total Colony area 162

Total (A+B+C) 363




Existing Facilities


2.3. Process description of Existing Facilities

2.3.1. Manufacturing Process of Paper

Raw Material Preparation

Raw material (Wood/bamboo) is cut into small chips of 20-25 mm size by Chipper.

Chips are screened in vibrating screen and washed to remove dust. Chip dust

generated is used in coal fired boiler as fuel along with coal.

Pulp Mill Section

Wood Chips are fed to digesters with the help of belt conveyor wherein the chips

are cooked with caustic soda solution containing sodium Sulphide. The

temperature of this solution is gradually increased to remove lignin to produce the

pulp. Unbleached pulp is washed in brown stock washers to remove cooking

chemicals. Washed pulp is screened in a 3-stage pressure screening system.

Screened pulp is then sent to Oxygen Delignification (ODL) Plant where pulp is

reacted with oxygen to further remove lignin which is washed in subsequent

washing stages. Pulp after Oxygen Delignification is sent to bleach plant wherein it

is bleached to the desired level using bleaching chemicals like Chlorine, Caustic

Soda, Hydrogen Peroxide and finally with Chlorine Dioxide.

Chemical Recovery Section

Spent liquor containing cooking chemicals is collected from brown stock washers

and pumped to recovery process where it is concentrated in evaporators and burnt

in recovery boiler to get smelt which is mostly sodium carbonate. Caustic soda is

recovered with the help of lime in the Causticizing section and again reused for

cooking wood/bamboo chips in pulp mill digesters. Sludge will be burnt in lime

kiln to recover alkali.

Paper Making Section

Bleached pulp is taken to two Nos. of paper machine section where it is refined.

Paper making chemicals like alum, rosin, starch, soapstone powder and dyes etc

are added to pulp slurry which is passed over wire to remove water. Wet paper

sheet is then passed through presses and rotating steam heated dryers to remove

moisture from paper sheet. Finally, paper is made in the form of reels or sheets as




Existing Facilities


per customers’ requirements. The process flow diagram of paper plant is presented

in the Figure 2.1.

Figure 2-1 Pulp and Paper Manufacturing Process Flow Diagram




Existing Facilities


2.3.2. Manufacturing Process of Coated Packaging Board

Packaging Board is used for packaging of variety of products including cosmetics,

pharmaceuticals, consumer goods, food products etc.

The packaging board consists of three layers of boards made of different types of

pulp. The raw material used for the product is Virgin pulp/secondary fiber pulp

which is treated in Secondary fiber Treatment (SFT) plant having three different

streets namely A, B & C for treatment of different types of pulp.

The pulp from SFT is used for stock preparation where it is made suitable for

manufacturing board. Chemicals like Alum, Rosin, Soap Stone powder, dyes etc.

are added to pulp slurry.

After stock preparation, pulp of different quality will be fed to paper machine for

manufacturing of coated packaging board.

Figure 2-2 Typical view of Paper, Pulp and Board Plant at the Existing Facility

Paper Machine Pulp Mill

Board Machine Outside of Board Machine




Existing Facilities


2.4. Steam Requirement and Generation Facilities

The existing facility consists of one stoker fired boiler, a CFBC boiler, and two

AFBC boilers and a recovery boiler that are catering to the steam requirements for

the process, main plant and power generation needs. Details of the boilers are

presented in Table 2.2. Necessary permits and consents have been obtained for all

the existing boilers. The total installed steam generation capacity of all the coal

boilers is about 170 TPH. Currently power utilisation in the existing facility mill is

about 18 MW. About 130 TPH of steam is being generated. One AFBC coal fired

boiler and one CFBC coal fired boiler along with one Recovery Boiler are operated to

meet the steam demand. One AFBC coal boiler and one Stoker Fired coal boiler are

kept on stand-by operation mode.

The coal required for the existing plant is sourced from Western Coal Fields

Limited. The fuel supply agreement between Western Coalfield Limited and JKPL is

attached as Annexure-7. The types of fuel used for power boilers, its

characteristics and consumption at the existing facility are presented in the Table

2.4 and the typical photographs of the existing boilers with ESPs are shown in the

Figure 2.3. Apart from coal, wood dust and debark waste is fired in the power

boilers which reduces the consumption of coal.

Table 2-4 Fuel used in Existing Facility and their characteristics

SI. No.

Fuel Used Existing

Consumption (tpa)

Calorific Value

(Kcal/kg)

Moisture Content

(%)

Total Ash Content

(%)

Sulphur Content

(%)

1 Indian Coal 70,000 4000 12 38 0.5

2 Imported Coal 1,00,000 5500 33 7.4 0.8

3 Lignite 70,000 5000 36 15 1.5




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-3 Typical View of Boilers in the Existing Facility

Coal Fired Boiler 1&2 Coal Fired Boiler 3

Coal Fired Boiler-4 Chemical Recovery Boiler

2.5. Power Requirement and Generation Facilities

The facility is permitted to generate 30.25 MW of power from the captive power

plant. The existing plant has totally four steam turbo generators (TG). Out of

which, two TGs of capacity 12MW each are operated continuously and other two

TGs of capacity 3.125 MW each are kept as standby. The details of TGs are

presented in the Table 2.1. The photographs of the Turbo Generators at the

existing facility are presented in the Figure 2.4.




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-4 Typical View of TGs at the Existing Facility

TG-3 (12 MW) TG-4 (12 MW)

2.6. Water Requirement and Treatment Facilities

Water is a vital component for manufacturing of paper. The facility is permitted to

draw 5 MGD (22,730 m3/day) of water from Ukai Left Bank Main Canal. The water

withdrawal permission letter from Narmada Water Resources & Water Supply and

Kalpasar Department, Government of Gujarat is enclosed as Annexure 8 (a). Raw

water intake and pre-treatment scheme is presented in Figure 2.5.

Currently the fresh water consumption is about 20,500 m3/day including domestic

and industrial applications. The specific water consumption is in the order of 40

m3/T of paper production. The water consumption details of the existing facility are


Figure 2-5 Water Distribution System at Existing Facility (April 2017 to March 2018)




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-6 Water Treatment Facilities at Existing Plant

Water Clarifier

Table 2-5 Water Consumption in the Existing Facility

Sl.No. Description Fresh Water Consumption

(m3/day)

1 Utilities 1800

2 Paper Machine 7100

3 Board Machine 3000

4 Pulp Mill 6300

5 Misc. 500

6 Domestic 1800

Total for Plant

Total 20,500

Specific water consumption per tonne of paper production

40

2.7. Summary of Existing Pollution Sources and Environmental

Management Plan

The facility has been inspected by MoEF&CC regional office and latest certified

compliance report issued by MoEF&CC, Bhopal office is attached as Annexure-6.

The facility has a full-fledged environmental cell headed by qualified senior

personnel. The environmental department work towards ensuring 100%

compliance with stipulated regulations and guidelines. The facility has been

accorded with ISO 14001:2015 certification for environmental management

program. The emissions and treated wastewater quality are continuously being

monitored at the site. A full-fledged R&D lab is established within the facility for




Existing Facilities


effective monitoring. The organogram of environmental management cell is

presented in the Figure 2.7.

Figure 2-7 Environmental Management Cell

2.7.1. Air Quality Management Aspects

The flue gases generated from Boilers is the only source of emission which is

vented out through stacks of adequate dimensions after passing through ESPs and

pollution control systems. The atmospheric pollutants from the stack of these

sources include particulate matter, Sulphur Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides.

Electrostatic Precipitators (ESP) are installed on all 4 power boilers, recovery boiler

and also lime kiln to control the dust emissions to levels below the stipulated

norms of GPCB. Two combined stacks are provided for boiler 1&2 and boiler 3&4

respectively and dedicated stacks are provided for chemical recovery boiler and lime

kiln. Continuous emission monitoring systems are being installed on all the stacks.

In addition, stack emission monitoring is conducted by external laboratory which is

NABL accredited. The details of the stack is given in Table 2.6. The GPCB test

report for stack emissions are shown in Table 2.7 and the recent test reports of

GPCB for stack monitoring are attached as Annexure 9.




Existing Facilities


Table 2-6 Existing Stack Details

Stack No

Stack attached to

Stack Height

(m)

Stack Diameter

(m)

Stack Gas Temperature

(°C)

Gaseous Discharge (Nm3/hr)

1 Power Boiler I,

II, 50 TPH combined

70 3.0 135 51007

2 Power Boiler

III, IV, 120 TPH combined

91 3.0 140 74576

Table 2-7 Stack Emissions as per latest GPCB test report

Location Test report

dated Parameter Unit Result

GPCB Permissible

limit

Power Boiler III & IV

04/12/2017

PM mg/Nm3 86 150

SO2 ppm 51 100

NOx ppm 20 50

In order to control the fugitive emissions from the coal and ash handling areas,

water sprinkling systems are installed. All coal transfer points are provided with

dust extraction and collection systems. The fugitive emissions are monitored by

NABL accredited external laboratory at various locations.

CO2 from the Lime Kiln flue gases is utilized in Precipitated Calcium Carbonate

(PCC) plant which is used as filler in paper manufacturing.

Odour emissions are controlled at the existing facility by use of “closed feed”

system in the batch reactors. 100 % processing of black liquor in the evaporator for

further processing in the recovery boiler has been adopted. NCG gas levels are

measured by CPPRI in the work zone area and is reported to be below detectable

limits.

Ambient Air quality in the existing facility is monitored once in a month and the

data is submitted annually to GPCB. Ambient Air Quality is also monitored by

external laboratory (NABL Accredited) at the upwind and downwind directions.

The typical view of various pollution control systems in the existing facility are

shown in Figure 2.8.




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-8 Typical View of Existing Air Pollution Control Systems

ESPs for Boilers

ESP for Boiler Closed Coal Storage Yard

2.7.2. Wastewater Generation and Treatment

The total wastewater generated at the existing facility is about 17,500 m³/day. The

existing ETP is designed for a capacity to handle 30,000 m³/day effluents. The

existing specific water consumption and wastewater generation is in the order of 40

m3/T and 36 m3/T of paper production respectively which are lower than charter

norms as stipulated by CPCB. Wastewater quality parameters are monitored on

daily basis at the JKPL, Unit CPM central laboratory.

An online wastewater quality monitoring system is installed to monitor the final

treated wastewater quality which is connected to GPCB server. In addition, treated

wastewater is being analyzed by a third party NABL approved environmental

laboratory once in every three months. The test report is attached as Annexure 10.

All the recommendations made in the Charter on Corporate Responsibility for

Environment Protection (CREP) for the pulp and paper sector is being implemented

at the existing facility. AoX levels in the treated wastewater are maintained at 5.79




Existing Facilities


mg/l1 as against the GPCB limit of 8 mg/l. The typical view of the ETP is shown in

Figure 2.9 and the flow sheet of ETP is presented in the Figure 2.10. The

summary of the quality of the treated wastewater generated from the plant is given

in Table 2.8.

Table 2-8 Treated Effluent Quality as per third party assessment test report

S.No. Parameter Unit ETP Outlet GPCB limit

1 pH - 7.5 6.5 to 8.5

2 Colour Pt Co 90 100

3 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 1464 2100

4 Suspended Solids mg/l 72 100

5 Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l 0.42 50

6 Chlorides as (Cl-) mg/l 245 600

7 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)

mg/l 142

200

8 % Sodium % 18.28 60

9 Oil and Grease mg/l Bdl 10

10 Phenolic Compounds mg/l 0.82 1

11 Sulphide mg/l <0.01 2

12 BOD at 27 °C for 3 days mg/l 22 30

Note: BDL- Below detection limit. Source: Analysis Report from Pollucon Laboratories Ltd (NABL Accredited Laboratory) dated 07.07.2018

Figure 2-9 Typical View of Existing ETP Facilities

Primary Clarifier Secondary Clarifier

1 Test Report of AoX Assessment of treated wastewater from existing facility, conducted by Avantha

Centre for Industrial Research & Development dated 22.05.2018(Annexure 10)




Existing Facilities


Surface Aeration Tank Belt Filter Press

Aerial View of ETP




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-10 Flow Diagram of Existing Effluent Treatment Plant

Sump & pump house

Treated Effluent for irrigation

Clarified water reservoir

Sump & pump House

Recirculation of Activated sludge

Urea & DAP

Under flow Pump House

Under flow

Paper machine & board effluent

For chemical Recovery unit power house

Under flow

Paper machine clarifier

Reuse pump

From pulp mill and chipper house

From septic tanks Overflow

Raw water clarifier sludge

Mechanical Bar screening

Primary clarifier

Vibro Screen

Sludge Storage

Belt press filter

for dewatering

ETP Sludge storage

Vibro Screen

Additional sludge storage

Belt press filter

Filtrate

Secondary

clarifier

Irrigation

Sump

Recirculation

Pump House

Treated effluent for Greenbelt development

Recycle for Process use

Recycle for process use

Aeration

Tank




Existing Facilities


2.7.3. Utilization of Treated Effluent

At present, treated effluent is being utilized in various areas like horticulture,

plantation, chips washing, coal dust scrubbing, bamboo wetting, ash silo and floor

washing and in lime kiln and evaporator direct condenser. Apart from utilizing the

treated wastewater for the existing greenbelt and plantation in the company owned

lands, it also being supplied to irrigation needs of the local farmers. About 1050

acres of land in the nearby areas is getting benefitted due to utilization of treated

wastewater in the area.

JKPL had engaged Navsari Agriculture University (NAU) to carry out the

assessment study of the quality of treated effluent and its effect on soil and crop

pattern by its utilization for agricultural crops. Based on the study, it was

concluded that treated wastewater is most suitable for irrigation in the area.

Therefore, after a detailed engineering study, pipelines were laid for the supply for

treated wastewater to the farmers. The irrigation scheme was implemented in three

phases wherein currently 1050 acres of land is being utilized for irrigation of

treated wastewater. About 223 farmers in the nearby areas who are dependent on

the rainwater for agriculture are being benefitted due to the scheme. More then

85% of the treated wastewater is utilized for irrigation needs and further efforts are

being made to utilize treated effluent for irrigation purpose. River water quality

data of the upstream and downstream of the Godanala confluence was reported be

in line with water quality objectives stipulated by CPCB. Photographs of utilization

of treated wastewater for land irrigation are presented in the Figure 2.11.




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-11 Utilization of treated wastewater for Irrigation and Plantation

Sugarcane cultivation by using Treated Effluent

Groundnut Cultivation by using Treated Effluent

Pipelines Laid for the supply of treated effluent from JKPL

Pumps House at ETP to utilize the treated effluent for irrigation

2.7.4. Noise Management

The noise levels at the facility are maintained well within the stipulated norms. The

ambient noise levels at the facility are being monitored at 21 locations in the plant

facility periodically by third party laboratory assessment. The recent test report of

ambient noise level analysis from external laboratory is attached as Annexure-11.

The noise levels at the facility are maintained well within the standards prescribed

under Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 Rules, 1989 viz. 75 dBA (day time) and

70 dBA (night time).




Existing Facilities


2.7.5. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Wood dust generated during the process of wood chipping which has calorific value

around 2000 Kcal/Kg is used as a fuel along with coal in coal fired boiler. This

reduces the consumption of coal in the boiler. Fly ash from boilers is 100 %

utilized for the manufacturing of bricks and cement.

A dedicated bio gas plant is installed for plant canteen that utilizes biodegradable

wastes generated from canteen to generate bio gas.

Hazardous waste generated from the existing facility includes ETP sludge and used

oil. The Authorization for the Management & Handling of Hazardous Wastes vide

No AWH-63794 dated 28/07/2014 (consolidated consent authorization) is attached

as Annexure 5. The details of the quantity of solid and hazardous waste generated

within the facility are presented in the Table 2.9.

Table 2-9 Solid and Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal

Sl No Particulars Quantity tpd Recycling/Reuse

1 Bamboo/Wood Dust

20 Used as fuel in Boiler

2 Fly Ash 120 Used in Cement/Brick manufacturing plants (MoU attached as Annexure 12)

3 Lime Sludge 60

Lime mud is reused in Lime Kiln installed in plant Lime sludge generated is used for backfilling abandoned stone quarry which is taken on lease located about 5 km from the facility.

4 ETP Sludge 16 Sold to board manufacturers

5 Spent Oil 9KL/year Given to authorized recyclers

2.8. Greenbelt and Plantation

Out of the total 363 Acres of the entire facility, about 121 Acres of the land has

been developed under greenbelt and plantation. Plantation programme is being

carried out surrounding the vacant mill area with pulpable species like Eucalyptus,

Subabul, Casurina etc for increasing raw material availability and green cover.




Existing Facilities


Typical view of the plantation in and around the existing plant is shown in Figure

2.12.

Figure 2-12 Typical View Greenbelt and Plantation within the Facility

2.9. Occupational Health Programs

A dedicated Occupational Health Centre (OHC) is located within the existing facility

which consists of 5 bed hospital, X-ray machine, ECG, lung function test facilities,

pulse oximeter, audiometric test facilities and general lab facilities including an




Existing Facilities


ambulance. Two dedicated doctors assisted by two nurses and other supporting

staff. All employees and workers undergo annual health checkups such as blood

tests, lung function test (PEFR), vision test and audiometric tests other physical

fitness tests. The photographs of the existing OHC are presented in the Figure

2.13.

Figure 2-13 Photographs of the Existing OHC

OHC located inside JKPL

Oxygenator Audiometer

2.10. Industrial Safety Management

In order to ensure safety of all the employees, infrastructure and environment, the

company has set up a fully equipped safety department consisting of highly

qualified and trained professionals. The company has positioned fire hydrants at

strategic locations throughout manufacturing unit. Fire-fighting systems are

designed and implemented as per National Building Code and applicable state

regulations. The following firefighting facilities are installed at the facility:




Existing Facilities


(i). Electrical fire pump: 137m3/hr& 250 m3/hr, diesel pump: 137 m3/hr& 250

m3/hr and Jockey pump: 1080 m3/hr,

(ii). Fire water ring main system has been provided across the plant, storage area

etc., (iii). About 119 numbers of fire hydrants are installed as per building codes,

(iv). 15 water sprinklers were installed at coal storage area,

(v). 220 fire extinguishers are installed across the facility,

(vi). 20 numbers of first aid facilities are placed at all critical locations,

(vii). Necessary vacuum system and scrubbers are provided at Chlorine tonner

area, (viii). Chlorine gas detectors are placed near the chlorine plant, and three

self-breathing operators (oxygen masks) are made available,

(x). Fire engine vehicle is in place.

The photographs of the installed firefighting systems in the unit are presented in

the Figure 2.14.

Figure 2-14 Fire Safety Systems in the Existing Unit

2.11. Summary of Various CSR Programs

The existing facility is providing a direct employment to around 1100 people

(Including workmen &staff) and indirect employment to around 1200 people in the

area. Being one ofthe largest industries in the area, the facility is contributing to

the significant economic growth in the area.

As a part of the corporate social responsibility of the organization, JKPL, Unit CPM

has been implementing various community development programs and about Rs.

39.68 Lakhs was spent on various community development activities during the




Existing Facilities


year 2017 -18. Some of the CSR programs implemented in the area are highlighted

in the following:

Adult Literacy –

Adult literacy Program was started in the year 2004 and under robust efforts,

JKPL, Unit CPM has opened 207 Nos. of centres successfully. The unit is

directly working for this initiative i.e. for identifying illiterates, finding teacher,

place for conducting ALP Classes for 6 months, providing books & stationery

and arranging for learning assessment followed by “Dikshant Samaroh”.

Adoption and upgradation of ITI Ukai under Public Private Partnership (PPP)

mode

To improve infrastructure for skill development and training faculties the unit

is working with ITI Ukai in PPP mode to further ensure better employability for

tribal youth at the Institute.

Promotion of Health Care Services

Periodic Health check-up / diagnosis/Treatment camps in nearby selected

villages are organized by the unit. This program works on the principal of

‘Preventive Health Care’ and enhances the health status and perpetuates

consciousness amongst all sections of the society. Total 14 villages were

selected in Songadh and Ucchhal Taluka as a project area for integrated health

care activities.

Blood Donation Camps

Blood Donation Camp was organised by JKPL on 20.06.2017 at Occupational

Health Centre, JK Paper Ltd, Unit: CPM. About 133 People got themselves

registered for blood donation and 107 people donated their blood in this camp

during the event.

Erection of Multi-Purpose Shed at Govt. Primary School, Parchuli Village,

Ucchhal




Existing Facilities


Figure 2-15 Corporate Social Responsibility Initiatives and Activities

Adult Literacy Programs

Mobile Medical Camp Subsidized Computer Training

ITI, Ukai adopted under Public Private Partnership

Livelihood Generation through Self Help Groups




Existing Facilities


Multi-Purpose Shed at Govt. Primary School, Parchuli Village, Ucchhal

Blood Donation Camp held on 20.06.17



Chapter-3, Details of the Proposed Project


3. DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED EXPANSION

3.1. Overview of the Proposal

The proposed Mill Modernization and Expansion Plan (MEP) is conceptualized to

increase the mill’s paper/board capacity to 360,800 tpa (increase by 200,000 tpa)

with Bleached Hard Wood Pulp (HWP) and Bleached Chemi Thermo Mechanical

Pulp (BCTMP).

The existing pulp mill of capacity 60,000 BD tpa will be replaced with ECF based

Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp (CWP) mill of capacity 1,60,000 BD tpa which will

be shifted from JKPL, Rayagada unit and re-installed. A new Bleached Chemi

Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP) of capacity 1,00,000 AD tpa, De-Inking Plant

(DIP) of capacity 150 BD tpd and Secondary Fibre Treatment (SFT) Plant of

capacity 400 BD tpd are proposed to cater to the fibre demand of the varieties of

Boards for the proposed new Board machine. The supporting facilities for the

proposed increase in capacities such as chemical recovery section, power plant,

effluent treatment plant (ETP) will be augmented/upgraded based on the

requirement.

3.1.1. Highlights of the Proposal

The MEP proposals include:

Addition of one (1) multi-layer coated board machine with capacity of

200,000 tpa

Replacing the existing 60,000 BD tpa Bleached Hard Wood Pulp (HWP) mill

with Rapid Displacement Heating (RDH) Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) Hard

Wood Pulp (HWP) mill of capacity 1,60,000 BD tpa (to be shifted from JKPL

Rayagada unit and re-installed with upgradation). The existing HWP mill will

be retired.

Installation of a new Bleached BCTMP mill of 100,000 AD tpa capacity with

White Liquor Oxidation.

Installation of a new ClO2 plant of 15 tpd while the existing non-integrated

ClO2 will be retired

Installation of newOxygen generation plant of capacity500 Nm3/hr





Relocation and reinstallation of Evaporation plant from JKPL, Rayagada unit

at JKPL, unit CPM and its upgradation.

Installation of a new 950 tpd of Black Liquor (BL) solids Chemical Recovery

Boiler while the existing Chemical Recovery Boiler will be retired.

Relocation and reinstallation of causticising plant from JKPL, Rayagada unit

at JKPL, unit CPM and its upgradation to produce 3000 m3/day of white

liquor.


Gases and incinerating in Lime kiln

Installation of new Producer Gas (PG) plant of capacity 7000 Nm³/h to fire

gas in lime kiln

Ground Calcium Carbonate (GCC) plant of capacity 100 tpd to produce filler

for Board making

Installation of new De-Inking Plant (DIP) of capacity 150 tpd and new

Secondary Fibre Treatment (SFT) plant of capacity 400 tpd

Increasing captive power plant capacity from 30.25 MW to 72.00 MW by

adding a new 30 MW TG, 18 MW TG and 150 tph CFBC boiler. The existing

two TGs of capacity 3.125 MW each and existing two boilers of capacities 20

tph and 30 tph will be retired.

Upgradation of Water intake and Treatment Plant (WTP)

Upgradation/Augmentation of Existing Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP)

Up-gradation/Augmentation of the existing utilities and services to support

the post MEP operations

The MEP has been drawn up in a comprehensive manner to meet the requirement

of the Ministry of Environment and Forests climate change (MoEF&CC) Charter on

Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP) as applicable to pulp

and paper industries.

The modernization and capacity building will also help to consolidate and further

improve on the operational and financial performance. Thus, meeting the

increasing demands of paper board, and developing into a more environmentally

friendly technology. Modernization and Expansion of existing plant includes





adopting Best Available Technologies (BAT) which will help to enhance to

environmental performance coupled with sustainable economic growth of the plant.

As per the Environmental Protection Act (EPA) 1986 and EIA notification 2006

published by MoEF&CC, the proposed MEP shall undergo Environment Impact

Assessment (EIA) studies.

3.1.2. Salient Features of the Project

Some of the salient features of the proposed MEP are as below;

Replacing existing chlorine-based pulp mill with Elemental Chlorine Free

(ECF) process

Replacing existing conventional old digesters with state-of-the-art RDH

cooking


boiler





High pressure, high efficiency FBC boiler for better power generation

through co-generation


High efficiency ESP for coal fired boiler boiler, Recovery boiler and Lime kiln

to meet stringent Particulate Matter (PM) norms



Producer Gas (PG) plant to fire gas in lime kiln to reduce consumption of

costly furnace oil.



Upgradation of Wastewater treatment plant by segregating the colored and

non-colored effluents with tertiary treatment





3.2. Details of MEP Proposals

3.2.1. Board Machine Section

Proposals - Board machine will be the state-of-the-art machine to produce quality

boards like Grey Back (GCB), White Back (WCB), Folding Box Board (FBB), Solid

Bleached Board (SBB) etc., consisting of following facilities:

Fiber preparation

Stock preparation and approach flow system

Board machine

Converting and finishing house

3.2.1.1. Secondary fiber preparation (SFT):

Secondary fibers are charged in Hydra pulper with addition of water and same is

processed till waste paper is converted into slurry form onto high consistency pulp.

Figure 3-1 Stock Preparation Process Flow Sheet

The slushed pulp is cleaned in high density cleaner followed by turbo separator for

heavy weight and light weight impurities respectively. Then it is continuously

forwarded to centricleaner after passing through screen. At centricleaner, the sand

is separated due to centrifugal force. The pulp is then taken to Decker thickener

where the water is drained and pulp is thickened and stored in chest.

3.2.1.2. Deinking Plant (DIP)

A double loop DIP of capacity 150 tpd is also proposed for usage as top and back

layers.





The major raw material required for the DIP is Recycled Fibre (Waste Paper).

Sodium Hydroxide, Sodium Silicate and Sodium Hydrosulfite are the major

bleaching agents that will be used in the DIP process.

Different grades of pulps are stored in separate HD tower for onward pumping to

approach flow system. However, the furnish mix and the raw material will be

adjusted with reference to the quality of end product.

3.2.1.3. Stock Preparation cum Approach Flow System

The stock preparation cum approach flow system for each layer is to prepare the

stock suitable for making the multilayer sheet. From the storage chest, the

thickened pulp is passed through refiner by which the pulp is fiberized as per

process requirement and stored in chest. The pulp is diluted with recycled machine

back water.

3.2.1.4. Board Machine

The cleaned dilute pulp is fed to the board machine through the head box.

Water drained from the wire part is collected in a silo pit and is continuously

recycled back to dilute the pulp fed into the board machine. A typical block flow

diagram of coated board making is shown in Figure 3.2.

Further dewatering is carried out in press to increase the dryness to about 48%.

The board is finally dried through indirect steam dryers. The dried board is coated

with chemicals, dried and is wound in rolls as the final product. The Multi-layer

board machine is a first-floor machine and will produce around 600 tpd of finished

board.

Figure 3-2 Typical Flow Diagram of Coated Board Making





Figure 3-3 Typical board machine configuration

3.2.2. Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp Mill

Proposal - Existing chemical wood pulp mill is of older generation and in order to

be in line with current regulations, it is proposed to replace the pulp mill by

relocating and re-installing of ECF pulp mill of capacity 1,60,000 BD tpa from

JKPL, Rayagada unit. It will be re-installed with necessary upgradation. The

existing pulp mill of capacity 60,000 BD tpa will be retired. Hence the total

capacity of Bleached Chemical Wood Pulp Mill during Post MEP will be 1,60,000

BD tpa.

The new Chemical wood pulp mill consists of:

Wood chipping and chip screening

Cooking and screening





Brown stock washing

Oxygen generation and delignification

Bleaching

New 15 tpd Integrated ClO2 plant

Chemicals preparation plants

The process steps and flow diagram of the pulp mill is presented in the Figure 3.4.

Figure 3-4 Process Flow Diagram of the Pulp Mill

Wood is debarked and chipped in chippers. The wood chips are then taken into

digester(s), where it is cooked. The pulp from rapid displacement heating (RHD)

type digester is screened and then washed in washers. The RDH process has

extended delignification with significant reduction in energy consumption and

lower chemical costs. The process also reduces the steam consumption

significantly. Due to the increase in lignin removal efficiency in RDH process than a

conventional system, the chemical consumption in the bleaching section will also

reduce which in turn reduces the pollution load on ETP.

After washing the pulp is taken for oxygen delignification which is performed with

oxygen (O2) and caustic (NaOH) serving as the active chemicals

Pulp, after oxygen delignification, is led to a post oxygen washer and then bleached

to a brightness level of minimum 88% ISO, by employing “A/D-EOP-DP (chlorine

dioxide, caustic, oxygen and hydrogen peroxide)” sequence comprising of Acid





treatment for pH adjustment, Chlorine dioxide, Caustic, Oxygen and peroxide

bleaching. The pulp bleaching is elemental chlorine free process and thereby

encounters reduced specific water consumption and also lower pollution load on

the system.

The pulp mill will be having following auxiliary plants;

3.2.2.1. Oxygen generation plant:

The oxygen generation plant is based on Vacuum Swing Adsorption (VPSA) which

operates on two molecular sieves vessels in a cycle. One of the vessels remains for

oxygen production while second vessel remains under vacuum regeneration. The

temperature of the feed air will be around 30°C. The produced oxygen is collected

in a surge storage vessel before feeding to a compressor for pressurizing up to 25

bar and further stored in storage tanks. The gas pressure will be reduced to

around 14 bar in pressure reducing station before using in the process.

3.2.2.2. White liquor oxidation plant:

White liquor from the chemical recovery section is fed into a reaction vessel where

oxygen is supplied through a sparger pipe for oxidation. Steam will be used for

heating purpose through indirect heating coil system. Sodium sulphide in the

white liquor after oxidation is converted to inactive sodium thiosulphate and

sodium hydroxide. Thus, oxidized white liquor is used in digestor.

3.2.2.3. Chlorine dioxide plant:

Chlorine dioxide is produced based on integrated technology with HCL synthesis

using either Cl2 for make up as raw material or a new integrated technology using

sodium chlorate as raw material. After the washing stage, the pulp is bleached by

chlorine dioxide.

Caustic soda, Hydrogen peroxide, Sulphuric acid, etc. preparation systems

3.2.3. Bleached Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP)

BCTMP has higher bulk, higher pulp yield, higher opacity but has lower strength.

The brightness of BCTMP pulp required is 70% for board manufacture and the

bulk should be ± 3.0 cm3/g. The BCTMP pulp should be 400 ± 50 ml CSF. The





yield is expected to be 87% on BD chips. The process steps involved in BCTMP

pulping are: Chip washing system, Impregnation system, HC refining, washing, LC

refining, screening, reject refining and Thickening & storage.

Proposals

New BCTMP plant with auxiliaries as below.

BCTMP plant of 1,00,000 tpa capacity

BCTMP waste liquor evaporation plant (Existing will be used if feasible or

a new evaporator plant will be installed)

White liquor oxidation plant

Augmentation of wood handling and chipping plant

New chip washing plant

BCTMP has higher bulk which is suitable for board manufacture.

Along with the new BCTMP plant, a new white liquor oxidation plant will be

installed. The waste liquor from BCTMP needs to be evaporated before sending to

the Chemical Recovery plant. Existing evaporation plant will be used with

necessary modifications.

The new chipper house and utility area will be suitably designed to cater to the

requirement of BCTMP plant.

The process steps involved in BCTMP pulping are as follows:

Chipper - Raw material wood is chipped to desired dimensions

Chip Washing - Chips are washed to remove sand particles and foreign

materials

Impregnation - Cleaned chips are steam heated to remove the air from the

chips and chemicals are added. These chemicals are absorbed by chips.

Refining- The impregnated chips passed through refiners to convert into

chips to the pulp.

Bleaching - The refined pulp is treated with bleach chemicals to raise its

brightness

Washing - Bleached pulp is washed to remove the residual/spent

liquor/chemical

Refining – The pulp is refined in low consistency refiners to improve the

quality of pulp

Screening - The bleached pulp is cleaned so as to be suitable for the end

product





Thickening and Storage - The washed pulp is thickened and stored in the

towers

Figure 3-5 Process Flow Diagram of BCTMP Pulp Mill

3.2.4. Chemical recovery Island

Proposals

Replacing existing Recovery Boiler with a New Recovery to fire black liquor

solids at 75% concentration, to generate steam at 62 kg/cm2(g). The boiler

will be able to process 950 TPD of black liquor solids. The steam thus

generated will be used for power generation.

Relocating and reinstallation of existing evaporation plant from JKPL

Rayagada unit to JKPL Unit CPM of capacity 120 tph water evaporation with

capacity upgradation to 300 tpd and increasing output concentration from

65% to 75%.

Relocating, reinstallation and modernization of existing Recausticizing plant

from JKPL Rayagada unit to JKPL Unit CPM.

In addition to the existing lime kiln of capacity 90 tpd, a Lime Kiln of

capacity 230 tpd of lime will be relocated and reinstalled from JKPM

Rayagada unit with necessary upgradation.

Existing evaporator plant of capacity 70 tpd will be utilized for handling

waste liquor from BCTMP





Installation of a new Producer Gas Plant (PGP) of capacity in 7000 Nm3/hr

to substitute high cost furnace oil in lime kiln.

Necessary provisions will be provided to collect and fire the Non-

Condensable Gases (NCG) generated from digester, evaporator areas

Chemical recovery plant is to recover the cooking chemicals and to generate

the energy need in the process from the biomass (black liquor) in a very

efficient way.

Chemical recovery cycle consists of four major process steps which are closely

related together.

Evaporator -Evaporation of water in Black liquor to concentrate to 75% for

efficiently firing in Recovery boiler

Recovery boiler - New 950 tpd BL solids firing Recovery Boiler with ESP

Multilevel combustion air system to minimize Total Reduced

Sulphur (TRS) and NOX emissions with ESP designed for a

particulate emission of 50 mg/Nm3. The existing recovery boiler

will be retired.

Figure 3-6 Typical Flow Sheet of Chemical Recovery Island

Recausticiser plant - New causticising plant with CD filter for WL clarification and

LM filtration. Some existing equipment in CPM unit will also

be used as required.





Lime kiln - Energy efficient and environment friendly limekiln to burn

Lime mud from Causticizing and recover and recycle Lime back

for Caustizing.

NCG System - Non-Condensable Gases (NCG) generated from cooking and

washing plants, evaporators, stripper, tank vents etc will be

separately collected by an NCG collecting system and fired in

lime kiln or recovery boiler.

3.2.5. Captive Power Plant

The existing CPP consist of four boilers with a total capacity of 170 tph and two

Turbo Generators of total capacity 30.25 MW.

Proposals

The new captive power plant consists of

Installation of a new 150 tph FBC boiler (110 bar, 540oC) and 90 tph boiler

(standby) along with a 30 MW Turbo Generator Set.

Existing two Power Boilers (CFB#1-20 tph and CFB#2-30 tph) will be retired.

Existing two TGs (TG#1-3.125 MW and TG#2- 3.125 MW) will be retired.

Installation of new Turbo Generator of capacity18 MW which will be

connected to Recovery Boiler.

Auxiliaries - Coal handling plant to new boiler, ash handling plant,

augmentation of boiler water treatment plant, etc.

Steam from recovery boiler and power boilers will be synchronized and used for

power generation and main plant applications. LP and MP steam will be used in

main plant for processing. About 70 to 75%of entire condensate will be recovered

and reused as boiler feed. A dedicated closed-circuit Cooling Tower will be installed

with a minimum 5 to 6 Cycle of Concentration (COC) for water conservation

purpose.

3.2.6. Water Intake and Treatment

The fresh water requirement after MEP will be around 37,000 m³/day. The existing

facilities can handle 35,000 m3/day of water and hence will be upgraded to mill’s

requirement after MEP.

Proposals





Water intake and water treatment plant will be upgraded to meet requirement,

after MEP, with following additional facilities.

Intake water pump

Water clarifier

Water reservoir

3.2.7. Wastewater Treatment

The wastewater generation at the existing facility is about 17,500 m3/day. The

capacity of the ETP at existing facility is about 30,000 m3/day. In order to treat the

total wastewater generation of about 30,000 m3/day during Post MEP, the existing

ETP will be upgraded with addition of required new pollution abatement equipment

and processes to meet the discharge norms as prescribed by CPCB/GPCB.

Currently, the treated wastewater generated from the existing mill is utilized for

land irrigation to a maximum possible extent. All efforts will be made to utilize the

additional wastewater generated from the expansion project for irrigation in the

nearby areas during the post project scenario. The existing treated effluent supply

pipe network will be augmented to meet the additional hydraulic volumes.

Considering the challenges in utilizing 100% of the treated wastewater quantity for

irrigation due to variations in the cropping pattern, JKPM requests MoEF&CC to

grant permission to discharge treated wastewater into GodaNala during off crop

seasons and monsoon.

3.2.8. Infrastructure

The site is already well developed with necessary infrastructure and any additions

like storages, roads, drains, firefighting, weigh bridges, material handling etc. will

be added.

3.2.9. Plant capacities

The existing and post MEP mill capacities are presented in the Table 3.1.

Table 3-1 Existing and Post MEP Mill Capacities


Incremental

Proposal

1 Paper/Board Machines section

1.1 PM#1&2 (PWP) tpa 60,000 60,000 - Existing will continue

1.2 PM#3 (Board) tpa 100,800 100,800 - Existing will continue






Incremental

Proposal

1.3 PM#4 (New Board)

tpa - 200,000 200,000 New Unit

1.4 Total Paper/board Production

tpa 160,800 360,800 200,000 -

tpd 480 1,080 600 -

1.5 Deinking Plant BD tpd - 150 150 New or Existing SFT will be converted to DIP


BD tpd 200 600 400 Existing will be used with New 400 tpd SFT plant

2 Pulp Mill

2.1

Bleached

Chemical Wood Pulp mill

BD tpa 60,000 160,000 100,000

Relocating and Reinstallation

from JKPL unit, Rayagada, Orissa, with Upgradation. The existing pulp mill of capacity 60,000 BD tpa will be retired.

BD tpd 175 460 285

2.2 BCTMP mill AD tpa 100,000 100,000 New Unit

AD tpd 300 300

2.3 ClO2 plant tpd 2 15 15

Existing Nonintegrated ClO2plant will be retired and New integrated ClO2 plant will be installed.

2.4 Oxygen Generation Plant

Nm3/hr 200 500 500

Installation of new O2generation plant of capacity 500 Nm3/hr. The existing O2 generation plant will be retired.

2.5 Pulp Wet lapping machine

tpd 150 150 New wet lap machine

3 Recovery plant

3.1 Evaporator

tph of water

evaporation

70 300 230

Existing Evaporator will be used for BCTMP waste liquor evaporation along with Reinstalled evaporator with upgradation

3.2 Recovery boiler


335 950 950

Existing recovery boilerwill be retired and a new Recovery boiler will be installed

3.3 Lime kiln tpd of lime

90 230 140

Existing will be used alongwith re-installed lime kiln from JKPM or JKPM lime kiln will be re-installed with upgradation.

3.4 Recausticising plant

Whilte liquor

cum/day 1,000 3,000 2000

Existing plant will be upgraded with additional equipment.

4 Power Plant

4.1 Power Boilers tph of steam

170 360 190

CFB#1-20 (To be Retired) CFB#2 - 30 (To be Retired) CFB#3-50 (Operating), CFB#4 - 70 (Operating) New CFB#5 - 150 tph (Operating) New CFB#6 - 90 tph (Standby)

4.2 Turbo MW 30.25 72.00 41.75 TG#1 - 3.125 (To be Retired),






Incremental

Proposal

Generators TG#2 - 3.125 (To be Retired) TG#3 - 12 (Operating), TG#4 - 12 (Operating) New TG#5 - 30 MW and New TG#6 18 MW will be installed

5 Others

5.1 PG Plant Nm³/hr 3000 10000 7000 New 7000 Nm³/h will be installed

5.2

Precipitated Calcium Carbonate (PCC) Plant (CaCO3)

tpm 1200 1200 -

Existing capacity is adequate. No change

5.3 Silicate Nano Fibers (CaSiO3)

tpm 1500 1500 - Existing capacity is adequate. No change

5.4 GCC plant tpd -- 100 100 New 100 tpd GCC plant will be installed



m³/day 35,000 45,000 10000 Intake pump station and WTP will be upgraded.

6.2 Waste Water Treatment

m³/day

30,000

45,000

15000

The existing ETP will be upgraded up to tertiary level to meet the additional hydraulic volumes during the post project scenario

3.3. Input Requirements

The major inputs for the production of the pulp and paper/board are

Wood/bamboo for chemical wood pulp and BCTMP

Wastepaper for SFT and DIP

Imported pulps as supplementary fibre

Chemicals for pulping, recovery and paper/board

Steam

Power

Water

Major inputs requirement for MEP and Post-MEP during the operation will be as

below.

3.3.1. Raw Material Requirement

The raw material required for the proposed MEP are presented in the Table 3.2.

Table 3-2 Raw Materials Requirement

S.No Raw material Unit Existing Post MEP Incremental Source

1 Wood/Bamboo Tpa 163,000 515,000 352,000 Local

Wood –Plantations Tpa 130,000 450,000 320,000 Local





S.No Raw material Unit Existing Post MEP Incremental Source

Wood - Market Tpa - 50,000 50,000 Local

Bamboo - Forest area

Tpa 33,000 15,000 (18,000) Local

2 Waste Paper AD tpa

- 82,000 82,000 Local

3 Hard Wood Pulp (HWP)

Tpa 26,000 - (26,000) Captive

after MEP

4 Soft Wood Pulp (SWP)

Tpa 1,900 9,900 8,000 Import

5 Bleached Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (BCTMP)

Tpa 58,700 - (58,700) Captive

after MEP

Sourcing of Wood:

JKPL, Unit has implemented social and farm forestry plantations of Eucalyptus,

Subabul and Casuarinawithin 350 Km radius of the mill covering different parts of

Gujarat, Maharashtra and Madhya Pradesh in about 1,35,000 acres of land.

Gujarat state forest department is also promoting social & farm forestry

plantations. They are also providing financial assistance for the farmers for their

agro forestry plantations in their regime. In line with the same, JKPL unit CPM has

distributed about 2556 lakhs of saplings to the nearby farmers from the year 2002

to 2018. The unit has already developed year wise for contract farming plantation

program up to year 2028 covering 314000 acres of land to implement agro forestry

and farm forestry in order to meet the wood demand in the future.

In addition, JKPL unit CPM has developed an action plan for enhancing captive

plantation by planting saplings within the facility.

3.3.2. Chemicals Requirement

The MEP proposals in the pulp mill are more focused on eliminating elemental

chlorine in bleaching, conservation of energy, water and reduction in specific

chemical consumption in bleaching.

The major process chemicals required to be used and procured for the production

is given in the Table 3.3. The materials will be transported by trucks.

Table 3-3 Chemicals Requirement

Sl. No

Chemical Unit Existing Post MEP

Incremental/ Reduction

Source

1 Pulping

1.1 Caustic tpa 2,100 7,500 5,400 Local





Sl. No

Chemical Unit Existing Post MEP

Incremental/ Reduction

Source

1.2 Hydrogen Peroxide

tpa 1,500 5,400 3,900 Local

1.3 Chlorine for bleaching

tpa 2,700 - (2,700)

No chlorine required for bleaching as new pulp mill will be with Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) bleaching

1.4 Chelating agent tpa - 300 300

1.5

Diethylene Triamine Penta acetic Acid (DTPA)

tpa - 300 300

1.6 Sulphuric Acid tpa 600 1,930 1,330 Local

1.7 Chlorine dioxide tpa 500 3,500 3,000 In-house

1.8 Oxygen

tpa 2,200 4,500 2,300 Purchase and captive generation.

2 Chlorine dioxide chemicals

2.1 Caustic tpa - 105 105 Local

2.2 Chlorine gas (for make-up)

tpa - 2,600 2,600 Local

2.3 Sodium chlorate tpa 900 - (900) -

2.4 Hydrogen Peroxide

tpa 300 - (300) -

2.5 Sulfuric acid tpa 1,400 - (1,400) -

3 Recovery chemicals

3.1 Caustic as

make-up tpa 400 800 400 Local

3.2 Salt cake (Na2SO4) as make-up

tpa 2,800 5,300 2,500 Local

3.3 Lime stone make-up for lime kiln

tpa 2,100 11,000 8,900 Local

3.4

Purchased lime for recausticizing

tpa 13,000 - (13,000)

After project total lime will be produced from lime mud in the inhouse lime kilns.

4 Paper/Board chemicals

4.1

Stock preparation chemicals (Alum, PAC, Rosin)

tpa 6,000 13,000 7,000 Local

4.2

Filler, Sizing, Coating Chemicals (PCC, GCC, Starch)

tpa 9,000 20,000 11,000 PCC and GCC captive and others local

Note: Values in parenthesis indicates reduction quantities during post MEP.





3.3.3. Steam and Power Requirement

The steam and power requirement for the existing and proposed MEP is given in

Table 3.4.

Table 3-4 Steam and Power requirement

Parameter Units Existing scenario

Post MEP

Remarks

Power boiler installed capacities

tph 170 360

New CFB#5 - 150 tph (Operating) and New CFB#6-90 tph (Standby) The existing boilers (CFB#1 20 tph and CFB#30 tph) will be retired

Recovery boiler capacity

tph 35 120 New Recovery boiler of capacity of 950 tpd of BL solids

Total installed steam generation capacity

tph 205 480 -

Total steam demand tph 145 360

Additional steam requirement for power generation and process steam requirement for pulp mill and board machine

Specific steam demand

t/t 7.4 8.2

Specific steam consumption increases due to higher condensation to generate power for BCTMP

Specific coal consumption

t/t of paper

1.5 1.4

Higher efficiency new power boiler, due to high pressure new recovery boiler and new power boiler more power generated per tonne of steam through co-generation.

Total TG capacity MW 30.25 72

New TG#5 - 30 MW and New TG#6 18 MW will be installed. Existing two TGs (TG#1-3.125 MW and TG#2- 3.125 MW) will be retired

Actual electrical energy needed

MW 21 60 -

Specific electrical energy

kWh/t 1060 1330 Higher specific consumption due to high power consuming BCTMP

3.3.4. Fuel Requirement

Black liquor (generated in-house), indigenous, imported coal, lignite, furnace oil

and pet coke are the fuels. Furnace oil with producer gas or with pet coke will be

used in lime mud reburning kiln and furnace oil will be used in start-up and





stabilising the operations of chemical recovery boiler. Necessary permission will be

obtained for the usage of pet coke during MEP. Pet coke when burnt in lime kiln,

the sulphur in pet coke will be absorbed andreacts with calcium of lime mud.

Hence SO2 emissions from the stack will be minimal. Coal/lignite is used for power

and steam generation. Additional fuel oil and coal/lignite requirements are given in

the following Table 3.5.

Table 3-5 Fuel Requirement

S.No Fuel Unit Existing Post MEP Incremental Source

1

Indian local (Linkage and Open Market)

Tpa 70,000 200,000 130,000

Existing coal linkage of 73,804tpa with Western Coalfield is available. Additional coal linkage shall be obtained locally/open market.

2 Imported coal

Tpa 100,000 200,000 100,000 Coal is imported from Indonesia through open market.

3 Lignite Tpa 70,000 100,000 30,000

Additional lignite linkage shall be obtained locally from Rajpardhi mines as per the existing procurement.

4

Furnace oil for lime kiln and recovery boiler

Kl 170 3,200 3,030 Local Market

5

Pet coke

for lime kiln

tpa - 9,600 9,600 Local Market

3.3.5. Water Requirement

In the current operations, JKPL, Unit CPM could bring down the fresh water

consumption for the plant to a level of 20,500 m3/day equivalent to around 40

m3/t of paper/board. As part of MEP some more proposals are being planned to

reduce further the fresh water requirement for the plant and to be well within the

stipulated norms during the post project scenario.

Mill has permission to draw 5 MGD (22,730 m3/day) of water from Ukai Left Bank

Main Canal. During the post MEP scenario, the total fresh water requirement will

be increased to 8.15 MGD (37,000 m3/day) whereas the specific water

consumption will reduce to 32m3/t of Product. Necessary In principle Permission

has been obtained for additional quantity from Narmada Water Resource Water





Supply and Kalpsar Department and the same is attached as Annexure 8 (b). The

water balance for the proposed MEP is presented in the Table 3.6.

Table 3-6 Water Balance for the Proposed MEP

SL.No

Description Fresh Water

make-up (m3/day)

Evaporation (m3/day)

Wastewater to ETP (m3/day)

1

Existing Board machine and paper machine

9,600 600 9000

2 New Board machine 6,000 700 5,300

3 Chemical Pulp Mill 12,000 1200 10,800

4 BCTMP 2,000 2000 No wastewater from BCTMP

5 Chemical Recovery Plant 2,000 500 2,500

6 Power Plant 3,000 900 2,100

7 Others 400 100 300

Total for Plant 35,000 5900 30,000

8 Domestic 2,000 Sewage to Proposed STP

Total water requirement

37,000

3.3.6. Wastewater Generation, Treatment and Utilization of Treated

Wastewater

The wastewater from the mill, post MEP will be divided mainly into two separate

streams. One stream from pulp mill and recovery section and the other stream

from existing paper/board machines, new board machine, power plant and other

utilities. Total wastewater generation from the plant, post MEP will be about

30,000 m³/day.

The wastewater treatment and discharge quantities during Post MEP is presented

in the Table 3.7.

Table 3-7 Wastewater Treatment and Discharge after MEP

S.No. Category Wastewater Generation

(in m³/day)

1 Wastewater to ETP 30,000

2 ETP sludge loss 200

3 Treated wastewater from ETP 29,800

4 Treated wastewater Recycle to Process 2,000

5 Treated wastewater discharged for Land Irrigation 27,800

3.3.7. Solid waste Generation and Disposal

The expected increase in the solid and hazardous waste due to proposed MEP and

the respective proposed disposal practices are presented in the Table 3.8.






Sl No Particulars Existing Quantity (BD TPD)

Additional Quantity (BD TPD)

Post MEP Quantity (BD TPD)

Disposal

1 Bamboo/Wood

Dust 20 40 60

Considering the carbon content, the wood dust will be used as alternative fuel in Boiler as per existing practice

2 Fly Ash 120 300 420

Will be used for Cement/Brick manufacturing as per existing practice

3 Lime Sludge/Grit 60 - 40

Due to the installation of new lime kiln along with existing one and operating lime kiln with full capacity, only lime grit will be generated which will be used as backfilling material at abandoned stone quarry as per existing practice

4 ETP Sludge 16 40 55 Will be sold to board manufacturers as per existing practice.

6 Spent Oil 725

kg/Month 1000

kg/Month 1725

kg/Month

Will be disposed to authorized recyclers as per existing practice

3.4. Land Use Planning

Since the available free space in the mill will be used for project facilities, no

additional land is required. The mill has total land area of 363 acres (Plant area

201acres and Colony area 162 acres). For MEP project, around 70 acres will be

utilised from existing plant area. The land use break-up Post Project is given in the

Table 3.9.

Table 3-9 Land Use Break up during Post MEP


A Plant area

A.1 Plant & Building 40

A.2 Materials storage 60

A.3 Roads/Drains 9

A.4 Vacant area (for future development) 26

A.5 Green belt/ green cover within mill area 66

Total Plant area 201

B Colony area

B.1 Built up area 54

B.2 Vacant area 43

B.3 Green belt/Green cover 65

Total Colony area 162






Total (A+B+C) 363

Overall mill layout also indicating the usage of project facilities is enclosed as

Annexure 13.

Figure 3-7 Views of areas earmarked for Project facilities





3.5. Project Schedule and Project Cost

3.5.1. Project Schedule

The proposed Mill Modernization and Expansion Plan will be implemented twenty-

seven (27) months from the date of receipt of necessary permits and clearances

from various statutory agencies.

3.5.2. Project Cost

Total investment for the installation of project is Rs 1500 crores as per broad

break up given in the Table 3.10.





Table 3-10 Project Cost Break Up

Sl. No Description Cost in Crore

1 Civil Works 250

2 Plant & Machinery Cost (including Erection and Engineering)

1050

3 Other Capitalisation Cost (pre-operative expense, escalation and contingency, startup expenses and interest during construction)

200

Total 1500

3.6. Socioeconomic Benefits

Some of the socio-economic benefits are presented below.

3.6.1. Improvement in the Infrastructure

This being a mill modernization project, most of the infrastructure like water intake

system, power in take system, roads, drains, hospitals schools, etc are already

available in the vicinity of the plant location. However, the above infrastructure /

amenities / facilities available near the plant will be assessed based on need based

survey and will be taken up under CSR scheme for development.

3.6.2. Employment


would generate indirect employment to about 1000 persons in the industries and

service organizations and material handling, etc., which will be supported by the

operations of the mill.

During the implementation and construction stage of the project, it will generate

employment to about 1000 in direct persons for about a year.

3.6.3. Development of Ancillary Industries

The implementation of the project will undoubtedly provide stimulation for added

growth to a number of other industries some of which are given below;

Trucking industry, which will load and haul raw materials, coal, and other

supplies to the mill and also mill outputs. The haulage requirement due to

project would be around 0.8 million tonnes per annum comprising both

inputs and outputs.





Establishment of ancillary industries such as core for paper reels, core

plugs, machining and welding units, etc.

Indigenous machinery suppliers / manufacturers.

Construction industry during erection and construction period of Ancillary

Business



Chapter-4, Baseline Environmental Status


4. BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

4.1 Introduction

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the

study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study

area covers 10 km radius around the boundaries of the project site. Baseline

studies are conducted to document the pre-project environmental conditions

required for quantifying the impacts due to the proposed project efficiently. The

baseline data is desirable to capture seasonal effects of many environmental

phenomena with reference to air, water, noise and soil qualities.

4.2 Study Area

The project site (existing mill) is located at Village Gunsada, Bhimpura,

Singalkhanch, Fort Songadh Taluk, Tapi District in the State of Gujarat. The mill

site lies within the coordinates of latitude 21°12’N and longitude 73°34'E and falls

under the Survey of India Topography Map No. 46G/7, 46G/8, 46G/11 and

46G/12. The study area of 10 km radius from the existing Mill site was defined for

primary data collection as per the ToR approved by Ministry of Environment, Forest

and Climate Change.

The site is well connected to State Highway SH-174 which lies adjacent to the

project site. The nearest railway station is Ukai Songadh railway station at an

aerial distance of 6.3 km in the south and the nearest airport to the project site is

Surat airport which is located at an aerial distance of 86 km towards West direction

from the project site. The google earth image of the project site showing the State

Highway adjacent to the project site is presented in Figure 4.1 and the topo map of

the study areais presented in Figure 4.2.

Figure 4-1Project Site Showing Nearest State Highway





Figure 4-2Topo Map (10 Km radius) of the Study area

4.3 Scope and Methodology of Baseline Study

To assess the environmental impacts due to proposed expansion project, it is

required to conduct a comprehensive and scientific study on various environmental

aspects and their interaction with natural resources namely climate, hydro-

geological aspects, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality, ecology, land

SH 174





use and socio-economic profile of the people. Hence the assessment of baseline

environmental setting is an essential component of the EIA study.

As a part of EIA, the primary baseline data monitoring has been conducted for

three (3) months i.e., from 24th September 2018 to 23rd December 2018 and the

data has been generated by MoEF&CC approved & NABL accredited Environmental

Testing Laboratory M/s. Vardan Enviro laboratory, Gurgaon. This baseline

studies include Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM), Soil Quality analysis,

Water Quality analysis (Ground and Surface water), and noise monitoring within 10

km radius of the Plant site as per the Terms of Reference (ToR) issued by the

MoEF&CC. The secondary data was collected from respective Government and

other authenticated sources. Also, the field surveys were conducted for primary

data generation on various aspects. The results obtained from primary baseline

data were co-related with the respective secondary data in order to analyze the

environmental conditions of the project site.

Table 4.1 gives various environmental attributes considered for formulating

environmental baseline and Table 4.2 gives the frequency and monitoring

methodology for various environmental attributes

Table 4-1 Various Environmental Attributes

S.No. Attribute Parameter Source of Data

1 Land Use Trend of land use change for different categories

Topo sheet and Satellite imagery and ground truth verification

2 Ambient Air Quality

As per NAAQs standard parameter for pulp and paper industry i.e, Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5), Sulfur dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Ammonia (NH3), Ozone (O3), are monitored

Ambient air quality monitoring at eight (8) locations

3 Water Quality

Physical, Chemical and Biological parameters

Water samples were collected at surface water location (1 upstream, 2 downstream), ETP outlet and eight (8) ground water locations during this study period

4 Noise levels Noise levels in dB(A) Noise level monitoring at six (6) locations





S.No. Attribute Parameter Source of Data

5 Ecology

Study of Existing terrestrial flora and fauna within the 10 km radius of project influence area through Quadrate and Line transact method for trees, shrubs and herbs, Point count method for birds, Belt transect method for road side trees and butterflies. Reconnaissance survey (Near Agricultural, Human habitations and Road side), identification of ecologically sensitive receptors based on literature survey and field investigations

Secondary sources and Field studies and Reconnaissance survey

6 Geology Geological history Secondary sources

7 Hydrogeology Hydrogeological features of the study area

Secondary sources Field studies and Reconnaissance survey

8 Soil

Soil types and samples analyzed for physical and chemical parameters.

Data collected from secondary sources and soil sample analysis at eight locations

9 Socio-economic aspects

Primary Survey was undertaken at the designated villages to establish the existing socioeconomic status of the study area. Socioeconomic indicators such as demography, literacy, health and livelihood, amenities and cultural aspects were studied, Secondary Published data on population and amenities obtained from Directorate of Census Operations, GOI characteristics were collected

Based on field survey and data collected from secondary sources

Table 4-2 Frequency and Monitoring Methodology

Attributes Sampling

Measurement Method Remarks Network Frequency

A. Air Environment

Particulate Matter (PM10)

Total 8 locations to represent both upwind, down wind and background

24 hourly, two days in a week and 12 weeks in a month

Gravimetric (High- Volume with Cyclone)

As per CPCB Standards under November

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

Gravimetric (High- Volume with PM10 Impactor)





Attributes Sampling

Measurement Method Remarks Network Frequency

Oxides of Sulphur (SO2)

concentrations as per the CPCB guidelines.

EPA Modified West & Gaeke method

18th 2009 Notification for NAAQS Oxides of

Nitrogen (NOx) Arsenite Modified Jacob & Hochheiser

B. Noise

Hourly equivalent noise levels

Requisite locations in the project influence area

Once

Instrument: Noise level meter

IS: 4954-1968

C. Water

Water Quality Set of grab samples at

requisite locations for ground and surface water

Once

Samples for water quality collected and

analyzed as per IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods for sampling and testing of Industrial effluents Standard methods for examination of water and wastewater analysis published by American Public Health Association.

D. Land Environment

Parameter for soil quality: pH, texture, electrical

conductivity, organic matter, nitrogen, phosphate, sodium, calcium, potassium and Magnesium.

Requisite soil samples be collected as per BIS specification

within project influence area

Once

Collected and analyzed as per soil analysis reference book, M.L. Jackson

4.4 Administrative Setup of the study Area district

Tapi district lies between latitude 20°30‟ - 21°35‟N and longitude 73°05‟ - 74°20‟

E and has a total geographical area of 3238.83 sq. km. The district is situated in

the southern part of the state. It is bounded by the Surat district on the west,

Narmada in the north, the Navsari district in the south, The Dang district in the

south-east, and Maharashtra state in the east.

The district comprises of 5 Talukas, i.e., Nizar, Songadh, Uchhal, Valod and Vyara.

The administrative divisions of the district have been reconstituted recently by

bifurcating Surat district into two districts namely Surat and Tapi. The district Tapi

has headquarter at Vyara and has fairly good network of roads and all the taluka

headquarters are connected with all-weather roads.





Location and Administrative Map of the Tapi district as shown in Figure 4.3.

Figure 4-3Administrative Map of the Tapi district

Source: Groundwater brochureTapi district, Gujarat, Central ground water board, West central region Ahmedabad

4.5 Land Environment

4.5.1 Physiography and Drainage

4.5.1.1 Physiography of the Region

Geographically, the district belongs to the western coastlands of the Deccan

peninsula. The district has five zones, viz., hilly areas, piedmont slopes, alluvial

plains and coastal plains. The northern, north-eastern parts of the district fall in

this category. Here the general elevation is more than 100m amsl. The topography

is rugged with low to moderate high hills and steep hill slopes. These parts are

poorly populated and are infested by dense jungle of teak and bamboo. The highest

elevation of the district is 569.0m amsl.

4.5.1.2 Physiography of the study area

The Study area exhibits undulating terrain. In the south eastern part of the study

area (10 km Radius) at a distance of 9 km is relatively elevated topography. There

Existing Mill Site





are number of reserved forests with in 10 km radius. The minimum and maximum

elevation of the study area (10 km radius) is 42 and 312 m amsl (above mean sea

level) respectively. The Project site is located about 87-92 m amsl (above mean sea

level). The Physiographic map of the study area is presented in Figure 4.4

Figure 4-4 Physiographic map of the Study Area

4.5.1.3 Drainage of the region

The Tapi is the major river which passes through the central parts of the district

and flows towards the west. The river is perennial in nature. It originates in

Madhya Pradesh near Betul and has about 62225 sq. Km. of catchment area2. The

average width of the river in the upstream of Kathor bridge is about 500m.

Downstream of the bridge the average width increases to 700m.

Ukai dam, constructed in 1965, is situated about 25km upstream of Kakarapar

weir. Other prominent rivers draining the district are Kim, Ver, Mindola, Jhankhari

and Purna. The Ver flows from north-east to south-west and flows parallel to Tapi

and then it flows towards west. All other rivers are situated toward south of Tapi

and flow towards west, parallel to Tapi. Tapi river basin is given in Figure 4.5.

2“Ground Water Brochure, Tapi District, Gujarat”, Government of India, Ministry of Water Resources, Central Ground Water Board, West Central Region, Ahmedabad, 2014





Figure 4-5 Major river Basin of Tapi District

Source: Water resources information system of India, Government of India

4.5.1.4 Drainage of Study Area

The Tapi is the major river which passes through the central parts of the district and flows

towards the west. The river is perennial in nature. It originates in Madhya Pradesh near

Betul and has about 62225 sq. Km. of catchment area. The average width of the river in the

upstream of Kathor bridge is about 500m. Downstream of the bridge the average width

increases to 700m. Pickup weir was constructed on the Tapi river in 1954 at Kakarapar

about 56km west of Surat. Ukai dam, constructed in 1965, is situated about 25km

upstream of Kakarapar weir. Other prominent rivers draining the district are Kim, Ver,

Mindola, Jhankhari and Purna. The Ver flows from north-east to south-west and flows

parallel to Tapi and then it flows towards west. All other rivers are situated toward south of

Tapi and flow towards west, parallel to Tapi.

The major river in the study area is Tapi River which flows in the northern of the project

boundary. An irrigation reservoir is located in the eastern side of the project site at a

distance of 2 Km. There are numerous minor water bodies present in the study area. Also

canals were noticed in the study area.

Figure 4-6 Drainage Map of the Study Area





4.5.2 Land Use pattern Based on remote sensing data

Land Use refers to man's activity and the various uses, which are carried on land.

Land Cover refers to natural vegetation, water bodies, rock/soil, artificial cover and

others, resulting due to land transformation.

In order to demarcate different land use classes of the study area, the remote

sensing data such as satellite imagery and GIS techniques were used. The land use

/ land cover maps developed using these techniques will be utilized for assessing

the aerial extent of the different classes and interpreting the land use pattern for

the study area.

Satellite remote sensing is used for determining different types of land use classes

as it provides a means of assessing a large area with limited time and resources.

However, satellite images do not record land cover details directly and they are

measured based on the solar energy reflected from each area on the land. The

amount of multi spectral energy in multi wavelengths depends on the type of

material at the earth’s surface and the objective is to associate particular land

cover with each of these reflected energies, which is achieved using either visual or

digital interpretation. The present study envisages different LULC around the

proposed project area.





The district lies in the southern Gujarat and has forest area spread over 96760.32

Ha. The density of the forest cover of Vyara division ranges from 0.4 to 0.8. The

available Non-Agricultural Land is 485.23 Sq. Km which is about 13% of the total

area whereas the cultivable barren land is around 456.59 Sq. Km.

4.5.2.1 Satellite Data

IRS Resourcesat-2 LISS-III multispectral satellite data of 04th March 2018 was

utilized for the present study. The rectification of imagery was carried out on to

bring the digital data on the earth coordinate system by means of ground control

point (GCP) assignments/SOI toposheets. The details of the satellite data are


Table 4-3 Details of the Satellite Data

Name of Satellite

Year Sensor Scale Date of Pass

IRS-P6 2018 LISS III 1:50000 4-March-2018

Scale of Mapping- Considering the user defined scale of mapping, 1:50000 IRS-P6,

LISS-III data on 1:50000. Scale was used for Land use / Land cover mapping of 10

km radius for proposed site. The description of the land use categories for 10 km

radius and the statistics are given for 10 km radius. IRS P6 Satellite Imagery of the

10 km radius from the project site is given in Figure 4.7.

4.5.2.2 Land Use/Land cover classification system

The LULC Classification has been done at three levels where level -1 being the

broad classification about the land covers that is Built-up land, agriculture land,

waste land, wet lands, and water bodies. These are followed by level –II where built-

up land is divided into towns/cities as well villages. The Agriculture land is divided

into different classes such as cropland, Fallow, Plantation, while wastelands are

broadly divided into, Land with scrub and without Scrub and Mining and Industrial

wasteland. The wetlands are classified into inland wetlands, coastal wetlands and

islands. The water bodies are classified further into River/stream, Canal, Tanks

and bay. In the present study level II classification has been undertaken. The

Satellite imagery of 10 km radius from the project site is presented in Figure 4.7.

The procedure adopted for land use mapping is shown in the flowchart (Figure

4.8). The present land use / land cover maps were prepared, based on the

classification system of national standards.

Figure 4-7 Satellite Imagery of 10 km radius from Project Site





Figure 4-8Flow Chart showing Methodology of Land Use Mapping

SOI Topographical

Maps IRS-P6, LISS-II FCC Imagery Collateral Data

Landform

Initial Rapid

Reconnaissance

Interpretation

Keys Visual Interpretation





4.5.2.3 Interpretation Technique

Standard on screen visual interpretation procedure was followed. The various Land

use / Land cover classes interpreted along with the SOI topographical maps during

the initial rapid reconnaissance of the study area. The physiognomic expressions

conceived by image elements of color, tone, texture, size, shape, pattern, shadow,

location and associated features are used to interpret the FCC imagery. Image





interpretation keys were developed for each of the LU/LC classes in terms of image

elements.

March 2018 FCC imagery (Digital data) of the study area was interpreted for the

relevant land use classes. On screen visual interpretation coupled with supervised

image classification techniques are used to prepare the land use classification.

1. Digitisation of the study area (10 km radius from the proposed site) from the

topo maps

2. In the present study the IRS –P6 satellite image have been procured and

interpreted using the ERDAS imaging and ARC-GIS soft ware adopting the

necessary interpretation techniques.

3. Satellite data interpretation and vectorisation of the resulting units

4. Adopting the available guidelines from manual of LULC mapping using Satellite

imagery (NRSA, 1989)

5. Field checking and ground truth validation

6. Composition of final LULC map

The LULC Classification has been done at three levels where level -1 being the

broad classification about the land covers that is Built-up land, agriculture land,

waste land, wet lands, and water bodies. These are followed by level –II where built-

up land is divided into towns/cities as well villages. The Agriculture land is divided

into different classes such as cropland, Fallow, Plantation, while wastelands are

broadly divided into, Land with scrub and without Scrub and Mining and Industrial

wasteland. The wetlands are classified into inland wetlands, coastal wetlands and

islands. The water bodies are classified further into River/stream, Canal, Tanks

and bay. In the present study level II classification has been undertaken.

4.5.2.4 Field Verification

Field verification involved collection, verification and record of the different surface

features that create specific spectral signatures / image expressions on FCC. In the

study area, doubtful areas identified in course of interpretation of imagery is

systematically listed and transferred on to the corresponding SOI topographical

maps for ground verification. In addition to these, traverse routes were planned

with reference to SOI topographical maps to verify interpreted LU/LC classes in

such a manner that all the different classes are covered by at least 5 sampling





areas, evenly distributed in the area. Ground truth details involving LU/LC classes

and other ancillary information about crop growth stage, exposed soils, landform,

nature and type of land degradation are recorded and the different land use classes

are taken. The level I and level II land use/land cover map of 10 km radius from

the project site is presented in Figure 4.9.

Figure 4-9 Land Use Classification of 10 km radius from the Project Site

4.5.2.5 Description of the Land Use/ Land Cover Classes

Built Up Land- It is defined as an area of human settlements composed of houses,

commercial complex, transport, communication lines, utilities, services, places of

worships, recreational areas, industries etc. Depending upon the nature and type

of utilities and size of habitations, residential areas can be aggregated into villages,

towns and cities. All the manmade construction covering land belongs to this

category. The built- up in 10 km radius from the project site is presented in the

Table 4.4 and the Photographs of Built-up land in village area is shown in Figure

4.10.

Table 4-4Built Up Land in 10 km radius from the Project Site

S.No Land use Area in Sq.km Percentage

1 Built-up (Rural, Urban and

Industry) 3.12 0.90





Figure 4-10 Built Up Land in Rural Area

Built Up Land in the Study Area

Agricultural Land- This category includes the land utilized for crops, vegetables, fodder

and fruits. Existing cropland and current fallows are included in this category. It is

described as an area under agricultural tree crops, planted adopting certain agricultural

management techniques. The Agricultural land in 10 km radius from the project site is

presented in the Table 4.6 and the photographs of the respective agricultural land in the

study area is shown in the Figure 4.11. Of all the agricultural lands, Crop land occupies

maximum of 53.68 % area within 10 km radius.

Table 4-6 Agricultural Land in 10 km radius from the Project Site

S.No Land use Area in Sq.Km Percentage

1 Crop Land 185.84 53.68

2 Fallow Land 3.56 1.03

Figure 4-11 Agricultural Land in Rural Area





Crop Land in the Study Area

Fallow Land in Study Area

Forest Land- These are the areas bearing an association predominantly of trees

and other vegetation types (within the notified forest boundaries) capable of

producing timber and other forest produce. The study area of 10 km buffer

comprises of Forest plantation, forest blanks and Scrub Forest. The forest land in

10 km radius from the project site is presented in the Table 4.7

Table 4-7 Forest Land in 10 km radius from the Project Site


1 Forest Plantation 62.48 18.05

Figure 4-12 Forest Land in Rural Area





Forest Plantation

Wasteland-Wastelands are the degraded or underutilized lands most of which

could be brought under productive use with proper soil and water management

practices. Wasteland results from various environmental and human factors.

Land with or without Scrub- The land, which is outside the forest boundary and

not utilized for cultivation. Land with or without scrub usually associated with

shallow, stony, rocky otherwise non-arable lands. The Wasteland in 10 km radius

from the project site is as below in Table 4.8 and the photographs representing the

same in the study area is presented in the Figure 4.13.

Table 4-8 Wasteland in 10 km radius from the proposed project site

Sl.No Land use Area in Sq.Km Percentage

1 Built-up Land Mining 1.06 0.31

2 Land with or without Scurb 23.19 6.70

Figure 4-13 Photographs showing the land with or without scrub in the study area

Land with or without Scrub

Water Bodies- The category comprises area of surface water, either impounded in

the form of ponds, reservoirs or flowing as streams, rivers and canals. River cater





channel is inland waterways used for irrigation and for flood control. The water

bodies in 10 km radius from the project site is presented in the Table 4.9. The

photographs of the water body in the study area is presented in the Figure 4.14.

Table 4-9 Water Bodies in 10 km radius from the Project Site


1 Water Bodies – Tank, River,

Canal 66.96 19.34

Figure 4-14Water Bodies in Study Area

River Tapi

4.5.2.6 Final Output

The study reveals that the following major land use in the study area of 10 km

radius from the project boundary

In the agricultural land (Crop Land- 53.68 %) occupies majority of the area.

About 3.12 % of the built-up land. The port and the industrial land occupy

majority of the built-up land

The Built-up land of Industry occupies majority of the area surrounding the

plant

The overall summary of the statistics of LU/LC in the study area is presented in the

Table 4.5 and Figure 4.15.

Table 4-5 Overall Summary of the Statistics of LU/LC in the study Area

SL.No. Land Use Percentage Area in Sq. Km





1 Built-up Land (Urban / Rural) 0.90 3.12

2 Crop Land 53.68 185.84

3 Fallow Land 1.03 3.56

4 Built-up Mining 0.31 1.06

5 Land with or without Scrub 6.70 23.19

6 Forest Plantation 18.05 62.48

7 Water Body 19.34 66.96

Total 100.000

Figure 4-15 Land use classes around 10 km radius from the project site

4.6 Geology

4.6.1 Geology in the region

Major geological formations exposed in the district are Quaternary alluvium,

Tertiary limestone and sandstones and deccan trap basalt. Figure 4.16 shows the

geology of the district and the succession of geological formations in the district.

The oldest rocks occurring to the north-east and south- east of the district are

Deccan traps of lower Eocene age. These are present in the form of horizontal

sheets at places showing gentle dips toward west. The total thickness of different

trap flows aggregates to nearly 200 meters.

Table 4-6 Geological Succession

Era Period Epoch/Series Description

Cenozoic Quaternary Holocene Soil, young alluvium





Blown and Fluvio-marine deposits

Tertiary

Pleistocene Older alluvium, conglomerate

Miocene Ferruginous sandstone (Gaj)

Eocene Numulitic Limestone

Palaeocene

Sub-Numulitic limestone, gypseous shale, Supra-Trappean sediments lateritised and having bauxite pockets

Mesozoic Lower tertiary to

upper cretaceous

Early Eocene to

upper

Deccan Trap basalt

with dykes

Figure 4-16 Geological Map of Tapi District

Source: Groundwater brochureTapi district, Gujarat, Central ground water board, West central region

Ahmedabad

4.6.2 Geology of the study area

The Study area underlined by the following geological formation:

Basalt and Dolerite

Diamictite

Sandstone, shale, and Coal seams





4.7 Geomorphology and Structure

The land forms / geomorphic units and structures such as fractures, fissures and

faults have been interpreted from the recent satellite image. All the landform /

geomorphic units and structures occurring in the study area are mapped. The

geomorphology and structures of the area plays the vital role in identifying the

ground water potential zones.

Geehorphologically, the district has five zones, viz., hilly areas, piedmont slopes,

alluvial plains and coastal plains. The following geomorphic units have been

interpreted using the satellite images within 10 km radius of the project site

boundary.

1. Moderately Dissected Hills

2. Pediment – Pediplain Complex

Apart from the above there is fracture system occur in and around the project site.

The fractures are the good ground water conduit. High yielding bore wells expected

in the intersection of fractures. It is also observed that there is promising fracture

aquifer within 1km from the project boundary and within the site.

4.8 Soil Environment

4.8.1 Soil in the Region

The soil in the Tapi basin up to Ukai Dam are basically divided into three groups:

coarse shallow soil, medium black soil, deep black soil.

Coarse shallow soil is primarily developed from basaltic deccan trap with a varying

depth of 25 cm to 50 cm and are usually found in Betul, Khandwa, Khargon,

Amrawati, Akola, Buldhana, Jalgaon, Dhule, Aurangabad and Nasik. Medium

black soils have developed from Deccan traps and cover the largest area of the

basin with depths generally varying from 50 cm to 1 m usually occurring in areas

like Khandwa, Amrawati, Akola, Buldhana, Jalgaon, Dhule, and Nasik. The deep

black soils are found along the Purna River and in the middle and lower reaches of

Tapi River. These soils have originated primarily from decomposition of trap rocks

of hilly ranges. The depths of this soil varies from 1m to 6m and are mostly found

in Amrawati, Akola, Buldhana, Jalgaon, Dhule, Nasik, Surat and Bharuch (Figure

4.17)





Figure 4-17 Soil Map of Gujarat

Figure 4-18 Soil Classification Map of the Study Area





4.8.1.1 Background Soil Quality in Study Area

Sampling locations were selected to evaluate the existing soil conditions in and

around the existing plant area representing various land use conditions. The

physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were determined.

Eight (8) locations within the 10 km radius around the study area were selected for

soil sampling including three (3) locations where treated wastewater is utilized for

land irrigation. The soil samples were collected from 2 feet depth with the help of

stainless-steel soil-sampling probe. At each location, soil samples were collected

from three different depths like 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below the surface and are

homogenized with the help of stainless-steel soil sampling probe. Various physical

and chemical parameters were analyzed as per Indian Standards. The soil sampling

locations are given in the Table 4.7 and the same are shown in Figure 4.19.

The summary results of the soil quality are presented in Annexure 14. The soil

sampling results are compared with the standard soil classification.

Table 4-7 Details of Soil Sampling Locations

Location Name Location Code Sampling Coordinates

Plant Site S1 21° 12' 31" N, 73° 34' 28"E

Irrigated Land-1 S2 21° 13' 3" N, 73° 34' 11"E

Irrigated Land-2 S3 21° 12' 14" N, 73° 33' 8"E

Moti Khervan S4 21°12' 55" N, 73° 31' 54"E

Songadh S5 21°10' 42" N,73° 33' 28"E Banglifolia S6 21°11' 35" N, 73° 35' 5"E

Patharada S7 21°14' 30" N, 73° 33' 45"E

Bhimpura S8 21° 12' 51" N, 73° 34' 58"E

Figure 4-19 Soil Quality Monitoring Location in the Study Area





Figure 4-20 Photographs of Soil Sampling

S1-Plant Site S2-Irrigated Area-1

S2-Irrigated Area-3 S4-MotiKhervan

S5-Songadh S6-Banglifolia

S7-Patharada S8-Bhimpura





4.8.1.2 Soil Analysis Result

The summary results of the soil quality are presented in Annexure 14. The soil

sampling results are compared with standard soil classification, Handbook of

Agriculture, Indian Council of Agricultural Research, New Delhi, 2012 and Dutch

intervention values;

The pH of the soil ranges from 7.2 to 8.32 indicating that soil is classified into

moderately alkaline. Electrical conductivity ranges from 0.2 mS/cm to 0.4 mS/cm

which is less than 2 mS/cm and hence the soil is non-saline which is in normal

condition. The concentration of chlorides varied from 55.45 mg/100g to 93.79

mg/100g. Available Nitrogen level in the soil was found ranged from 196 kg/ha to

362kg/ha (low to medium category). Calcium is in the range of 45.01 mg/100g to

73.26 mg/100g. Cation exchange capacity is in the range 2.01 to 6.36 meq/100 g.

The values of heavy metals were compared with Dutch Intervention values to detect

any contamination of soil. It was found that all the values were found to be below

the intervention values indicating that the soil in the study is free from

contamination

Sampling locations 1, 2 and 3 indicates the areas where treated wastewater is

utilized for land irrigation. Based on the results, it is evident that, no

contamination of soils due to operation of existing facility was observed.





Table 4-8 Physico-Chemical Characteristics of Soil samples Collected within the Study Area

S. No Parameters Units S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

1 pH - 8.32 7.59 8.30 7.84 7.45 7.24 8.20 7.95

2 Conductivity µs/cm 0.360 0.280 0.320 0.410 0.205 0.470 0.520 0.328

3 Sodium as Na mg/kg 34.06 40.56 31.34 42.78 46.32 33.56 35.93 48.21

4 Available Nitrogen kg/hec 240.00 204.00 267.00 290.00 196.00 312.00 362.00 306.20

5 Available Phosphorus kg/hec 18.50 15.25 21.00 11.34 16.20 13.31 36.10 19.50

6 Calcium as Ca mg/100g 45.01 68.10 49.37 51.32 72.57 54.37 59.41 73.26

7 Magnesium as Mg mg/100g 23.78 18.50 26.84 35.21 18.50 28.35 35.51 25.38

8 Chloride as Cl mg/100g 66.45 69.58 55.45 70.53 93.79 68.78 84.53 80.72

9 Bulk Density gm/cc 1.32 1.43 1.67 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.47 1.54

10 Water Holding

Capacity % 30.55 38.10 33.41 35.54 42.78 36.54 34.50 38.10

11 Available Potassium mg/100g 163.50 40.56 180.00 218.00 163.40 215.00 245.00 208.00

12 Cadmium as Cd mg/kg 0.24 0.31 0.24 0.41 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.49

13 Chromium as cr mg/kg 0.73 0.87 0.77 0.34 0.65 0.37 0.34 0.85

14 Manganese as Mn mg/kg 8.17 4.80 7.31 6.64 5.87 7.11 7.37 8.12

15 Lead as Pb mg/kg 0.51 0.45 0.32 0.57 0.68 0.57 0.52 0.54

16 Zinc as Zn mg/kg 0.86 0.98 0.57 0.35 0.54 0.34 3.10 2.20

17 Copper as Cu mg/kg 0.88 0.94 0.59 0.78 0.34 0.59 0.92 0.60

18 Colour - Brown Brownish

White Slightly Blackish

Slightly brown

Brownish White

Yellowish brown

Slightly blackish

White

19 SAR meq/l 0.32 0.35 0.28 0.35 0.39 0.29 0.28 0.38

20 Cation Exchange Capacity

meq/100g

4.56 5.29 5.46 5.93 2.01 5.47 6.36 6.22

21 Organic matter % 0.48 0.28 0.42 0.57 0.20 0.60 0.70 0.88

22 Nitrate Nitrogen mg/kg 36.10 28.00 33.10 37.23 26.80 38.80 46.20 31..20





4.9 Seismic Zone

The project area falls under Zone III of seismic zones of India which is a Moderate

Intensity zone as per IS 1893 (part 1):2002 (Bureau of Indian Standards Criteria for

earthquake resistant design of Structures). The seismic zone map of India is shown

in Figure 4.21.

With respect to earthquake hazard, the project site falls in Zone III i.e. Moderate

Damage Risk Zone (Vulnerability Atlas of India 1997, Ministry of Urban

Development (Figure 4.23).

Figure 4-21 Seismic zone Map of India

Zone II – Least Active Seismic Zone

Zone III – Moderate Seismic Zone

Zone IV – High Seismic Zone

Zone V – Highest Seismic Zone

Figure 4-22 Seismic Zone Map of Gujarat

Project Site





Figure 4-23 earthquake Hazard Map

Source: Vulnerability Atlas of India 1997, Ministry of Urban Development

4.10 Meteorological Data

Micro-meteorological data is one of the important components of the Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) study. As a part of the EIA study, both published long-

Project Site

Project Site





term data and site-specific meteorological data were collected as per the ToR

(Terms of Reference) awarded for the proposed project. A meteorological station was

installed in the project site.

4.10.1 Climatological Data IMD- Surat Observatory (Nearest IMD station)

Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) Pune was referred. The data was recorded

over a period of 30 years (1971 to 2000). The nearest IMD station was referred for

the current project. This data was compared with the site-specific data generated

during baseline monitoring studies. The meteorological data comprises monthly

mean wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity, rain fall etc., and

is presented in below Table 4.9.

Table 4-9 Indian Meteorological Department – Climatological Tables 30 Years Data:

1971-2000 (Surat IMD station)

Month

Temperature (ºC)

Humidity (%)

Rainfall (mm) Mean wind speed

(Kmph)

Mean Extremes

Highest

Lowest Highest Lowest Monthly

Total

No. of Rainy days

Heaviest fall in 24Hrs

Date and Year

Jan 35.0 10.9 38.3 4.4 67 1.5 0.2 43.7 6-1920 7.3

Feb 37.0 12.4 41.7 5.6 63 0.4 0 38.1 10-1898 7.5

Mar 40.4 16.4 44.0 8.9 62 0 0 13.0 26-1967 7.4

Apr 41.5 21.5 45.6 15.0 67 0.2 0 97.8 19-1947 8.3

May 41.0 23.9 45.6 19.4 70 2.3 0.2 51.6 26-1974 11.4

Jun 37.8 23.3 45.6 20.2 78 286.3 8.0 260.1 27-1922 12.9

Jul 34.1 23.3 38.9 19.9 85 436.5 14.3 459.2 2-1941 12.0

Aug 33.5 23.1 37.2 21.1 86 259.0 12.1 324.6 13-1964 10.3

Sep 36.2 22.9 41.1 20.6 83 159.6 7.1 389.4 23-1945 7.1

Oct 38.5 20.7 41.4 14.4 72 37.7 1.5 257.1 25-1894 5.7

Nov 36.8 15.8 39.4 10.6 63 10.5 0.6 148.3 6-1946 6.3

Dec 34.9 12.7 38.9 6.7 65 1.6 0.1 42.2 20-1933 7

Avg./ Annual Total

42.4 10.6 45.6 4.4 72 1195.5 44.2 459.2 2-1941 8.6

4.10.1.1 Ambient Temperature (as per IMD data)

Songadh has a tropical climate. As per IMD data, the period from March to June is

generally hot. The month of April and May are the hottest months with mean

maximum temperature of 41 oC. The mean lowest temperature reported during the

winter season (January month) of temperature10.9oC.





4.10.1.2 Relative humidity (as per long term IMD data)

The maximum relative humidity is generally experienced during July and August

with a peak level of about 86%. The lowest humidity about 62%.can be observed in

the month of March.

4.10.1.3 Rainfall (as per long term IMD data)

The average annual rainfall of the songarh was reported to be in the order of

1195.5 mm. June is the driest weather month with an average rainfall of 1.4 mm of

rainfall and wettest weather is in July with an average rainfall of 1614.0 mm of

rainfall.

4.10.1.4 Wind (as per long term IMD data)

Winds predominantly blow from South Western direction. During summer (March

to May), and monsoon (June to September) the winds blow from South Western

direction. Annual as well as Seasonal wind rose diagrams are presented in Figure

4.24 and Figure 4.25 respectively

Figure 4-24 Annual Windrose as per IMD Surat Observatory data (30 years average

data-1971-2001)

Figure 4-25 Seasonal Windrose as per IMD Surat Observatory Data





Monsoon (June to September) Winter (January to February)

Summer (March to May) Post Monsoon (Oct-Dec)

4.10.2 Site Specific Meteorological Data

The continuous weather monitoring station was installed near the proposed project

site at a height of 6m above the ground level and hourly measurements of the

following parameters were measured at site during the study period i.e. from 24th

September 2018 to 23rd December 2018. Wind speeds (m/s), wind direction

(Degrees), Temperature (ºC), Relative Humidity (%), Solar Radiation (Watt/m2),

Rainfall (mm) etc were monitored.

4.10.2.1 Specific ambient Temperature Profile (24th September 2018 to

23rd December 2018)

The maximum mean ambient dry bulb temperature was observed in the study

period was found to be 39°C, whereas the minimum mean ambient dry bulb

temperature of 18.5 °C was observed in the study period.





4.10.2.2 Wind direction and Wind Rose (24th September 2018 to 23rd

December 2018)

The predominant wind direction during the study period was from East and North

East. These readings are in line with IMD long term data.

4.11 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Ambient air quality monitoring was conducted in the 10 km radius of the study

area including the plant site in order to assess the concentration levels in the

ambient air. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to the standards

of ambient air quality standards during the plant operation.

The selection of the ambient air quality monitoring stations was done based on the

CPCB guidelines and Environmental Impact Assessment Manual published by

MoEF & CC. Eight (8) air quality monitoring stations were selected for a detailed

monitoring as per the CPCB guidelines. Details of the air quality monitoring

stations are presented in Table 4.10.





Table 4-10 AAQ monitoring stations Location details

SI. No Location

Distance from the project site

(Aerial Distance) in km

Latitudes & Longitudes

AAQ 1 Plant Site 0 21° 12' 15"N, 73° 34' 26"E

AAQ 2 Banglifoliya 1.69 21° 11' 37"N, 73° 35' 6"E

AAQ 3 Bardipada 2.04 21°11' 34"N, 73° 33' 32"E

AAQ 4 Moti Khervan 5.04 21° 13' 55"N, 73° 32' 6"E

AAQ 5 Songadh 4.20 21° 10' 3"N, 73° 33' 57"E

AAQ 6 Amlipada 6.00 21° 11' 22"N, 73° 31' 17"E

AAQ 7 Patharda 4.13 21° 14' 26"N, 73° 33' 47"E

AAQ 8 Bhimpura 1.44 21° 12' 50"N, 73° 35' 1"E

The following parameters were monitored according to the terms of reference and

National Ambient Air Quality Standards: Particulate Matter (PM10), Particulate

Matter (PM2.5), Sulphur dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2), Carbon monoxide

(CO), Ozone (O3), Lead (Pb), Ammonia (NH3), Benzene (C6H6), Benzo (a) pyrene

(BaP), Arsenic (As), Nickel (Ni). These parameters are analysed as per NAAQ

standards.

Figure 4-26 Map showing the air quality monitoring stations

The photograph of the sampling location is given in Figure 4.27. The collected data

of ambient air quality monitoring is shown in Table 4.11 and test reports are





attached as Annexure 15. It indicates that all values are within the limits of

National Air Quality Standard prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board

Figure 4-27 Site Photographs of AAQ Stations

AAQ 1 - Plant

AAQ 2- Banglifoliya

AAQ 3- Bardipada





AAQ 4- Moti Khervan

AAQ 5- Songadh

AAQ 6- Amlipada

AAQ 7- Patharda





AAQ 8- Bhimpura

Table 4-11 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants during the

Study Period

Code Location PM2.5

(µg/m3) PM10

(µg/m3) SO2

(µg/m3) NO2

(µg/m3) Ozone (µg/m3)

Ammonia (µg/m3)

AAQ1 Plant Site 32.8 69 15.5 27.5 27.1 15.7

AAQ2 Banglifoliya 29.6 57.8 15 25.6 27 15

AAQ3 Bardipada 27.9 58.7 14.1 24.4 25.9 15.4

AAQ4 Moti Khervan 32 62.7 14.4 25.3 28.5 15.1

AAQ5 Songadh 40.9 78.9 18 28.9 28.6 15.8

AAQ6 Amlipada 31.4 68.1 16 27.5 28.6 15.5

AAQ7 Patharda 40.7 79.4 23.1 28.1 27.8 15.2

AAQ8 Bhimpura 51.5 86.5 26 28.6 26.4 15.3

NAAQ Standards 60 100 80 80 180 400

4.11.1.1 Observations on Ambient Air Quality of the Study Area

Particulate Matter

It is the sum of all solid and liquid particles suspended in the air. It is generally

classified into PM2.5 and PM10 based on the size. The concentration of PM2.5 and

PM10 were analyzed at all the eight locations of the study area and the summary is

presented in the Table 4.11 and Table 4.12 respectively.

Table 4-12 PM2.5 Concentration in the Study Area during the study period

Station code

Location Distance from the

site

PM2.5 Concentration (µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ1 Plant Site 0 27.2 37.8 32.8 37.3

AAQ2 Banglifoliya 1.69 23.8 35.2 29.6 34.9

AAQ3 Bardipada 2.04 22.3 33.3 27.9 33.3

AAQ4 Moti Khervan 5.04 26.5 38.6 32 38.5





Station code


site

PM2.5 Concentration (µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ5 Songadh 4.20 35.1 47.2 40.9 47.2

AAQ6 Amlipada 6.00 26.9 38.6 31.4 37.7

AAQ7 Patharda 4.13 34.2 50.5 40.7 49.9

AAQ8 Bhimpura 1.44 45.2 57.3 51.5 57.2

The minimum and maximum concentration of PM2.5 was observed to be 22.3 µg/m3 at

Bardipada and 57.3 µg/m3 at Bhimpura respectively. The average concentration in the

study area ranged from 27.9 µg/m3 at Bardipada to 51.5 µg/m3 at Bhimpura. The observed

average concentrations at all the locations were found to be well within the permissible

range of 60 µg/m3 as per NAAQ standards prescribed by CPCB. The trends of PM2.5

concentration is presented in the Figure 4.28

Figure 4-28 Trends of Ambient PM2.5 Concentration in the Study Area

Table 4-13PM10 Concentration in the Study Area during the study period

Station code


site

PM10 Concentration(µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ1 Plant Site 0 60.7 76.5 69 76.4


AAQ3 Bardipada 2.04 52.2 65.6 58.7 65.2

AAQ4 Moti Khervan 5.04 54.3 71.3 62.7 71.3

AAQ5 Songadh 4.20 71.5 86.5 78.9 86.0

AAQ6 Amlipada 6.00 62.1 73.7 68.1 73.7

AAQ7 Patharda 4.13 70.3 86.6 79.4 86.1





Station code


site

PM10 Concentration(µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ8 Bhimpura 1.44 77.3 94.3 86.5 94.2

The minimum and maximum concentration of PM10 was observed to be 52.2 µg/m3

at Banglifoliya and Bardipada and 94.3 µg/m3 at the Bhimpura respectively. The

average concentration in the study area ranged from 57.8 µg/m3 to 86.5 µg/m3.

The observed average concentrations at all the locations were found to be well

within the permissible range of 100 µg/m3 as per NAAQ standards prescribed by

CPCB. The trends of PM10 concentration is presented in the Figure 4.29.

Figure 4-29Trends of Ambient PM10 Concentration in the Study Area

Sulphur Dioxide:

Average, minimum and maximum reported concentrations of SO2 in the study area

at 8 locations are presented in Table 4.14.

Table 4-14 SO2 Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period

Station Location Distance SO2 Concentration(µg/m3)





code from the site

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ1 Plant Site 0 9.5 25.6 15.5 25.6

AAQ2 Banglifoliya 1.69 8.4 22.4 15 22.3

AAQ3 Bardipada 2.04 8.2 24.2 14.1 23.3

AAQ4 Moti Khervan 5.04 8.5 24.3 14.4 23.8

AAQ5 Songadh 4.20 7.5 30.5 18 30.3

AAQ6 Amlipada 6.00 8.2 25.9 16 24.7

AAQ7 Patharda 4.13 15.2 30.2 23.1 30.2

AAQ8 Bhimpura 1.44 18.1 38.6 26 38.6

The minimum and maximum concentration of SO2 was observed to be 7.5 µg/m3 at

Songadh and 38.6 µg/m3 at Bhimpura respectively. The average values were found

to be in the range of 14.1 µg/m3 to 26 µg/m3. The observed average SO2

concentrations at all the locations were found to be well within the permissible

range of 80 µg/m3 as per NAAQ standards prescribed by CPCB. The trends of SO2

concentration is presented in the Figure 4.30.

Figure 4-30Trends of Ambient SO2 Concentration in the Study Area

Nitrogen Dioxide:

Average, minimum and maximum reported concentrations of NOx in the study area

at 8 locations are presented in Table4.15.

Table 4-15 NOx Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period

Station Location Distance NOx Concentration(µg/m3)





code from the site

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ1 Plant Site 0 16.5 40.1 27.5 38.7


AAQ3 Bardipada 2.04 17.3 38.4 24.4 38.0

AAQ4 Moti Khervan

5.04 18.6 35.8 25.3 35.6

AAQ5 Songadh 4.20 21.4 38.7 28.9 37.5

AAQ6 Amlipada 6.00 17.3 40.2 27.5 39.2

AAQ7 Patharda 4.13 18.3 40.3 28.1 38.8

AAQ8 Bhimpura 1.44 14.3 48.2 28.6 45.4

The minimum and maximum concentration of NOx was observed to be 14.3 µg/m3

at Bhimpura and 48.2 µg/m3 at Bhimpura respectively. The average NOx

concentrations in the study area were observed to be in the range of 24.4 µg/m3 at

Bardipada to 28.9 µg/m3 at Songarh. Thus, the observed average NOx

concentrations at all the locations were found to be well within the permissible

range of 80 µg/m3 as per NAAQ standards prescribed the CPCB. The trends of NOX

concentration is presented in the Figure 4.31.

Figure 4-31 Trends of Ambient NOx Concentration in the Study Area

Ammonia:

Ammonia is a compound of nitrogen and hydrogen. Average, minimum and

maximum reported concentrations of ammonia in the study area at 8 locations are

presented in Table 4.16.

Table 4-16Ammonia Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period





Station code


site

NH3 Concentration(µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ1 Plant Site 0 12.5 18.4 15.7 18.3


AAQ3 Bardipada 2.04 12.2 18.6 15.4 18.5

AAQ4 Moti Khervan 5.04 11.8 19.2 15.1 18.8

AAQ5 Songadh 4.20 12.2 18.4 15.8 18.4

AAQ6 Amlipada 6.00 12.5 18.4 15.5 18.4

AAQ7 Patharda 4.13 12.3 18.7 15.2 18.6

AAQ8 Bhimpura 1.44 12.2 18.4 15.3 18.0

The minimum and maximum concentration of ammonia was observed to be 10.2

µg/m3 at Banglifoliya and 19.2 µg/m3 at Moti Khervan. The average ammonia

concentrations in the study area were observed to be in the range of 15 µg/m3 to

15.8 µg/m3. Thus, the observed average ammonia concentrations at all the

locations were found to be well within the permissible range of 400 µg/m3 as per

NAAQ standards prescribed the CPCB. The trends of ammonia concentration are

presented in the Figure 4.32.

Figure 4-32Trends of Ambient NH3 Concentration in the Study Area

Ozone:

Ozone is a gas composed of three atoms of oxygen that occurs at earth’s upper

atmosphere and at ground level. Average, minimum and maximum reported

concentrations of ozone in the study area at 8 locations are presented in Table

4.17.





Table 4-17Ozone Concentrations in the Study Area during the study period

Station code


site

Ozone Concentration(µg/m3)

Min Max Avg 98th

percentile

AAQ1 Plant Site 0 20.4 33.2 27.1 32.9


AAQ3 Bardipada 2.04 15.3 34.5 25.9 33.9

AAQ4 Moti Khervan

5.04 21.5 40.1 28.5 37.9

AAQ5 Songadh 4.20 21.4 40.2 28.6 39.2

AAQ6 Amlipada 6.00 21.1 36.4 28.6 35.8

AAQ7 Patharda 4.13 21.2 34.5 27.8 34.5

AAQ8 Bhimpura 1.44 18.6 31.4 26.4 31.3

The minimum and maximum concentration of ozone was observed to be 15.3

µg/m3 at Bardipada and 40.2 µg/m3 at Songarh respectively. The average ozone

concentrations in the study area were observed to be in the range of 25.9 µg/m3 to

28.6 µg/m3. Thus, the observed average ozone concentrations at all the locations

were found to be well within the permissible range as per NAAQ standards

prescribed the CPCB. The trends of ozone concentration is presented in the Figure

4.33.

Figure 4-33 Trends of Ambient Ozone Concentration in the Study Area

4.12 Noise Environment

Noise levels were recorded at the Mill site and other seven locations in the study

area. The measurements were carried out using Type 1 noise level integrated sound

level meter. Monitoring was done at each location during the study period for 24





hrs on hourly basis to obtain hourly equivalent sound pressure level. A digital noise

level meter was used to record the noise levels. From these values, day time and

night time and 24-hrs Leq values were calculated. Day time is considered from

0600 hrs to 2200 hrs and night from 2200 hrs to 0600 hrs. Noise monitoring

locations in the study area are presented in Table 4.18 and Figure 4.34

Table 4-18 Noise Sampling Locations

SI.No Location Distance from the project site (Aerial

Distance) in km Latitudes & Longitudes

N1 Plant Site 0 21° 12' 15"N, 73° 34' 26"E

N2 Banglifoliya 1.69 21° 11' 37"N, 73° 35' 6"E

N3 Bardipada 2.04 21°11' 34"N, 73° 33' 32"E

N4 Moti Khervan 5.04 21° 13' 55"N, 73° 32' 6"E

N5 Songadh 4.20 21° 10' 3"N, 73° 33' 57"E

N6 Amlipada 6.00 21° 11' 22"N, 73° 31' 17"E

N7 Patharda 4.13 21° 14' 26"N, 73° 33' 47"E

N8 Bhimpura 1.44 21° 12' 50"N, 73° 35' 1"E

Figure 4-34Noise Sampling Locations in the Study Area

The measured noise levels have been compared with the standard specified in

Schedule III, Rule 3 of Environmental Protection Rules. Based on the recorded

noise levels the average noise levels for day and night at all the six locations are

presented in the Table 4.19





Table 4-19 Recorded Noise Levels

S.No Location Location

code

Leq in dB(A) CPCB limits in dB

(A), Leq

Day Night Day Night

1 Plant Site N1 55.70 47.50 75 70

2 Banglifoliya N2 53.50 42.50 55 45

3 Bardipada N3 51.70 41.34 55 45

4 Moti Khervan N4 50.15 43.10 55 45

5 Songadh N5 54.80 44.50 55 45

6 Amlipada N6 53.10 41.80 55 45

7 Patharda N7 51.30 43.10 55 45

8 Bhimpura N8 50.20 42.80 55 45

Observations: Average day time and night time noise levels at residential areas in

the study area was found to be varying from 50.15 to 55.70 dB(A) and 41.34 dB(A)

to 47.50 dB(A) respectively. At the existing plant site, the average noise level was

found to be 55.70 dB (A) for day time and 47.50 dB (A) for night time. As per

NAAQS w.r.t. noise prescribed by CPCB, the day time and night time noise levels in

a residential area shall not exceed 55 and 45 dB(A) Leq respectively whereas for

industrial area shall not exceed 75 dB (A) for day time and 70 dB (A) for night time.

The observed values are complying with the standards. The hourly noise level

monitoring data is enclosed in Annexure 16.

4.13 Water Environment

Water resources constitute mainly surface and groundwater with rainfall being the

major source. The major River located near the project is River Tapi to the North of

project site. Ukai dam is located to the North of project site.

4.13.1 Surface Water Resources in the Study Area

The Tapi is the second largest westward draining river of the Peninsula.The Tapi

Basin is situated in the northern part of the Deccan Plateau. The Tapi is the major

river which passes through the central parts of the district and flows towards the

west. The river is perennial in nature. It originates in Madhya Pradesh near Betul

and has about 62225 sq. Km. of catchment area. Other prominent rivers draining

the district are Kim, Ver, Mindola, Jhankhari and Purna. The Ver flows from north-

east to south-west and flows parallel to Tapi and then it flows towards west. All

other rivers are situated toward south of Tapi and flow towards west, parallel to

Tapi.





4.13.2 Surface water quality

Surface Water Quality in the Study Area: Water quality parameters of surface

water resources within the study area have been considered for assessing the water

environment. To assess the water quality of the study area, the water samples were

collected at Upstream and downstream of the Tapi River which is the major source

of water for the project.

The surface water test report is given in Annexure 17. The location details of the

sampling are given below in Figure 4.35.

Figure 4-35 Photograph showing the location of Surface Water Sampling

Table 4-20Surface Water Sampling Locations

Code Location Latitude & Longitude

SW1 Upstream of Tapi River 21° 15' 22"N, 73° 35' 6"E

SW2 Downstream of Tapi

River 21° 15' 50"N, 73° 32' 51"E

Figure 4-36Location of Surface Water Sampling during the Study Period





Table 4-21Analysis Results of Surface Water Samples

S. No. Parameter Unit SW1

(Upstream) SW2

(Downstream)

Permissible Range as per Drinking Water Standards (IS 10500:2012)

1 pH (at 25 0C) -- 8.05 8.04 6.5 to 8.5

2 Colour Hazen *BDL *BDL 15

3 Turbidity NTU 18.00 26.00 5

4 Odour -- Agreeable Agreeable

5 Total Hardness as CaCO3

mg/l 196.00 190.00

600

6 Calcium as Ca mg/l 46.50 49.40 200

7 Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 190.50 193.00 -

8 Chloride as Cl mg/l 72.10 70.80 1000

9 Residual free Chlorine mg/l *BDL *BDL 1

10 Cyanide as CN mg/l *BDL *BDL -

11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 19.44 46.22 100

12 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 490.00 498.00 2000

13 Total Suspended solids

mg/l 68.00 70.00 -

14 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 6.0 6.1 -

15 Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 15.45 16.20 400

16 Fluoride as F mg/l 0.65 0.60 1.5

17 BOD mg/l <5.00 <5.00 -

18 COD mg/l 20 26 -

19 Conductivity µS/cm 820 830 -

20 Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 3.60 3.80 45

21 Sodium as Na mg/l 68.2 61.5 -

22 Potassium as K mg/l 21.20 24.1 -





S. No. Parameter Unit SW1

(Upstream) SW2

(Downstream)

Permissible Range as per Drinking Water Standards (IS 10500:2012)

23 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.30 0.37 0.3

24 Aluminium as Al mg/l *BDL *BDL 0.2

25 Boron mg/l 0.38 0.42 1

26 Chromium as Cr mg/l *BDL *BDL 0.05

27 Phenolic Compounds mg/l *BDL *BDL 0.002

28 Mineral Oil mg/l *BDL *BDL 0.5

29 Anionic Detergents mg/l *BDL *BDL -

30 Zinc as Zn mg/l 1.80 1.82 15

31 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.60 0.62 1.5

32 Manganese as Mn mg/l *BDL *BDL 0.3

33 Cadmium as Cd mg/l *BDL *BDL 0.003

34 Total Coliform MPN/100

ml 220 220 -

35 #Fecal Coliform MPN/10

0ml 170 170

-

BDL-Below Detectable Limit

Observations: As per the analysis results as shown in the Table 4.21, it can be

observed that pH of Tapi River, Upstream and downstream water is in the range of

8.04 mg/l to 8.05 mg/l which is moderately alkaline. The TDS levels in the surface

water of upstream and downstream were found to be 490 mg/l and 498 mg/l

respectively. The Total Hardness of the surface water of upstream and downstream

was found to be 196mg/l and 190mg/l respectively. The Fluoride concentration of

Upstream and downstream was found to 0.65mg/l and 0.60mg/l respectively. The

microbiological content as total coliform of upstream and downstream was found to

be 220 MPN/100 ml. Heavy metal concentrations are well within the permissible

limits as per drinking water standards. Hence all the values observed from the

analysis of river water were found to be within the permissible limits as per

drinking water, IS: 10500 –2012 “Specification for drinking Water”.

4.13.3 Ground water resources

Deccan Traps form the aquifers in north-eastern, eastern and south eastern parts

of the district comprising Mangrol, Mandvi, and Mahuva, talukas. The ground

water occurs in unconfined to semi-confined conditions. The occurrence and

movement of ground water is governed by the thickness and extent of weathered

zone and the presence of fractures and joints. At places, dykes act as ground water





barriers and restrict the flow of ground water. On the other hand, at places, the

dykes themselves form good aquifers owing to deeper levels of weathering in them.

Depths of dug wells in Deccan traps ranges from less than 2m to 25m with

maximum number of wells about 80%, being 5 to 15m deep. The depths to water

levels in the dug wells range from 1 to 20m. However, in 90% of the wells, the water

levels are less than 10 m bgl. Yields of the dug wells are low to moderate in central

parts whereas they are low to very low on the hill slopes. The dug wells generally

sustain pumping for 4 to 5 hours with yields of 50 to 150 m3/day. Recuperation of

water levels is generally slow.

The hydrogeological frame work of the area is essentially governed by geological

setting, distribution of rainfall and facilities of circulation and movement of water

through inter connected primary and secondary porosity of the geological units

forming the aquifers. The depth to water level in the district ranges between 2m to

about 20m during May 2012. Nearly 35 % area of the district is covered by the

water level of 2m to 5m bgl. Nearly 60 % of the area of the district has the water

levels between 5m to 10m bgl. The remaining area of the district (isolated patches)

i.e. 5% has the water level ranging between 10m to 20m bgl.

There are two isolated pockets which show the water level of less than 2m (7 %). In

the major part of the district (47%) the water level ranges between 2 m and 5 m bgl.

Also the water level ranges between 5 m and 10 m bgl in the area is 41%. There is

one another patch which shows the water level ranges from 10 m to 20 m(5%). The

major aquifers in the district are formed by alluvium and Deccan trap basalt with

Tertiary formations occupying a small patch. The alluvium occurs in the form of

channel fill deposits (124 Sq Km) and flood plain deposits (298 Sq. Km) in north

eastern part of the district and along the streams whereas in eastern parts

weathered and fractured basalt form aquifers. Based on the geological formation

the area can be divided broadly into two hydrogeological units: 1. Fissure

Formations 2. Porous Formation.

Ground water level data for a monitoring well collected from CGWB located in

Bhurvel (Ukai), Songadh Block, Tapi District observation well indicates that the

deepest water level is 10.9 m bgl during May 2015 and shallowest water level is 1.1





m bgl during November 2011. The season wise ground water level data collected

for Bhurvel (Ukai), monitoring well is given in below.

Figure 4-37 Bhurvel Observation well (CGWB) Ground Water Level (BGL)

The occurrence of ground water in the study area (10 km radius) has been studied

in detail by collecting the water level from 5 well (CGWB Observation wells). The

depth of the wells ranges from 20 m to 90 m. The yield of the wells varies between

100 to 220 liters / minutes. Based on the data collected from the CGWB, Ground

water level contours have been constructed for pre and post monsoon periods.

Pre-monsoon Ground water level:

The ground water level zone of pre-monsoon clearly depicts that the water level

varies between 3.9 to 9.5 m. The ground water level zone map of pre-monsoon





shows that the water level ranging between 3-5 m occupies majority of the area.

The project site is falls partly in 3-5 and part in 5-7 m range zone during pre-

monsoon period. The ground water level zone map of pre-monsoon is presented in

Figure 4.38.

Figure 4-38 Ground water level zone Pre-Monsoon

Post monsoon Ground water level:

The ground water level zone of post monsoon clearly depicts that the water level

varies between 3.3 to 7.1 m. The ground water level zone map of post monsoon

shows that the water level ranging between 3-5 m occupies majority of the area.

The project site is falls fully in 3-5 m range. The 3-5 m ground water level zone

increased in the post monsoon period due the rainfall recharge. It clearly indicates

the natural recharge and the recharge from the other sources such as river

increased the ground water level in the study area. The ground water level zone

map of Post monsoon is presented in Figure 4.39





Figure 4-39 Ground Water level zone Post-Monsoon

4.13.4 Movement of Ground Water

The movement of ground water is controlled by the hydraulic conductivity of the

aquifer and hydraulic gradient. In study area the hydraulic conductivity is mainly

based on the primary and secondary porosity. The homogeneity of the weathered

zone plays a vital role in the movement of the ground water. In the study area the

formations is heterogeneous in nature. Based on the water level data (Pre and Post

monsoon) the ground water table has been constructed for the Pre and Post

monsoon periods.

The ground water table contour depicts that the flow is in the east both the

seasons. The hydraulic gradient in the project site is moderate to high and has

been observed as 5.6 m/Km in pre monsoon and 4.8 m/Km in post monsoon.

Ground water mound is noticed in the in the south western side of the study area

at Songadh which indicates the divergent flow of ground water. High hydraulic

gradient is noticed in the above area. From the project site the ground water flows

towards North east. The ground water table constructed for the study area is

presented in Figure 4.39 and 4.40.





Figure 4-40 Ground Water Table Pre-Monsoon

Figure 4-41 Ground Water Table Post-Monsoon





4.13.5 Ground Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of ground water resources within the study area

have been considered for assessing the water environment. To assess the ground

water quality of the study area, eight (8) ground water sampling locations were

selected. These samples were collected as grab samples and were analyzed for

various parameters. About 33 water quality parameters were analyzed. The water

sampling locations are listed below in Table 4.22 and the photographs of

groundwater sampling is presented in the Figure 4.42 and Map of the Study Area

showing the locations of the sampling locations are presented in the Figure 4.43.

Table 4.23 gives the results of ground water analysis for the samples collected

from various locations in the Study Area

Table 4-22 Ground Water Sampling Location Details

Location Code

Location Co -ordinates

GW 1 Irrigated Area 21° 12' 15"N 73° 33' 8"E

GW 2 Banglifoliya 21° 11' 37"N 73° 35' 6"E

GW 3 Bardipada 21° 11' 35"N 73° 33' 27"E

GW 4 Moti Khervan 21° 12' 55"N 73° 31' 51"E

GW 5 Songarh 21°11' 16"N 73° 34' 15"E

GW 6 Achhalva 21°10' 34"N 73° 30' 39"E

GW 7 Patharda 21° 14' 25"N 73° 33' 44"E

GW 8 Bhimpura 21° 12' 51"N 73° 34' 58"E

Figure 4-42Photographs of Groundwater Sampling





Irrigated Area Moti Khevan

Songadh Achhalva

Patharda Bhimpura

GW-1 (Irrigated area) near the plant site represents the sampling location where

treated wastewater is utilized for land irrigation.

Figure 4-43Ground Water Quality Monitoring Sampling Locations in the Study Area





Table 4-23Analyzed Ground Water Quality for Various parameters in the Study Area

SI.No Parameter Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7 GW 8

IS 10500:2012

Standard (Permissible)

1. pH (at 25 0C) -- 7.98 7.20 7.89 8.21 7.79 8.01 7.58 7.87 6.5 to 8.5

2. Colour Hazen *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 15

3. Turbidity NTU *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 5

4. Odour -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable -

5. Taste -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable -

6. Total Hardness as CaCO3

mg/l 253.31 278.35 315.64 289.36 315.32 315.22

278.32 335.01 600

7. Calcium as Ca mg/l 60.10 66.50 61.90 71.69 61.97 68.97 64.21 70.20 200

8. Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 201.23 248.00 271.70 305.40 320.00 316.35 302.00 298.21 600

9. Chloride as Cl mg/l 95.23 58.87 52.29 105.0 116.48 88.51 88.00 70.20 1000

10. Cyanide as CN mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL -

11. Magnesium as Mg mg/l 25.11 27.32 39.17 26.84 35.05 34.78 28.70 33.52 100

12. Total Dissolved Solids

mg/l 378.00 425.00 351.21 605.00 670.00 515.00

548.00 410.00 2000

13. Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 35.00 22.56 16.68 59.00 55.64 38.49 40.20 47.32 400

14. Fluoride as F mg/l 0.35 0.58 0.35 0.45 0.37 0.54 0.44 0.36 1.5

15. Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 8.39 9.10 6.12 10.36 14.65 22.36 7.50 19.64 45

16. Iron as Fe mg/l 0.18 0.23 0.18 0.35 0.24 0.25 0.24 0.24 0.3

17. Aluminium as Al mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.2

18. Boron mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 1

19. Total Chromium as Cr

mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.05

20. Conductivity µS/cm 638 686 585 1010 1116 858 913 690 -

21. Phenolic Compounds

mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.002

22. Mineral Oil mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.5





23. Anionic Detergents as MBAS

mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL -

24. Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.65 0.56 0.28 0.42 0.88 0.58 0.46 0.65 15

25. Copper as Cu mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.26 *BDL *BDL *BDL 1.5

26. Manganese as Mn mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.3

27. Cadmium as Cd mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.003

28. Lead as Pb mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.01

29. Selenium as Se mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.01

30. Arsenic as As mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.05

31. Mercury as Hg mg/l *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL *BDL 0.001

32. Total Coliform MPN/100ml <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 -

33. E. Coli MPN/100ml Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent -





Observations: The analysis results of ground water samples indicate that the

average pH ranged in between 7.2 to 8.2 which are within the permissible range of

6.5 to 8.5 as per the drinking water standards stipulated by CPCB. TDS ranged

from 351.21 mg/l to 670 mg/l. Total hardness was found to be in the range of

253.31 mg/l to 335 mg/l. The heavy metal concentration was found to be Below

Detectable Limit and fluoride concentrations were observed to be in the ranges of

0.35 mg/l to 0.58 mg/l. Chloride concentration was found in the range of 52.29

mg/l to 116.48 mg/l. Iron content was found to be in the range of 0.18 mg/l to

0.35 mg/l. The analysis results were compared with the standards for drinking

water as per IS: 10500 –2012 “Specification for drinking Water”, all the above

stated values are well within the standard stipulated norms and the analysis report

is enclosed as Annexure 17.

4.14 Ecological Environment

Ecology provides information about the benefits of ecosystems and how we can use

Earth's resources in ways that leave the environment healthy for future

generations. Ecological evaluation aims at developing and applying methodologies

to assess the relevance of an area for nature conservation. As such, it is to support

the assessment of the impact of a proposed development by providing guidance on

how to describe the ecological features within the area affected, how to value them,

and how to predict the value losses caused by the development.

However, limited efforts have been made in the last decade to improve the

frameworks for ecological evaluation and to adapt them specifically to the evolving

procedure of EIA. As a result, the assessment of the ecological component within

EISs (Environment Impact Statements) tends to be flawed, and to provide

conclusions poorly supported by evidences and by clear rationales.

The weakness of the analysis of ecological impacts, such as the loss and the

fragmentation of natural ecosystems, limits the influence of these issues on the

decision-making process. Ecological consequences are bound to play a minor role

in the authorization of a development because their relevance is not sufficiently

stressed and justified in the EIS. This is particularly evident for developments

affecting urban or man dominated landscapes, i.e., areas usually devoid of features

with a striking ecological significance. The lack of a framework to support a sound





ecological evaluation causes such areas to be simply overlooked, opening the way

to uncontrolled impacting activities.

The challenge for ecological research is to improve the guidance provided to impact

analyses so as to encourage good practice within EISs, and to eventually

strengthen the consideration of ecological issues in the decision-making

concerning new projects. To this end, the application of ecological evaluation to EIA

has been chosen as the subject of this research. The evaluation of the ecological

significance of an area can be undertaken from different perspectives, and

consequently with different objectives. One of such perspectives focuses on the

conservation of the biological diversity, or biodiversity. This has recently emerged

as a key environmental issue to be accounted for in land-use planning:

“Biodiversity is now a major driving force behind efforts to reform land

management and development practices worldwide and to establish a more

harmonious relationship between people and nature”. Projects represent artificial

elements that cut through the landscape and interfere with the natural habitat

conditions. This in turn influences the abundance and distribution of plant and

animal species, i.e., the biodiversity of the areas impacted.

4.14.1 Necessity of Ecology Management Plan

Monitoring the influence of anthropogenic activities on flagship species is an

important part of conserving biodiversity, because the information gained is crucial

for the development and adaptation of conservation management plans. Ecological

monitoring provides feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project.

Monitoring results help judge the success of mitigation measures in protecting the

environment. They are also used to ensure compliance with environmental

standards, and to facilitate any needed project design or operational changes.

Regulatory bodies worldwide are increasingly recognizing the fact that human

activities are causing environmental and ecological damage. To effectively deal with

this environmental crisis, it is important to understand its dimensions and

dynamics. What specifically are the damages, how are they changing over time,

and the best means of prevention or mitigation. To develop precise ecology

management plan, longer-term programs of monitoring and research must be

designed and implemented. Such programs are capable of detecting environmental





and ecological change over large areas, and of developing an understanding of the

causes and consequences of those changes.

4.14.2 Objectives of Ecological Monitoring

To evaluate the prevailing ecological status of the habitats adjacent to the

existing mill

To evaluate positive impacts of greenbelt developed by JKPL

To assess the impact of proposed expansion on flora, avifauna and

mammals

To ascertain the migratory routes of fauna, presence of breeding grounds

and sensitive habitats in the study area, if any;

To recommend suitable environment management plan to minimize any

adverse impact on adjacent area due to the proposed developments.

To understand the ecology of the water bodies;

To assess the presence of protected areas in the study area;

Impact prediction based on primary and secondary data sources to

formulate mitigation measures.

4.14.3 General Ecology and types of Forests and Flora

Tapi district has dry moist deciduous forest. It includes a number of habitats.

Apart from, there is dense forest border of Dangs, Narmda District of Gujarat state

and Nandurbar District of Maharashtra state; Grasslands; Wetlands; Hills which

covered most of forest areas; Rivers like Tapi, Midoda, Purna and Ambika;

Water bodies likes Ukai Dam on Tapi river and Doswada Dam on Midoda river;

Farms which also includes cultivated plants and aquatic plants specimens; and

also have rocky areas.

Phyto-geographically the region is enriched with a diverse flora with a large

degree of endemism and harbours a variety of species. Plants show excessive

growth in many forest areas like Serula forest, Hindla, Malangdev, Vadirupgadh

of Songadh taluka and Bardipada, Zakhari of Vyara taluka, where soil fertility and

higher water table perhaps influence the growth of vegetation. Sandip et al., (2015)

reported in their flowering plant list in the Tapi district that a total of 698 species





and 5 varieties belonging to 592 genera and 119 families of flowering plants

have been recorded for the district. Dicots represented by 565 species belong to

379 genera and 95 families while Monocots represented by 138 species belongs to

102 genera and 24 families. Out of 119 families, 55 are represented by single

genus each and 43 are represented by single species each. Fabaceae and

Asteraceae are largest families among the dicots while Poaceae and Cyperaceae are

largest families among the monocots which are poorly represented. A total of 703

species of flowering plants, 318 species are herbs, 176 species are trees, 125

species are shrubs and 84 species are climbers.

According to the revised classification of forest types, by Champion and Seth

(1968), the study area has four types of forests. The major parts of the forests,

lying towards the north-east and south-east region fall under the type,

3B/C1c Slightly Moist Teak Forests and 5A/Clb Dry Teak Forests. These

types are not defined by distinct topographical features. They may occur in one

and the same locality within a short distance. The former is generally

confined to valleys and plains where soil and sub-soil moisture are favorable.

The latter type is mostly found on the poor soils of hills and area is

subjected to biotic interferences. The information about these forest types is

mentioned as under:

3B/Clc - Slightly Moist Teak Forests - This is a mixed deciduous forest with teak

usually forming about 30 per cent of the forest. Under storey of bamboo

(Dendrocalamus strictus) is a characteristic feature of the forest. Occurrence of

woody climbers is a common feature. The forest is distinguishable into different

canopies. 5A/Cib - Dry Teak Forests - This is a mixed dry deciduous forest

with teak usually forming the major proportion of the area. These forests are

found on dry and shallow soil, undulating ground and plateaus of the hills.

Sporadic growth of marvel bamboo (Dendrocalamus strictus) is found in a few

pockets. The characteristic species are teak and its common associate.





Figure 4-44 Forest Blocks in the Study Area

Forest in the study area

4.14.4 Survey Methodology

4.14.4.1 Flora Survey

All accessible sites will be identified within the study area of 10km such that the

ecosystems and land-use types are represented accordingly. The prediction of

impacts on flora and fauna depends on understanding of the proposed project

activities, its magnitude/extent, scale and ecological conditions in the surrounding

area. Collection of rapid baseline information on flora and fauna is therefore a

prerequisite for assessment of impacts of the development activities. All the

accessible and identified sites will be divided into four zones with respect to their

distance from the project site: Zone I - sites which fall in the project site i.e. core

zone, Zone II mention the boundary of core zone to 5KM and Zone III indicate 5 KM

to 10KM. All the three Zones of lands would be mapped for their biological

diversity.

Diversity assessment for different plant species and the analysis of Rare –Endemic

– Endangered and Threatened flora was carried out. At each site, a study of floral

diversity was carried out in the following manner. A quadrant of approximately 20

m x 20 m was marked. The species of trees, shrubs and large climbers, as well as

the number of individuals of each species, falling within this area were noted. A

quadrant of approximately 5 m x 5 m was marked within this larger quadrate. The





species of herbs, both grasses and forbs, and the number of individuals of each

species, falling within this area were noted. Smaller quadrate of 1m x 1 m for the

more prolifically-growing larger herbs, and 10 cm x 10 cm, for prolifically-growing

minute herbs, were employed when required. During the survey, a random

observation based on the topo map and also Google map is made for village side,

road side, hillocks (RFs) and near the agriculture. The sampling points are selected

to gather maximum primary information. General Interviews were made with the

local people about the native animals and medicinal plants that are used

frequently. A thorough review is made about each sampling point and spent about

10 to 20 minutes at each sampling point and documented the flora and fauna in

the prescribed formats. Photographs were taken during the field visit covers

vegetation structure and given in Figure 4.45.

Figure 4-45 Vegetation Structure

Flora and Fauna Observation at Core Zone and Buffer Zone

4.14.4.2 Pre-Site Work Plan

Details of the project was collected from the EIA coordinator before starting

the field trip and discussed the probable impact on the local flora and fauna

though the present activity and the extension of the project. Secondary data

collected from published papers (see references) on Flora and fauna components of

the study area. A thorough revision on ecological and biodiversity aspects of the

region was also gathered through web sites. Published working plan data

containing the list of flora and fauna, area specific details, related to road, rail





network, drainage pattern, contour, forest type, forest cover, land use and

land cover of the proposed capacity of expansion unit area are collected

Equipment / Instruments deployed:

Quadrates/Measuring Tape

Measuring tapes

Maps

GPS

Camera

Binocular and

Plankton net

A detailed study in has been carried out to cross check the list taken from

secondary source and local villagers. In case of vertebrate species, no sampling

could be done. Depending on as and when sighted, the species will be recorded if

found within the delimited project and buffer areas, the animal species are listed

on secondary data and circumstances evidence besides direct observations. These

techniques are accepted in EIA studies as per the EIA Notification of 2006.

Observations made on direct and indirect evidences for mammalian, avifauna and

reptilian fauna within the study area. Analyses of Scheduled species identify

Habitat/microhabitat diversity in the project site and surrounding areas within

10Km range from the site. Flora and fauna studies were carried out during 26th –

29th September 2018 to assess the list of terrestrial plant and animal species that

occur in the core zone and the buffer zone up to 10 km distance from the core zone

boundary. The biodiversity of the survey area was then evaluated in terms of

Species richness of the woody flora and the avifauna, percentage frequency,

abundance and density of each floral species, and Evenness.

The ecological survey locations were given in Figure 4.46. Terrestrial ecological

survey details in Latitude, Longitude provided in the Table 4.24.





Figure 4-46 Google Map Showing Ecology Survey Locations

Table4-24 Survey Locations of Terrestrial Ecology

Location Latitude Longitude

Zone – I : Core zone project area

1 21°12'34.22"N 73°34'30.08"E

2 21°12'25.72"N 73°34'21.03"E

3 21°12'22.53"N 73°34'18.48"E

4 21°12'15.65"N 73°34'28.05"E

5 21°12'29.37"N 73°34'30.77"E

6 21°12'39.53"N 73°34'31.81"E

7 21°12'35.51"N 73°34'16.82"E

8 21°12'45.69"N 73°34'35.59"E

Zone – II : Project area boundary to 5 km radius

9 21°13'26.93"N 73°33'51.09"E

10 21°13'43.18"N 73°34'53.20"E

11 21°13'23.77"N 73°35'14.14"E

12 21°13'17.31"N 73°35'28.10"E

13 21°12'35.35"N 73°35'5.17"E

14 21°11'58.59"N 73°35'8.03"E

15 21°11'38.14"N 73°34'10.94"E

16 21°12'56.94"N 73°33'32.60"E





Location Latitude Longitude

17 21°14'5.21"N 73°34'44.19"E

18 21°14'52.80"N 73°34'54.55"E

19 21°14'33.15"N 73°33'40.39"E

20 21°13'48.67"N 73°33'12.88"E

21 21°12'52.67"N 73°32'32.71"E

22 21°11'38.37"N 73°32'19.36"E

23 21° 9'59.83"N 73°34'8.76"E

24 21°11'23.84"N 73°35'40.14"E

Zone – III : Boundary of 5km to 10 km radius

25 21°16'15.94"N 73°34'4.83"E

26 21°15'6.51"N 73°32'23.77"E

27 21°14'27.86"N 73°31'5.25"E

28 21°13'3.71"N 73°30'40.29"E

29 21°11'22.13"N 73°31'38.10"E

30 21°10'24.42"N 73°32'23.14"E

31 21° 9'45.54"N 73°36'16.13"E

32 21°10'26.87"N 73°36'59.94"E

33 21°16'43.57"N 73°31'46.14"E

34 21°15'45.00"N 73°31'12.56"E

35 21°15'14.47"N 73°30'30.90"E

36 21°13'38.76"N 73°29'36.29"E

37 21°12'7.39"N 73°29'51.44"E

38 21° 8'11.69"N 73°32'3.15"E

39 21° 8'36.47"N 73°37'1.39"E

40 21° 9'49.78"N 73°38'5.41"E

4.14.5 Quantitative Analysis of Vegetation

Plot-based random quadrate sampling method was adopted to generate the

Phytosociological data viz., density, frequency, abundance and important value

index (IVI). Quadrates of 20 m x 20 m size were laid out for the enumeration of the

tree species, quadrates of 5 m x 5 m for shrubs and saplings and quadrates of 1 m

x 1 m for herbs and seedlings.

Diameter at breast height (DBH) of 130 cm was consistently used during the

present study. In no case, the thicker part near branching position was

considered. Instead diameter of the tree having a branch at about 130 cm was

measured either below 30 cm from the branch or in case of all the stems above 30

cm from the branch and averaged.





All individuals above 10 cm of girth at breast height (GBH) were considered as trees

and all individuals below 10 cm of GBH or 2 m of height as shrubs and saplings. In

each unit, presence or absence of the species, number of individuals of each

species, GBH (only for tree species) to estimate basal area of the tree species were

recorded.

Other ecological parameters viz., abundance, density, frequency, IVI, Shannon-

Wiener diversity index, Simpson’s dominance index, Abundance/Frequency (A/F)

ratio for distribution pattern of species and Similarity Index were derived from the

above basic data.

Frequency, density, abundance and basal area were calculated following Misra

(1968).

Number of sampling units in which a species occurs

Frequency: ____________________________________________________________________________X 100

Total number of sampling units studied

The frequency of individual species is the number of timesthe species occurs in the

sampling quadrant.

Total number of individuals in all sampling units

Density:____________________________________________________________

Total number of sampling units studied

Density is the measure of dense in the distribution of an individual species within

a given area.

Total number of individuals in all sampling units

Abundance: ______________________________________________________________

Total number of sampling units of occurrence





Total basal area or crown

Dominance = ----------------------------------- X 100

Total area sampled

It reflects the species basal area covered by a species within the sampling area.

4.14.5.1 Relative Density and Dominance

The relative density and dominance values of different species found in the study

are shows that the dominant plants of various sites have a high percentage value of

density and dominance. These values are incorporated in calculating the

Importance value Index.

Number of individuals of a species

Relative density: ___________________________________________________________ X 100

Total number of individuals of all species

Number of occurrences of a species

Relative frequency: ______ X 100

Total number of occurrences of all species

Total basal area of individual species

Relative basal area: ________________________________________________________ X 100

Total basal areas of all species

Plot-based random quadrate sampling method was adopted to generate the

Phytosociological data viz., density, frequency, abundance and important value

index (IVI). Other ecological parameters viz., abundance, density, frequency, IVI,

Shannon-Wiener diversity index, Simpson’s dominance index,

Abundance/Frequency (A/F) ratio for distribution pattern of species and Similarity





Index were derived from the above basic data. These indices are also been

calculated with statistical tools such as PAST and SPSS etc.

Aquatic environment: The phytoplankton and zooplankton reflect the productivity

of a water column at the primary and secondary levels, respectively.

Plankton: The plankton samples were collected from upstream and downstream of

Tapi River with a hand net (having 0.10 m2 mouth areas and 300 µm mesh size).

All the samples were preserved in 5% neutralized formaldehyde solution. Different

plankton taxa were sorted, identified and enumerated under stereoscopic zoom

binocular microscope. The number were calculated for the whole samples and

given for 100m3 of water.

Figure 4-47Plankton sampling at upstream and downstream of Tapi river

4.14.6 Results

4.14.6.1 Aquatic Ecology

Distribution, percentage and species composition of Zooplankton

Aquatic environment studies were carried out in two location one in the upstream

and second one in the downstream of the Tapi River the observation and

identification of Phytoplankton and Zooplankton during present study revealed

that in the Phytoplankton consists of 4 different groups Chlorophyceae,

Cyanophyceae, Bacillariophyceae and Dinophyceae. There were 3 systematic





positions of zooplankton were recorded in the River viz, Rotifera, Copepoda and

Larval forms.

Phytoplankton

Pediastrum sp. Pediastrum sp. Pediastrum sp.

Microcystis Fragilaria sp. Oocystis sp.

Zooplankton

Rotifers Rotifers Rotifers

Copepoda Nauplius of Copepoda Veliger larva





4.14.6.2 Flora and Fauna

The published literature studies reports are used for finalize the list of core and

buffer zone species. Secondary data compared with the existing sighted species in

the study areas. The flora and fauna lists also cross checked with the local

communities. An effort has been made to identify the impacts of the proposed

expansion of paper mill at different stages. Floral and faunal resources used by

local communities such as timber, medicinal etc are also collected. The mitigation

measures were suggested and conservation of Scheduled species (if any) has been

given.

4.14.6.3 General Characteristics of floral diversity

The flora of study area was represented by Alstonina scholaris, Tectona grandis,

Tectona casappa, Pithacelobiam dulce, Azadirachta indica, Cocus nucifera, Ficus

sp. Albizia lebeckk, Tamarindus indica, Gmnelina arborea, Buchnania lanzan,

Madhuca indica, Caria arborea, Terminalia chebula, Diospyros melanoxylon over

large area. There were number of agriculture fields around project site. In general,

flora in North East part of study area was observed to be rich due to Tapi River.

Overall 60 trees and 18 shrub species were recorded during present survey. The

flora of study area was represented by agriculture crops large area. Major area in

the vicinity of project site was Eucalyptus farms. However, thick greenbelt in

housing colony maintain by JKPML mill exhibited diverse flora.

JKPL has developed large number of acres of thick greenbelt inside and around

existing paper mill. Dominant species planted are Eucalyptus, Casuarina

equisetifolia, Peltophorum pterocarpum, Azadiracta indica, Delonix regia,

Mangifera indica, Cocos nucifera, Ficus spp, Polyalthia longifolia, Palms and

Bougainvilla.

Saplings are raised using cultivation methods like cuttings and cloning methods.

Saplings raised in JKPL nursery have been supplied all over Gujarat. Saplings are

provided to individual farmers as well as to forest dept.





4.14.7 Project site Greenbelt

The proposed project site was full of dense vegetation due to the plantation of

Eucalyptus. JKPL Unit CPM have developed thick plantation area over 120 acres in

the existing mill area. JKPML planted Eucalyptus, Casuarina, Subabul, Leucaena

leucocephala, Pongamia, Tectona grandis and Terminalia, Sizidium cumini and

Bamboosa. Besides the existing green cover, JKPL is also planning to develop 10

acres of greenbelt Post MEP

Core Zone I: Within the core area, 8 Locations were selected to quantify the data

of flora. Floral density at core zone of project site was observed to be very low due

to greenbelt development program full of plantations, Eucalyptus sp. However, the

diversity was Low there were 17 species were recorded in the core. Azadirachta

indica, Cadamba lamarckiana, Delonix regia, Casuarina equisetifolia, Ployalthia

longifolia, Eucalyptus leptophylla, Leucana leucophila, Mangifera indica, Plumaria

alba, were observed commonly Tectona grandis wheras Moringa oleifera, Plumaria

alba, Roystonia regia, Syzygium cumini, Terminalia catappa, Thevatia nerifolia and

Cordia Sebesten were observed with less frequency. However, natural species also

occur gregariously. Shannon index value 2.959 proved that diversity is moderate.

This thick green cover has provided suitable nesting and roosting sites for variety

of bird species. Dominant avifauna observed was Myna, House sparrow, Common

crow, Greater Coucal, Baya weavers, lapwings, Babblers and Bulbuls.

Figure 4-48Plantations Green cover inside Existing Mill and their clonal plant

production center (Nursery area)





Table 4-25 Density, abundance and frequency of occurrence of flora in the zone I

Sl No Scientific Name Family Frequency Abundance Density





1 Laucana leucocephala Fabaceae

16.67 1.000 25.0

2 Grevillea robusta Proteaceae

20.83 1.400 35.0

3 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae

4.17 2.000 50.0

4 Guazuma tomentosa Malvaceae

12.50 0.667 16.7

5 Ficus religiosa Moraceae

29.17 1.000 25.0

6 Polyalthia longifolia Annonaceae

25.00 1.000 25.0

7 Terminalia bellerica Combretaceae 16.67 1.750 43.8

8 Tectona grandis Lamiaceae 37.50 0.889 22.2

9 Cadamba lamarkiana Rubiaceae

8.33 1.000 25.0

10 Samanya saman Fabaceae

29.17 1.143 28.6

11

Casuarina equisetifoliuma

Casuarinaceae 16.67 3.750 93.8

12 Cocus nucifera Arecaceae

12.50 0.667 16.7

13 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae

29.17 1.143 28.6

14 Pithecellobium dulce Fabaceae

8.33 1.500 37.5

15 Spathodia paniculata Bignoniaceae 41.67 2.900 72.5

16 Eucalyptus sp. Myrtaceae 16.67 1.250 31.3

17 Acacia auriculiformis Euphorbiaceae

25.00 1.833 45.8

18 Plumaria acutifolia Apocyanaceae

12.50 1.000 25.0

19

Peltophorum pterocarpum

Fabaceae 8.33 1.500 37.5

20 Cassia siamia Caesalpinaceae

20.83 0.800 20.0

21 Ficus hispeda Moraceae

37.50 1.444 36.1

22 Moringa oleifera Moringaceae

16.67 1.000 25.0

23 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae

12.50 1.333 33.3

Flora in Zone II – up to 5 km from Project Site

Zone II mainly comprised of Eucalyptus farms, Tapi river and villages agriculture

fields. Roadside flora in villages was dominated by Aam (Mangifera indica),

Azadiracta indica, Shaja (Terminalia tomentosa), Dhabra (Anogeissu satifolia),

Haldu (Adina cordifolia), Bija (Pterocarpus marsupium) Aam (Mangifera indica),

Amala (Embilca officinalis), Kendu (Diospyros melanoxylon), Terminalia catappa,

Pongamia pinnata, Tamarindus indica, Ficus spp etc.

Table 4-26 Density, abundance and frequency of occurrence of flora in the zone II






1 Guazuma tomentosa

Malvaceae 12.50 1.667 41.7

2 Ficus religiosa Moraceae 50.00 1.250 31.3

3 Polyalthia longifolia

Annonaceae 45.83 1.182 29.5

4 Terminalia bellerica

Combretaceae 16.67 1.750 43.8


6 Cadamba lamarkiana

Rubiaceae 20.83 2.800 70.0

7 Samanya saman

Fabaceae

33.33 1.125 28.1

8 Casuarina equisetifoliuma


9 Cocus nucifera Arecaceae 54.17 1.385 34.6

10 Ficus benghalensis

Moraceae 45.83 1.727 43.2

11 Pithecellobium dulce

Fabaceae 50.00 1.583 39.6

12 Spathodia paniculata

Bignoniaceae 12.50 2.333 58.3


14 Acacia auriculiformis

Euphorbiaceae 45.83 1.273 31.8

15 Plumaria acutifolia

Apocyanaceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

16 Peltophorum pterocarpum

Fabaceae 29.17 1.143 28.6

17 Cassia siamia Caesalpinaceae 33.33 1.375 34.4

18 Ficus hispeda Moraceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

19 Moringa oleifera Moringaceae 29.17 1.143 28.6

20 Azadirachta indica

Meliaceae 62.50 1.067 26.7

21 Acacia leucophloea

Fabaceae 41.67 1.300 32.5

22 Aegle marmelos Rutaceae 29.17 1.571 39.3

23 Ailanthus excelsa Simaroubaceae 33.33 1.250 31.3

24 Albizia labbeck Fabaceae 12.50 1.667 41.7

25 Albizia saman Fabaceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

26 Anacardium occidentale

Anacardiaceae 25.00 1.500 37.5






27 Artocarpus intigrifolia

Moraceae 45.83 1.273 31.8

28 Alstonia scholaris Apocyanaceae 41.67 1.100 27.5

29 Bambusa vulgaris

Poaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1

30 Bauhinia purpurea

Caesalpinaceae 50.00 1.167 29.2

31 Borassus flabelliber

Palmae 33.33 1.125 28.1

32 Buchanania lanzan


33 Butea monosperma

Papilionaceae 25.00 1.333 33.3

34 Callistemon citrinus

Myrtaceae 20.83 1.400 35.0

35 Carica papaya Caricaceae 45.83 1.091 27.3

36 Cassia fistula Caesalpinaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1

37 Ceiba pendandra Bombacaceae 37.50 1.111 27.8

38 Citrus aurantifolia

Rutaceae 41.67 1.400 35.0

39 Citrus medica Rutaceae 45.83 1.455 36.4

40 Dalbergia sissoo Fabaceae 41.67 3.000 35.0

41 Delonix regia Fabaceae 45.83 1.273 31.8

42 Erythrina indica Fabaceae 16.67 1.500 37.5

43 Gmelina arborea. Lamiaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1

44 Kigelia africana Bignoniaceae 16.67 1.500 37.5

45 Madhuca indica Sapotaceae 29.17 1.286 32.1

46 Melia azadirachta

Meliaceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

47 Millingtonia hortensis


48 Mitragyna parviflora

Rubiaceae 16.67 1.750 43.8

49 Murraya koenichii

Rutaceae 41.67 1.200 30.0

50 Musa paradisiaca

Musaceae 54.17 1.231 30.8

51 Phoenix sylvestrix

Arecaceae 41.67 1.100 27.5

52 Phyllanthus emblica







53 Psidium guyava Myrtaceae 66.67 1.063 26.6

54 Pongamia pinnata

Fabaceae 37.50 1.111 27.8

55 Prosobis juliflora Fabaceae 8.33 1.500 37.5

56 Semecarpus anacardium


57 Syzigium cummuni

Myrtaceae 58.33 1.143 28.6

Flora of Zone III – 5 Km to 10 km from Project Site

Flora of Zone III was observed to be the plant species dominated Tectona grandis,

Albezia lebeckk, Shisham (Dalbergia latifolia), Bahera (Terminalia belerica), Shaja

(Terminalia tomentosa), Dhabra (Anogeissu satifolia), Haldu (Adina cordifolia),

Kahua (Terminalia arjuna), Bija (Pterocarpus marsupium), Aam (Mangifera

indica), Amala (Embilca officinalis), Kendu (Diospyros melanoxylon), Gunja

(Lannea grandis) and Kullu (Sterculia urens).

Table 4-27 Density, abundance and frequency of occurrence of flora in the zone III

Sl No Scientific

Name Family Frequency Abundance Density

1 Laucana leucocephala

Fabaceae 50.00 1.250 31.3

2 Grevillea robusta

Proteaceae

45.83 1.182 29.5

3 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae 66.67 1.063 26.6

4 Guazuma tomentosa

Malvaceae 12.50 1.667 41.7

5 Ficus religiosa Moraceae 50.00 1.250 31.3

6 Polyalthia longifolia

Annonaceae 45.83 1.182 29.5

7 Terminalia bellerica



9 Cadamba lamarkiana

Rubiaceae 20.83 2.800 70.0

10 Samanya Fabaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1





Sl No Scientific


saman

11 Casuarina equisetifoliuma


12 Cocus nucifera Arecaceae 54.17 1.385 34.6

13 Ficus benghalensis

Moraceae 45.83 1.727 43.2

14 Pithecellobium dulce

Fabaceae 50.00 1.583 39.6

15 Spathodia paniculata



17 Acacia auriculiformis


18 Plumaria acutifolia


19 Peltophorum pterocarpum

Fabaceae 29.17 1.143 28.6

20 Cassia siamia Caesalpinaceae 33.33 1.375 34.4

21 Ficus hispeda Moraceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

22 Moringa oleifera Moringaceae 29.17 1.143 28.6

23 Azadirachta indica

Meliaceae 62.50 1.067 26.7

24 Acacia leucophloea

Fabaceae 41.67 1.300 32.5

25 Aegle marmelos Rutaceae 29.17 1.571 39.3

26 Ailanthus excelsa

Simaroubaceae 33.33 1.250 31.3

27 Albizia labbeck Fabaceae 12.50 1.667 41.7

28 Albizia saman Fabaceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

29 Anacardium occidentale


30 Artocarpus intigrifolia

Moraceae 45.83 1.273 31.8

31 Alstonia scholaris


32 Bambusa vulgaris

Poaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1

33 Bauhinia purpurea

Caesalpinaceae 50.00 1.167 29.2

34 Borassus flabelliber

Palmae 33.33 1.125 28.1





Sl No Scientific


35 Buchanania lanzan


36 Butea monosperma

Papilionaceae 25.00 1.333 33.3

37 Callistemon citrinus

Myrtaceae 20.83 1.400 35.0

38 Carica papaya Caricaceae 45.83 1.091 27.3

39 Cassia fistula Caesalpinaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1

40 Ceiba pendandra

Bombacaceae 37.50 1.111 27.8

41 Citrus aurantifolia

Rutaceae 41.67 1.400 35.0

42 Citrus medica Rutaceae 45.83 1.455 36.4

43 Dalbergia sissoo Fabaceae 41.67 3.000 35.0

44 Delonix regia Fabaceae 45.83 1.273 31.8

45 Erythrina indica Fabaceae 16.67 1.500 37.5

46 Gmelina arborea.

Lamiaceae 33.33 1.125 28.1

47 Kigelia africana Bignoniaceae 16.67 1.500 37.5

48 Madhuca indica Sapotaceae 29.17 1.286 32.1

49 Melia azadirachta

Meliaceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

50 Millingtonia hortensis


51 Mitragyna parviflora

Rubiaceae 16.67 1.750 43.8

52 Murraya koenichii

Rutaceae 41.67 1.200 30.0

53 Musa paradisiaca

Musaceae 54.17 1.231 30.8

54 Phoenix sylvestrix

Arecaceae 41.67 1.100 27.5

55 Phyllanthus emblica


56 Psidium guyava Myrtaceae 66.67 1.063 26.6

57 Pongamia pinnata

Fabaceae 37.50 1.111 27.8

58 Prosobis juliflora Fabaceae 8.33 1.500 37.5

59 Semecarpus anacardium


60 Syzigium Myrtaceae 58.33 1.143 28.6





Sl No Scientific


cummuni

61 Tamarindus indica

Fabaceae 50.00 1.167 29.2

62 Terminalia tomentosa


63 Thespesia grandiflora

Malvaceae 25.00 1.500 37.5

64 Thespesia populnea

Malvaceae 25.00 1.167 29.2

Figure 4-49 Photographs shows various Flora species observed in the study area

Amaranthus viridis Phyllanthus niruri

Calotrophis procera Ficus hispida and Lantana camera





Plumaria alba Delonix regia

Leucaena leucocephloea Melia azadirachta

Table 4-28 List of ground level storey herbaceous species observed in the study area

Sl No Scientific Name Family Common/Local

Name

HERBS

1 Abutilon indicum Malvaceae Khangi

2 Acalypha indica Euphorbiaceae Kuppi

3 Achyranthes aspera Amaranthaceae Chirchita

4 Amaranthus viridis Amaranthaceae

5 Argemone mexicana Papaveraceae Satyanashi

6 Aristida setacea Poaceae ---






Name

7 Atylosia scarabaeodes Fabaceae ---

8 Barleria caspidata Acanthaceae ---

9 Cassia occidentalis Fabaceae Kasunda

10 Catharamthus roseus Apocyanaceae Sadabahar

11 Cleome viscosa Capparaceae Bahra

12 Cleome gynandra Capparaceae Safed bahro

13 Cyanodon dactylon Poaceae Duba

14 Cyperus rotundus Cyperaceae Bara nagar

15 Datura metel Solanaceae Safed Dhatura

16 Dolichus biflorus Fabaceae Horse gram

17 Eragratis viscose Poaceae ---

18 Euphorbia hirta Euphorbiaceae Bara Dudhi

19 Hygrophila auriculata Acanthaceae Bhankari

20 Mimosa pedica Mimosaceae Lajakuli

21 Mirabilis jalapa Nyctaginaceae Gulabbas

22 Ocimum sanctum Lamiaceae Tulsi

23 Ocimum tenuiflorum Lamiaceae Tulsi

24 Panicum humile Poaceae ---

25 Parthenium hysterophorus Asteraceae Gajar ghas

26 Pedilanthus tithymaloides Euphorbiaceae ----

27 Phyllanthus niruri Euphorbiaceae Bhui aonla

28 Sida cardifolia Malvaceae ---

29 Sida rhomboids Malvaceae Biskhabari

30 Tribulus terrestris Zygophyllaceae Gokharu

31 Tridox procumbans Asteraceae Khal muriya

32 Urginea indica Asparagaceae Ban piaz

Table 4-29 List of Shrub species observed in the study area


Name

SHRUBS

1 Annona squomosa Annonaceae Sitaphal

2 Bouhainvillea glabra Nyctaginaceae Bouhainvillea

3 Calotropis gigantica Asclepiadaceae Arakh

4 Calotropis procera Asclepiadaceae Arakh

5 Hibiscus rosasinensis Malvaceae Jasum

6 Ipomea reptans Convolvulaceae Amari





7 Ixora coccinea Rubiaceae Lokhandi

8 Jatropha gossipifolia Euphorbiaceae Rabjada

9 Jatropha curcas Euphorbiaceae Rabjada

10 Justicia adhatoda Acanthaceae --

11 Morinda tinctoria Rubiaceae Aal

12 Lantana camera Asteraceae Raimunia

13 Nerium oleander Apocyanaceae Kaner

14 Punica granatum Punicaceae Pomegranate

15 Ricinus communis Euphorbiaceae Erandi

16 Tecoma gaudichaudi Bignoniaceae --

17 Thevetia nurifolia Apocynaceae Pila Kaner

18 Vitex nigundo Verbinaceae Nirgundi

Table 4-30 List of Trees species observed in the study area (Buffer zone)

Sl No

Scientific Name Family Common/Local

Name

TREES

1 Acacia auriculiformis Euphorbiaceae Akasia / Glass tree

2 Acacia leucophloea Fabaceae ---

3 Aegle marmelos Rutaceae Bel

4 Ailanthus excelsa Simaroubaceae Mundayigatch

5 Albizia labbeck Fabaceae Saras

6 Albizia saman Fabaceae Vilaiti Saras

7 Anacardium occidentale Anacardiaceae Kaju

8 Artocarpus intigrifolia Moraceae Jack fruit

9 Alstonia scholaris Apocyanaceae ---

10 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae Nimba/Neem

11 Bambusa vulgaris Poaceae Bans

12 Bauhinia purpurea Caesalpinaceae Borda, Kuliari

13 Borassus flabelliber Palmae Tadd/Tal

14 Buchanania lanzan Anacardiaceae Char

15 Butea monosperma Papilionaceae Phalsa, Palas

16 Cadamba lamarkiana Rubiaceae Kadam

17 Callistemon citrinus Myrtaceae Bottle brush

18 Carica papaya Caricaceae Papeeta

19 Cassia fistula Caesalpinaceae Amaltas

20 Casuarina equisetifoliuma Casuarinaceae Jungli Saru

21 Cassia siamia Caesalpinaceae Kassod

22 Ceiba pendandra Bombacaceae Safed Semal





Sl No

Scientific Name Family Common/Local

Name

23 Citrus aurantifolia Rutaceae Kaghzi Nimbu

24 Citrus medica Rutaceae Galgal

25 Cocus nucifera Arecaceae Nariyal

26 Dalbergia sissoo Fabaceae Sissoo

27 Delonix regia Fabaceae Gulmohar

28 Eucalyptus sp. Myrtaceae Nilgiri

29 Erythrina indica Fabaceae Panjara

30 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Bar

31 Ficus religiosa Moraceae Pipal

32 Ficus hispeda Moraceae ---

33 Gmelina arborea. Lamiaceae ----

34 Guazuma tomentosa Malvaceae ----

35 Kigelia africana Bignoniaceae Sausage

36 Laucana leucocephala Fabaceae Safed babool

37 Madhuca indica Sapotaceae Mahua/Butter tree

38 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Amba/Mango

39 Melia azadirachta Meliaceae ----

40 Millingtonia hortensis Bignoniaceae Neem Chameli

41 Mitragyna parviflora Rubiaceae Mundi, Muid

42 Moringa oleifera Moringaceae Munga

43 Murraya koenichii Rutaceae Karry patta

44 Musa paradisiaca Musaceae Kelaa

45 Peltophorum pterocarpum Fabaceae Copper pod

46 Phoenix sylvestrix Arecaceae Khajur

47 Pithecellobium dulce Fabaceae Ganga imli

48 Phyllanthus emblica Euphorbiaceae Amlaa

49 Psidium guyava Myrtaceae Amrood

50 Plumaria acutifolia Apocyanaceae Pakoda tree

51 Polyalthia longifolia Annonaceae Ashok

52 Pongamia pinnata Fabaceae Karanj

53 Prosobis juliflora Fabaceae Babul[

54 Semecarpus anacardium Anacardiaceae Bhalia, Bheluan

55 Syzigium cummuni Myrtaceae Jamu

56 Tamarindus indica Fabaceae Imli

57 Tectona grandis Lamiaceae Teak

58 Terminalia bellerica Combretaceae Bahada

59 Terminalia tomentosa Combretaceae Asan, Sahaj

60 Thespesia grandiflora Malvaceae ---

61 Thespesia populnea Malvaceae Paras pipal





4.14.8 Agriculture in the Study Area

Study area has fertile soils in most of the regions. River overcomes deficiency of

water to a certain extent. The cropping pattern of the study area is characterized

by diversified cropping patterns exist and no single crop claims a large share of the

gross cropped area. In canal fed areas Paddy occupies the largest area of

cultivation. Other crops grown in the region are sorghum, green gram, black gram

cotton, cattle fodder and vegetables like bhendi, brinjal, tomato and chilies etc.

Figure 4-50 Agriculture fields in the Study Area

Paddy Sorghum

Dhwar dhal Cotton

Table 4-31 List of Agriculture crops observed in the study area





S. No Scientific Name Family Common

name

CROPS

1 Arachis hypogea Fabaceae Ground nut

2 Dolichos biflorus Fabaceae Horse gram

3 Oriza sativa Poaceae Paddy

4 Vigna mungo Fabaceae Black gram

5 Vigna radiate Fabaceae Green gram

6 Sorghum bicolor Poaceae Broom corn

HORTICULTURE CROP

7 Achras sapota, Sapotaceae Sapota

8 Citrus medica. Rutaceae Citrus

9 Mangifera indica Anacardiacece Mango

10 Musa acuminate Musaceae Banana

11 Psidium guyava Myrtaceae Guava

OTHER CROPS

12 Abelmoschus esculentus Malvaceae Bhendi

13 Capsicum annuum Solanaceae Chilli

14 Dolichos lablab Fabaceae Simba

15 Lycopersicon esculentum Solanaceae Tomato

16 Solanum melongena Salanaceae Brinjal

Table4-32 List of ecologically important plant species observed in the study area

Sl. No

Plant species Family Habit Status

1 Acacia catechu Leguminosae Tree Native

2 Aegele marmelos Rutaceae Tree Native

3 Albizia lebbeck Leguminosae Tree Native

4 Anogeissus latifolia Sappotaceae Tree Native

5 Bauhinia racemosa Leguminosae Tree Native

6 Bombax ceiba Malvaceae Tree Native

7 Bridelia retusa Euphorbiaceae Tree Native

8 Butea monosperma Leguminosae Tree Native

9 Carreya arborea Lecythedaceae Tree Native

10 Cassia fistula Leguminosae Tree Native

11 Dalbergia latifolia Leguminosae Tree Native

12 Dalbergia sisoo Leguminosae Tree Native

13 Diospyros Ebenaceae Tree Native





Sl. No

Plant species Family Habit Status

melanoxylon

14 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Tree Native

15 Ficus infectoria Moraceae Tree Native

16 Ficus religiosa Moraceae Tree Native

17 Gmelina arborea Verbenaceae Tree Native

18 Madhuca longifolia Euphorbiaceae Tree Native

19 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Tree Native

20 Pongamia pinnata Leguminosae Tree Native

21 Schleichera oleosa Sapindaceae Tree Native

22 Shorea robusta Dipterocarpaceae Tree Native

23 Sterculia urens Sterculiaceae Tree Native

24 Tectona grandis Verbenaceae Tree Native

25 Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae Tree Native

26 Terminalia belerica Combretaceae Tree Native

4.14.9 Faunal Diversity

4.14.9.1 Avifauna

Overall 63 species of birds were recorded from entire study area during this survey

period. House sparrow, Common crow, Rock Pigeon, Magpie Robin, Spotted Dove

and Baya Weaver were seen near villages. In the agriculture areas, large numbers

of Bee-eaters, Mynas, Larks, Lapwings, Kites and Drongos were observed. Black

Drongo, Ashy Drongo, Indian Roller, Bush Quail, Doves, Shrikes were observed in

dry land. Predators and accipiter like Pariah Kite, Black winged Kite, Common

Kestrel and Shikra were occasionally seen near farms and water bodies.

Majority of species were recorded near lake, other water bodies and river. However,

no migratory species were recorded during this study period. Detailed survey

during winter period migration season is required for precise observations on

avifauna. Species like Little Egret, Cattle Egret, Pond Heron, Little Cormorant,

Kingfishers and River Terns were commonly observed near Ukai Dam.

Figure 4-51 List of birds species observed in the study area

SL No. Scientific Name English name WPA






1 Accipiter badius dussumieri Indian Shikra Sch-IV

2 Acridotheres tristis tristis Indian myna Sch-IV

3 Acritheres fuscus fuscus Jungle myna Sch-IV

4 Alcedo attahis bengalensis Small blue kingfisher Sch-IV

5 Apus affinis affinis Indian house swift Sch-IV

6 Ardeola grayii grayii Indian pond heron Sch-IV

7 Bubulcus ibis coromandus Cattle egret Sch-IV

8 Calidris minuta Little stint Sch-IV

9 Caprimulgus asiaticus asiaticus Indian little nightjar Sch-IV

10 Caprimulgus indicus indicus Indian jungle nightjar Sch-IV

11 Centropus sinensis parroti Crow peasant Sch-IV

12 Chalocophaps indica indica Indian emerald dove Sch-IV

13 Charadrius dubius ferdoni Indian little ringed plover

Sch-IV

14 Chrysocolaptes lucidus Golded head woodpecker

Sch-IV

15 Copsychus saularis saularis Indian magpie robin Sch-IV

16 Coracias benghalensis Northern roller Sch-IV

17 Corvus macrorhyachos culminates

Indian jungle crow Sch-IV

18 Corvus splendens splendens Indian house crow Sch-IV

19 Cuculus canorus canorus Cuckoo Sch-IV

20 Dendrocitta vagabunda vagabunda

Rufous treepie Sch-IV

21 Dicae agile agile Indian flower pecker Sch-IV

22 Dicrurus adsimilis macrocercus Black drongo or king crow

Sch-IV

23 Dicrurus leucophaeus longica udatus

Indian grey drongo Sch-IV

24 Eudynamys scolopacea scolopacea

Asian koel Sch-IV

25 Himantopus himantopus himantopus

Indian black winged stilt

Sch-IV

26 Lanius schach tricolor Black headed shrike Sch-IV

27 Merops lesshenaulti lesshenaulti Chestnut headed bee eater

Sch-IV

28 Merops orientalis orientalis Green bee eater Sch-IV

29 Nectarinia asiatica asiatica Indian purple sunbird Sch-IV

30 Nycticorax nycticorax nycticorax Night heron Sch-IV

31 Ocyceros birostris Indian Grey Hornbill Sch-IV

32 Oriolus oriolus kundoo Indian golden oriole Sch-IV

33 Oriolus xanthornus maderaspatanus

South Indian black headed oriole

Sch-IV

34 Orthotomus sutorius quzuratus Indian tailor bird Sch-IV






35 Passer domesticus indicus Indian house sparrow Sch-IV

36 Pericrocotus flammeus East Indian minivet Sch-IV

37 Plocues philippinus Indian baya Weaver Sch-IV

38 Psittacula cyarocephala cyarocephala

Plum- headed parakeet Sch-IV

39 Psittacula krameri marillensis Rose- ringed parakeet Sch-IV

40 Saxicoloides fulicata erythrura Indian robin Sch-IV

41 Stretopelia chinensis suratensis Indian spotted dove Sch-IV

42 Stretopelia senegalensis Little brown dove Sch-IV

43 Sturnus contra contra Indian pied maina Sch-IV

44 Sturnus pagodarum Black headed myna Sch-IV

45 Tringa glareola Wood sandpiper Sch-IV

46 Tringa hypoleucos Common sand piper Sch-IV

47 Upupa epops ceylonensis Ceylon hoopee Sch-IV

48 Vanellus indicus indicus Red wattled lapwing Sch-IV

49 Netta rufina Red crested pochard Sch-IV

50 Copsychus savlaris Oirental magpie-robin Sch-IV

51 Elanus axillaris Black shouldered kite Sch-IV

52 Clamator jacobinus Pied cuckoo Sch-IV

53 Columbina passserina Comman Dove Sch-IV

54 Cypsivrus balasiensis Plam swift Sch-IV

55 Gracupra contra Asian pred startis Sch-IV

56 Bubulcus ibis Little egret Sch-IV

57 Microcarbo niger Little cormorant Sch-IV

58 Turdoides striata Jungle babbler Sch-IV

59 Halcyon smyrensis White breasted kingfisher

Sch-IV

60 Pseudibis papillosa Red naped ibis Sch-IV

61 Amaurornis phoenicarus White breasted waterhen

Sch-IV

62 Athene brama Spotted owlet Sch-IV

63 Spilopelia chinensis Spotted dove Sch-IV

Figure 4-52 various birds species observed in the study area





Spotted Dove Baya weaver

Cattle Egret and Red nabbed Ibis Common myna

Black Shouldered Kite Pond Heron





Shrike bird Indian Robin

Indian Bulbul House sparrow

4.14.9.2 Fauna

Mammals and Reptiles

Important Animals: Leopard, rhesus macaque, bonnet macaque, common

mongoose, Indian civat cat, Indian porcupine, four-horned antelope, barking deer,

sambar, chital, hyena, jungle cat, flying squirrel, python and lizards etc.

Important Birds: Common grey hornbill, grey jungle fowls, barbets, woodpeckers,

shrikes, bee-eaters, flycatchers and many raptors.

Table4-33Mammals in the study area (Buffer zone)

SL No.

English name Scientific Name Sch WPA

1 Spotted deer Axis axis Sch III





SL No.

English name Scientific Name Sch WPA

2 Short-nosed fruit bat Cynopterus sphinx Sch V

3 Jungle cat Felis chous Sch II

4 Common palm squirrel

Funambulus palmarum Sch IV

5 Indian grey mongoose

Herpestes edwardsi Sch IV

6 Indian hare Lepus nigricollis ruficaudatus Sch IV

7 Rhesus macaque Macaca mulatta Sch III

8 Little Indian field mouse

Mus booduga Sch IV

9 Indian fulvous bat Rousettus leschenaulti Sch V

10 Bengal fox Vulpes bengalensis Sch II

4.14.10 Diversity Indices

Following indices were used for estimation of ecological status of this area

Shannon’s index

Margalef’s index

Simpson’s index The indices were applied to woody flora

Shannon’ Index

Typically the value of the index ranges from 1.5 (low species richness and

evenness) to 3.5 (high species evenness and richness), though values beyond these

limits may be encountered. Because the Shannon Index gives a measure of both

species numbers and the evenness of their abundance, the resulting figure does

not give an absolute description of a sites biodiversity. It is particularly useful

when comparing similar ecosystems or habitats, as it can highlight one example

being richer or more even than another. There is always the need to inspect the

data or use another index to unpack the true reasons for the difference.

Where: where S is the total number of species andpiis the frequency of theith

species.





The value Shannon’s index of study area is 2.959 in Core area (Zone I) whereas

4.019 for Zone II and 4.136 for Zone III were recorded. Hence, the diversity of this

buffer zone II, and III are high.

Margalef’s Index

It is calculated from the total number of species presented the abundance or total

number of individuals.

Margalef Index (D) = S – 1/ log e N

Where: S – total number of species, N – total number of individuals

The higher the index, the greater is the diversity. The value of Margalef’s index for

woody flora were observed to be 3.224, 7.417 and 8.229 for Zone I, Zone II and

Zone III respectively.

Simpson’s Index

Simpson's Index measures the probability that two individuals randomly selected

from a sample will belong to the same species (or some category other than

species).

Simpson's Indexλ = ∑ n(n-1)/N(N-1)

Where: n – total individuals of each species

N – total individuals of all species

With this index, 0 represents infinite diversity and 1, no diversity. That is, the

bigger the value of D, the lower the diversity. This is neither intuitive nor logical, so

to get over this problem, D is often subtracted from 1 to give:

Simpson's Index of Diversity 1 - λ

The value of this index also ranges between 0 and 1, but now, the greater the

value, the greater the sample diversity. This makes more sense. In this case, the

index represents the probability that two individuals randomly selected from a

sample will belong to different species. Simpson index values of woody flora was

very close to 1 (0.87) indicating uniform distribution of species.

The values of Simpson index for woody flora were observed to be 0.936, 0.981and

0.984 for Zone I, Zone II and Zone III respectively.





Table 4-34Biodiversity indices of the study area

S. No Study area

Zone Dominance

_D Simpson_1

-D Shannon

_H Evenness

_e^H/S Margalef

Index

1 Zone I core Zone

0.064 0.936 2.959 0.838 3.224

2 Zone II Buffer zone

0.018 0.981 4.019 0.976 7.417

3 Zone III Buffer zone

0.016 0.984 4.136 0.978 8.229

4.15 Socio Economic Environment

A Social Impact Assessment (SIA) examines existing socioeconomic conditions of

the said study area and the associated impact due to the proposed project. The

socioeconomic conditions include accessing indicators such as Demographic,

Social, Economic, Health aspects, Cultural aspects, etc. Associated impacts

include positive or negative impacts or even both. Positive impact may be of

creating new employment opportunities, improved transportation, increased land

value, local economic development, regional economic development etc. The

negative impacts may be of losing their livelihood, land, homestead, threat of

outbreaks, threat of losing the public and aesthetic places, etc.

The associated impact out of the project is assessed based on the findings of the

existing socioeconomic conditions and its relation local resources such as Air,

Water sources, Land, forest produces etc. Understanding the local socioeconomic

conditions and the magnitude of the impacts, helps to develop the mitigation plan

and need based community development programs under Corporate Environment

Responsibility.

4.15.1 Objective of the Study Area

As stated in the earlier subjections, the primary objectives of this Social Impact

Assessment study are highlighted hereunder:

To assess the socio-economic conditions and the local context of the people living in

and around the project area

To identify the likely socioeconomic impacts to occur due to the proposed project.

To develop Mitigation Plan / CER Plan to mitigate the likely impacts of the projects

and for the benefit of the local community.





4.15.2 Methodology of The Study

4.15.2.1 Geography of the Study Area

The proposed project is the expansion project of existing paper mill ,to be

developed within the existing factory premises and does not require any additional

land for the said project and thus does not attract any Rehabilitation and

Resettlement activity under “Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in

Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013”(RFCTLARR). However

to map the socioeconomic conditions of the local people the villages falling within

the 10km radius of the project site is considered. Based on Directorate of Census

Directorate, there are about 50 revenue villages, 2 Towns (Ukai and Bhurivel) and

1 Municipality (Songadh). Among the study area villages 4 revenue village

(Bhimpura, Ghoda, Vagda and Gunasada) falling within 2.5 km from the project

site is considered for primary survey. Table 4.35 shows the administrative

structure of the study area.

Table 4-35 Administrative Status of Study Area Villages/Towns

S.No State District Taluk Town Village

1 Gujarat Tapi Songadh 3 41

Uchchhal 0 6

2 Maharashtra Nandurbar Nawapur 0 3

Total 3 50 Source: Census 2011

Figure 4-53 Administrative Map showing the Study Area villages





Source: Bhuvan – Indian Geo-Platform of ISRO.

4.15.3 Socioeconomic Indicators considered for the study

For the purpose of this study, socioeconomic indicators such as demography,

literacy, health, livelihood, amenities and cultural aspects were collected.

Secondary Published data such as population and amenities obtained from

Directorate of Census Operations, Health indicators such as immunization levels,

institutional births from District Level Household survey-3, Households availing

safe sanitation details are collected from Baseline Survey-2012, published by

Ministry of Drinking Water and Sanitation, Socioeconomic and Caste Census 2011

published by Ministry of Rural Development.

4.15.3.1 Primary Survey

Primary Survey was undertaken from 26th Sep 2018 to 29th Sep 2018. During this

survey, primary data in relation to geographical features, settlements, roads and





amenities in the respective villages were observed. In addition to the site

observations, informal focused group discussion was conducted in the villages

falling within 2.5km of the project site. The discussion was mainly focused on

mapping the existing amenities in the respective villages, felt basic needs, Problems

if any due to the existing project operation. The discussion was carried out with the

village Sarpanch, village representatives, farmers, etc who have good knowledge

about the village and happenings.

Figure 4-54 Reconnaissance and Primary Survey

Discussion with Fishermen – Vadi

Bhensrot Discussion with Farmers – Vagdah

Village

Discussion with Farmers and Village

head Chachar Bhundha

Discussion with Villagers- Gunsada Village





Discussion with Villagers- Bhimpura

Village Typical House of Gamit Tribes

4.15.4 Socio Economic Environment

4.15.4.1 Summary Socioeconomic Indicators

Table 4-36 Summary Socioeconomic Indicator

S.No Particulars Study Area State

1 Study Area – Districts / State Tapi Gujarat

2 Number of Administrative Divisions

50 Revenue Villages, 2 Census Towns and

1 Municipality

33 districts and 250 Talukas

3 Total Households 24,980 1,22,48,428

4 Total Population 1,15,154 6,04,39,692

5 Sex Ratio 981 919

6 Children Population (<6 Years Old)

13,241 77,77,262 (12.86%)

7 Children Sex Ratio 930 890

8 Urban Rural Ratio 34:66 45:55

9 SC Population 1.9% 6.74%

10 ST Population 70.8% 14.75%

11 Working Population 50.1% 40.9%

12 Agricultural Workers 58% 49.60%

13 Percentage of HH with Monthly Income less than 5000

80% 68.67%

14 Institutional Birth Rate 93.5% 56.4%

15 Childhood Immunization 100% 54.8%

16 Drinking Water Facilities 26% 69.03%

17 Sanitation Facilities 29.5%% 53%

18 Literates 70% 78.03%





4.15.5 Socioeconomic Profile of the Study Area

4.15.5.1 Demography and culture

Fort Songarh is the town of newly formed District Tapi of Gujarat State. Tapi

district is one of the 26 districts of Gujarat state and located in the southern part

of Gujarat. A large proportion of the populations of Tapi district are Adivasis. Tapi

District was formed in the year by bifurcating five taluks from Surat District. Tapi

district largely comprises of Tribal population. The tribal of Tapi district belong

largely to seven such communities: Choudhari, Gamit, Vasava, Kotwalia, Bhil,

Valvi and Padvi. out of total five talukas of Tapi District, three talukas i.e, Nizar,

Uchchhal and Songarh were identified as backward talukas by the Cowlagi

committee3. The bifurcation of Surat district to form Tapi district is not only for the

administrative convenience but also to provide decentralized specialised programs

for tribal population.

About 95% of the rural population of the study area belongs to Tribes and whereas

the people belongs to other communities were seen in the towns. The migrants

from the neighboring districts and states came in search of employment and

businesses were settled in the area, usually in the towns. Gamits are the largely

found tribe in the study area. The populations of Gamits are found in the Vyara,

Songadh, Uchchal and Nizar talukas of Tapi District. Gamits are believed to be

sub-tribe of Bhils. Gamits are usually settled in villages with the spacious houses.

Their houses are build using clay, cow dung, and paddy grass and bamboos are

used in construction of walls. Indigenous or Mangalore tiles are used to cover

roofs. Nuclear family system dominates the Gamit Tribes and nearly 90% of the

Gamits families are monogamous.

3Cowlagi committee was set up by Government of Gujarat for study of backwardness of Taluka in October 2004;

Based on 25 indicators committee has recommended 56 Taluka as the most backward Taluka in Gujarat.





Old Gamit members can be seen wearing Langoti (Men) and Choli (Women),

however among the ounger generation are usually seen wearing Putdi, Shirt and

head dress, either Padgo or Cap and women seen wearing Skirts (younger women)

and Guajarati style sarees (older women)4.

About 89% of the Gamit populations were Hindus and about 10% belongs to

Christians. The Gamti have deep-rooted beliefs in demons and witches. Beside the

crocodile which is considered a god, they worship groups of deities made of

shapeless pieces of stone or wood, placed under trees, where the supernatural

beings are believed to dwell. The Gamti have no temples in which to hold their

religious ceremonies5.

4 Tribal Cultures and Change, RS. Mann and K Mann, 1989 5https://joshuaproject.net/people_groups/16781/IN





Figure 4-55 Typical Gamit Tribe Houses

With respect to the population in the study area i.e. 50 revenue villages 2 census

towns and 1 municipality (Songadh) falling within 10 km radius of the CPM

boundary. As per the Census 2011, there are about 24,980 households with the

cumulative population of 1,15,514 with 58,136 males and 57,018 females. About





70% of the population belongs to Tribes by averaging 95% in rural area and 25%

from urban areas. Being a tribal dominated area, it clearly shows that the people

from various communities and places settled in the towns in search of

employment. The sex ratio in the study area seems to be good with 1005 in the

rural and 937 in urban area.

4.15.5.2 Livelihood and Employment

Agriculture is being the important economic source in the region. Though Tapi

river and Ukai dam are located within the study area, due to inadequate irrigation

facilities, the local farmers are mostly dependent on the monsoon and CPM

supplied treated wastewater for irrigation. With respect to the villages within the

core zone i.e. 2.5 km radius of the CPM boundary, about 60% of the population

dependent on the Central Paper Mill(CPM) and Gujarat State Electricity

Corporation Limited (GSECL) either directly or indirectly. In addition to the

agriculture and industrial employment, the area is famous for bamboos and other

forest produces. After the forest rights act (The Scheduled Tribes and Other

Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006) came into force,

the tribes in the region are given access to bamboos and other minor forest

produces in the region. In addition to the own consumption, handicraft products

made of bamboo are seen in the study area.

The Central Paper mill unit of JK Paper limited issues tree sapling by its plantation

department at the nominal price to the local farmers under the agro forest

program. The grown trees will be purchased back by the CPM for making wood

pulp. The agro forestry program covers about 250 km radius from the mill and

about 68,000 farmers and 56,400 hectars of land have been enrolled under the

CPM agro forestry program. Based on Socio Economic and Caste Census 2011,

about 80% of the household income was less than Rs.5000/ month.





Figure 4-56Gamit men carrying Bamboo

Based on the Census 2011, the total working population was 50% under three

forth of the workers had employment for more than 6 months in a year. Among the

workers group, 16% of them Cultivators, 42% were agriculture labors,4% workers

belongs to household industry and 38% belongs to other workers group.

Figure 4-57Workers Group Distribution





4.15.5.3 Health Indicators

The Gujarat state is covered by the three-tier health system based on the National

Health Policy of 1983 i.e a Health Sub-Centers(PHC-Sub) focused on providing

maternal and child health care. Above Sub Centers, there is a Primary Health

Centre (PHC) which is the referral unit of 6 sub centers manned by a medical

officer and subordinates. Community Health Centre (CHC) is the top of the 3-tier

system is a 30 bedded referral unit for 4 PHCs. Though the entire area is covered

under the three tier health system, the study area is mostly inhabited by the tribal

population and due to lack of transportation facilities in the villages the people are

having difficulty in reaching medical centers. Songadh CHC which is located within

the study area is the major health facility located in the region. On an average

about 200 patients per day visit to the Songadh CHC. There are about one

Resident Medical Officer (RMO), one superintendent and three assistant doctors in

the Songadh CHC and is equipped with 30 bed facilities. The CHC recorded more

cases of Sickle Cell Anemia and about 30-34% of the tribal populations were

affected by Sickle Cell Anemia. Other major health diseases reported in the district

Tapi District are Leptospirosis, Leprosy, Tuberculosis, etc and another area of

concern in the public health care system is the persistent deficiencies of nutrient,

especially among poor women and children. Government of Gujarat had taken

necessary action to intervene the health burden through various programs and in

addition JK Paper Ltd under the CSR program is providing support to ICDS centres

run by the Government and by providing free mobile health camps by covering 30

villages through dedicated medical team. Under the mobile health camps free

medical screening and medicines are provided to the people.

Based on the ‘District Human Development Report 2015, published by Gujarat

Social Infrastructure Development Society (GSIDS), Institutional Birth Rate in the

district was about 93.5% and the same is compared with the state rate of 96.3%.

The childhood immunization was 100% which is more than that of state rate of

97.7%.

As per census 2011, the percentage of people having access to tap water was 26%

and is very low when compared to the state rate 69.03%. The study area is mostly

tribal population and houses are sparsely distributed which makes difficulty in





laying the pipelines. Most of the populations are access to hand pump for their

water needs. Ground water is not suitable for drinking in some of the villages

located in the watershed region of the treated wastewater irrigated land and in

these villages people are mainly dependent on CPM piped water supply. About

70.5% of the households in the Tapi district practice open deification.

Figure 4-58 Water supply in villages

4.15.5.4 Education Indicators

In the study area about 70% of the total populations are literates, where national

literacy rate is of 64.8% and state’s literacy rate of 79.3%. The literacy rate among

the Gamit tribal population was very poor a decade before, due to the intervention

by J K Paper Mill Adult Literacy program and through other government schemes,

the literacy rate was improved from 46% in 2001 to 59% in 2011 in Songadh

Taluk. The rate of male literacy rate in study area (78%) is more when compared

with the female literacy rate (63.1%). With the total number of 798 schools in the

district, on a average each school was having 6 rooms, 100% of the schools are

electricity connection, 39.2% of the schools had a computer lab, 86% of the schools

had compound wall, 64% of the schools had play ground, 100% of the schools had

Drinking water and sanitation facilities. The higher education facilities i.e. colleges

are present in the nearest towns namely Songadh, Uchchhal, Vyara, etc.

Chancher Bundar Village Bhimpur Village





Middle School Chacher Bundar Village Middle School – Gunsada Village

ITI Center – Ukai Primary School - Bhurivel



Chapter-5, Assessment of Impacts and Mitigation Measures


5. ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

5.1. General

This chapter presents magnitude of emissions and discharges from the proposed

MEP facilities and also the various control measures proposed to be adopted as per

the applicable environmental regulations and guidelines. An attempt has been

made to associate environmental impacts due to release of uncontrolled emissions

and controlled wastewater discharges. Hence the possible environmental impacts

due to the proposed Mill Expansion Plan are identified for a detailed study of all

the related environmental aspects and corresponding mitigation measures are

proposed. The environmental impacts for a project can be broadly categorized

based on the phase during which it occurs. The proposed MEP program will be

developed within the existing mill facilities. During the construction phase the

environmental effects will be strictly concentrated within the working area and for

a shorter period of time whereas during the operation phase effects on the

environment can be expected on a continuous basis. The detailed effects on

environment and its mitigation measures during construction and operation phase

of the proposed project are presented in this chapter.

5.2. Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

Unlike Greenfield projects, the proposed project will be limited to minor

construction activities such as earth work, foundations and flooring etc.

Construction related environmental impacts will be limited to plant site which are

reversible in nature. An outline of the various construction phase impacts and

mitigation plans are depicted in this sub section.

The project involves installation of one new Board Machine, Chemical Wood Pulp

Mill, BCTMP, DIP, SFT Plants, Chemical Recovery, captive co-gen power plant and

other supporting facilities.

5.2.1. Land Use

Area required for the MEP facilities is available as vacant land within the mill

premises and no impact is envisaged on the topography during construction.





Alternation or diversion of any natural water bodies or streams is not applicable in

this scenario. As the construction activities of new installation will not necessitate

any land acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) issues are not

envisaged. Construction and Demolition waste generated during the activity will be

utilized to fill the low-lying areas.

5.2.2. Air Quality

The sources of emission during the construction period are mainly from the

movement of equipment at the construction site and dust emitted during erection

of plant related activities for a shorter period. Dismantling and relocation of some

of the existing structures may be envisaged which will be taken place within the

boundary of the existing plant facility. Water sprinkling of construction site will be

adopted. Construction material will be sourced from the local market. As far as

possible and wherever applicable, Pozzolana cement will be utilized to encourage

the utilization of fly ash-based material. Due to the short duration of the planned

action, any impacts on ambient air quality during construction activities are

expected to be short term.

5.2.3. Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic and

construction activities. The operation of these equipment will generate noise

ranging between 85-100 dB (A) near source. These noises will be generated mostly

within the existing plant boundary and will be transient in nature. Due to existing

green cover all around the periphery of the plant boundary, these noise levels will

be attenuated to a large extent and are not likely to have any significant impact on

the nearby villages. Overall, the impact of noise due to construction on the

environment is likely to be insignificant, reversible, localised in nature and mainly

confined to the day hours. As per best practice all the noise generating activities

shall be undertaken during day hours and enclosure shall be provided wherever

applicable to further minimize noise pollution.





5.2.4. Water Quality

Water for construction operations will be supplied from the existing water

resources. As far as possible, treated wastewater will be utilized for construction

activities to conserve fresh water. Construction workers will be made available from

the nearby areas and no labour camps will be established. Existing sanitation

arrangement and rest rooms are adequate. During the implementation and

construction stage of the project, the project will generate employment to about

1000 indirect persons for about a year. All the workers will be made available from

the nearby areas and hence no labour camps will be established. Existing

sanitation arrangements are adequate. No sewage/wastewater will be discharged

outside the mill premises. Any additional wastewater generated during the

construction phase, will be treated in the existing effluent treatment plant. Since

the ground water table in the study area varies between 3 to 9 m, the possibility of

interaction of foundation and sub-surface civil works with the ground water table

is not envisaged. Also, withdrawal of ground water during construction phase is

not envisaged.

5.2.5. Terrestrial Ecology

The construction activities of new installations will be carried out in the existing

plant premises. This phase does not involve major changes in the terrain. JKPL,

Unit CPM has developed greenbelt along the periphery of the facility to restrict

pollution within the facility and hence no impact on terrestrial ecology is envisaged

during this phase.

5.2.6. Socio-Economics

There is no rehabilitation and resettlement for the proposed project site since the

Mill Expansion Plan will be in the existing plant premises. During construction

phase of the project, this project will provide indirect employment to about 1000

people.





5.3. Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase

Management of JKPL, Unit CPM has been adhering to the applicable environmental

regulations and guidelines during the operation of the existing mill and is regularly

submitting the compliance report to Regional Office, MoEF&CC. These sub-

sections depict various pollution control systems that will be adopted under the

proposed Mill Expansion Plan and environmental impacts due to release of residual

emissions and discharge after implementing various environmental control and

management programs.

The following environmental aspects have been addressed under this section:

Release of emissions and discharges from proposed coal fired boiler,

chemical recovery boiler and additional NCG emissions from pulp mill area.

Noise emissions from the proposed steam turbines in the cogeneration

power plant.

Additional fresh water demand and impact on the water resources, if any

Additional wastewater generation, treatment and impacts from disposal of

treated wastewater

Additional vehicular traffic volumes on the road and adequacy of the public

roads

Additional solid and hazardous waste generation and impacts due to safe

disposal

Residual ecological and biological environment, if any

Socioeconomic aspects

5.3.1. Impact on Land Use during Operational Phase

The proposed MEP is within the plant premises; hence, there will not be any

change in the land use pattern in the study area. Since the overall project footprint

remains unchanged, the existing green belt and plantation area will be unchanged.

The existing greencover in the plant will be maintained 33% of the total area

without any change in the landscape and environmental and ecological setting.

Since JKPL, Unit CPM is not sourcing any wood for the expansion project from the





local forest areas and also protected wildlife region, the impacts on the regional

greencover due to expansion program is not envisaged.

The Unit has implemented social and farm forestry plantations of Eucalyptus,

Subabul and Casuarina within 350 Km radius of the mill covering different parts of

Gujarat, Maharashtra and Madhya Pradesh in about 1,35,000 acres of land. To

meet the additional wood demand Post MEP, the unit has already developed year

wise for contract farming plantation program up to year 2028 covering 314000

acres of land to implement agro forestry and farm forestry.


plantation by planting saplings within the facility.

5.3.2. Sources of Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts

The major source of emissions are Particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur dioxide (SO2)

and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) from the proposed coal fired boiler, chemical recovery

boiler and augmentation in lime kiln.

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out by employing

mathematical model based on a steady state Gaussian Plume Dispersion Model

designed for multiple point sources for short term. In the present case, ISCST3

dispersion model, designed for multiple point sources for short term and developed

by United States Environmental Protection Agency [USEPA] has been used for

simulations from point sources. The model simulations deal with dispersion of

three major pollutants viz., Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) and

Particulate Matter (PM) emitted from the proposed stacks. Boiler stack emissions

are modeled as point source buoyant type emissions and fugitive dust emissions

from coal handling areas are modeled as area sources. Hourly meteorological data

collected from the site for the period 22nd September 2018 to 23rd December 2018

has been adopted for modeling the 24-hours Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs).

The site-specific mixing height data are comparable with that of the IMD mixing

heights Atlas and site-specific mixing height measured during the study period

were considered in this modeling study.





5.3.2.1. Point Source

The Proposed MEP of JKPL, unit CPM involves shifting and re-installation of

bleached chemical wood pulp mill from JKPL, unit Rayagada, Orissa and a new

BCTMP mill. The existing power boilers (CFB#1- 20tph and CFB#2- 30 tph) will be

retired and new power boilers of capacity 240 tph (CFB#5- 150 tph, operating and

CFB#6- 90 tph, standby) is proposed to be installed.

The existing recovery boiler will be kept as standby and a new recovery boiler of

capacity 950 tpd of black liquor is proposed to be installed. Along with existing

lime kiln of capacity 90 tpd, an additional 160 tpd capacity lime kiln from JKPL,

Rayagada unit will be re-installed in the CPM unit.

5.3.2.2. Emissions from Proposed Coal Fired Boilers

New CFB#5 of 150 tph capcity which is proposed to be under operation is

considered for air quality modeling. The additional coal consumption to the tune of

1,70,000 tpa of mixed coals (Indian, Imported and Lignite) will be utilized for

generating 150 tph steam from the proposed FBC boiler. As per the coal analysis

reports, the sulphur content of the Indian coal, imported coal and lignite is

reported to be in the order of 0.5 %, 0.8% and 1.5 % respectively. Out of the total

mixed coal quantity, about 60 % of Indian coal will be utilized and hence the same

is considered to estimate the unclontrolled SO2 emission rate for the worst-case

scenario.

According to the new power plant emission regulations, the concentration of PM,

SO2 and NOx from the proposed power plants shall meet 30 mg/Nm3, 100

mg/Nm3and 100 mg/Nm3 respectively. A Dedicated high efficiency Electrostatic

Precipitators (ESP) will be installed for control of Particulate Matter (PM) emissions

from the proposed boiler in the captive power plant to meet the new PM emission

norms of 30 mg/Nm3. Hence the controlled PM emission is estimated as 5 kg/hr. A

dry limestone injection system shall be installed to meet the new SO2 emission

norms of 100 mg/Nm3. Hence the controlled SO2 emissions is estimated as 16

kg/hr. Based on the peak SO2 emission release scenario, the minimum stack

height required for the proposed boiler is estimated as 73 m and hence a stack

height of 75 m is proposed for effective dispersion of pollutants in the atmosphere.





NOx concentration in the existing boiler stack will be less than the MoEFCC

prescribed limit of 100 mg/Nm3 and hence the NOx emission rate is estimated

around 16 kg/hr. Due to lower combustion temperatures (800 to 900OC), when

compared with conventional pulverized boilers, generation of NOx emissions from

CFBC boilers will be far below that of the suggested emission factors by USEPA.

At any given point of time, the controlled PM, SO2 and NOx emissions from the coal

fired boiler will not exceed 30 mg/Nm3, 100 mg/Nm3 and 100 mg/Nm3 respectively

as per the MoEFCC prescribed limit for thermal power plant, as per 2015

notification. Hence the same is considered for modeling.

The details of the estimation of emissions from proposed coal fired boiler are


Table 5-1 Estimations from Proposed 150 tph Boiler (In operation)

S.No Parameter Units 150 TPH

(proposed)

1 Steam generation capacity of the proposed boiler

TPH 150

2 Type of fuel used - Mix of Imported

Indian and Lignite

3 Calorific value of the Indian coal Kcal/Kg 4000

4 Calorific value of the Imported Coal Kcal/Kg 5500

5 Calorific value of lignite Kcal/kg 5000

6 Coal consumption when operated on 100% Indian Coal (worst case scenario)

T/day 500

7 Sulphur content in Indian Coal % 0.5

8 SO2 emission rate based on MoEF&CC standard @ 100 mg/Nm3

Kg/hr 16

g/s 4

8 NOx emission rate based on MoEF&CC standard @ 100 mg/Nm3

Kg/hr 16

g/s 4

9 PM emission rate based on MoEF&CC

standard @ 30 mg/Nm3

Kg/hr 5

g/s 1.3

10 Stack flue gas parameters

10.1 Stack gas temperature OC 135

10.2 Combustion gas volume Nm3/hr 1,44,000

10.3 Flue gas at operating temperature Am3/hr 1,12,000

10.4 Stack top diameter m 2

10.5 Stack gas velocity from each boiler m/sec 11

10.6 Minimum Stack height required M 73

10.7 Proposed stack height M 75





5.3.2.3. Emissions from Chemical Recovery Boiler and Lime Kiln

As a part of MEP, new recovery boiler of capacity 950 tpd of black liquor is

proposed to be installed while the existing chemical recovery boiler will be kept as

standby. Along with existing lime kiln of capacity 90 tpd, an additional 160 tpd

capacity lime kiln from JKPL, Rayagada unit will be re-installed in the CPM unit.

For the proposed chemical recovery boiler, the emission rates for SO2 and NOx are

estimated based on MoEF&CC limits for boilers used in the other industries

including paper and pulp, as per MoEF&CC notification dated 29th January 2018

which is 600 mg/Nm3 and 300 mg/Nm3 respectively. Whereas for the estimation of

PM from chemical recovery boiler, the new thermal power plant standard of

MoEF&CC dated 2015 is considered which is 30 mg/Nm3, as a high efficiency ESP

will be installed to control PM emission to well within the normsand the details are

given in Table 5.2.

For the proposed lime kiln, the emission rates for SO2 and NOx are estimated based

on MoEF&CC notification dated 22nd March 2018 which specifies the emission

standard for lime kiln as 400 mg/Nm3 and 500 mg/Nm3 respectively for SO2 and

NOx. Whereas the existing GPCB norm of 150 mg/Nm3 for PM is considered for

modeling and the details are given in Table 5.3.

Table 5-2 Estimation of emissions from Proposed Chemical Recovery Boiler


Post MEP (New Boiler)

Capacity TPH 14 40

Black liquor processing quantity

TPD 335 950

Combustion air volume Nm3/hr 39,500 1,20,000

Stack gas temperature ºC 135 170

ºK 408 408

Stack gas velocity m/sec 4.34 4.5

Stack height m 70 70

Stack tip diameter m 2.1 3.3

ESP outlet concentration

mg/Nm3 70 30

PM emission rate Kg/hr 2.8 3.4

g/s 0.76 0.93






Post MEP (New Boiler)

SO2 concentration mg/Nm3 559 600

SO2 emission rate Kg/hr 22 67.2

g/s 6 18.67

NOx concentration mg/Nm3 60 300

NOx emission rate Kg/hr 2 33.61

g/s 0.6 9.33

Table 5-3 Estimation of Emissions from Proposed Lime Kiln

Parameter Units Existing Scenario

Post MEP

Solids load on lime kiln TPD 90 230

Stack gas temperature ºC 165 165

ºK 438 438

Stack gas velocity m/sec 10 9.8

Stack height m 60 60

Stack tip diameter m 0.25 0.6

ESP outlet concentration mg/Nm3 145 150

PM emission rate Kg/hr 0.39 1.02

g/s 0.10 0.30

SO2 concentration mg/Nm3 395 400

SO2 emission rate Kg/hr 1.05 2.72

g/s 0.29 0.50

NOx concentration mg/Nm3 84 500

NOx emission rate Kg/hr 0.22 1.40

g/s 0.06 0. 9

5.3.2.4. Area Source (Coal Handling)

The envisaged coal dust emissions due to the increase in the quantity of coal

handling are estimated for worst case scenario considering the Indian Coal. There

is an increase in the coal consumption for the proposed project and the estimated

increment of indigenous coal requirement for the proposed project is about

1,60,000 TPA. The fugitive dust emissions will be controlled by providing dust

collectors at material transfer points and coal conveyer will be provided with water

sprinkling arrangements. Hence estimated controlled dust emissions based on the

AP 42 emission factors will be 2.1x10-8 g/sec/m2. The Ground level Concentration





(GLC) for particulate matter emissions are thus predicted considering point source

as well as area source emissions.

The estimated emission details used for air modeling are presented in the Table

5.4.

Table 5-4 Emission rate details for air modeling with Indigenous Coal

Source Stack Height

Proposed

Emission rate (g/sec) – Uncontrolled

SO2 NOx PM

Coal Fired Boiler

(150 tph) 75 4 4 1.3

Chemical Recovery Boiler (950 tpd of BLS)

70 18.6 9.3 0.9

Lime kiln (230 tpd) 60 0.5 0.9 0.3

Fugitive dust emissions (Coal handling)

- - - 2.1x10-8

The emission rates for the air pollutants are estimated for the proposed boilers.

However, it is to be noted that the existing coal fired boilers (CFB#1- 20tph and

CFB#2- 30 tph) will be retired, the existing recovery boiler will be kept as standby

and thus the net increase in PM, SO2 and NOx emissions will be much lower than

estimated emissions and thus no significant increase in concentration can be

envisaged due to MEP.

5.3.3. Prediction of Ground Level Concentrations of Criteria Pollutants

The site-specific meteorological information indicated that predominantly winds

were found to blow from North East direction and hence the impact zone in the

down wind direction is located in the South West direction. Predicted ground level

concentrations in the form of Isopleths are presented through Figures 5.1, Figure

5.2 and Figure 5.3. The input and output files of the ISCST3 modeling system for

the above-mentioned parameters are presented in Annexure 18.

5.3.3.1. Prediction of Air Quality Impacts- Particulate Matter

High efficiency ESPs will be installed to reduce the particulate matter from the

proposed boilers. As per the new standards for thermal power plants the outlet

concentration of ESP shall be limited to 30 mg/Nm3, and this was considered to





model. The PM emission rates from proposed coal fired boiler, chemical recovery

boiler and lime kiln areestimated as 1.3 g/s, 0.933 g/s and 0.3 g/s respectively.

The isopleths illustrating the dispersion phenomenon of particulate matter is

shown in Figure 5.1. The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs GLC of particulate matter

will be in the order of 1.59 μg/m3 at a distance of about 500 m in the downwind

direction from the stack and such concentrations were found to get diluted rapidly.

The predicted GLCs would get diluted rapidly within 2 km from the plant boundary

and diminished to insignificant range beyond 3.5 km from the emission source.

Referring to the predicted GLC it can be observed that GLC levels are concentrated

towards south west direction of the project site as the predominant wind blows

from north east during the study period. The envisaged resulting concentrations

during post project in the downwind settlements will be in the range of 59.32

μg/m3 to 79.23 μg/m3 in the nearby areas. The concentration of PM in the study

area during the post project scenario will be in the range of 58.18 μg/m3 to 87.27

μg/m3. The envisaged pollutant concentrations are observed to be below the

prescribed NAAQ standards of 100 µg/m3 which are presented in Table 5.5.

Table 5-5 Estimated Resultant GLC’s of Particulate Matter

Code Station Direction* Distance* (in km)

Particulate Matter (PM) (µg/m3)

GLCs due to MEP

Average Baseline

concentration

Post project concentration

AAQ1 Plant Site - 0 0.37 69 69.37

AAQ2 Banglifoliya SE 1.69 0.38 57.8 58.18

AAQ3 Bardipada SW 2.04 0.62 58.7 59.32

AAQ4 Moti Khervan W 5.04 0.02 62.7 62.72

AAQ5 Songadh SW 4.20 0.33 78.9 79.23

AAQ6 Amlipada NW 6.00 0.098 68.1 68.198

AAQ7 Patharda N 4.13 0.16 79.4 79.56

AAQ8 Bhimpura NE 1.44 0.77 86.5 87.27

National Ambient Air Quality standards- 100µg/m3





Figure 5-1 Predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of Particulate Matter within 10 km Radius of

the Study Area

Site Specific Wind Rose

Diagram for the Study Period

Predominant Wind direction is north-east to south-west.

The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs GLC of particulate matter will be in the order of 1.59 μg/m3 at a distance of about 800 m.

5.3.3.2. Prediction of Air Quality Impacts- Sulphur Dioxide

Air quality modeling was undertaken for uncontrolled emissions scenario and thus

the emission rates of 4 g/s, 18.6 g/s and 0.5 g/s have been considered from the

proposed power boiler, recovery boiler and lime kiln respectively in the present

study for predicting GLC of SO2. Control measures will be adopted at the source to

limit the SO2 emissions to 100 mg/Nm3 as per the standard norms.

The isopleths of the predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of SO2 within 10 km Radius of the

Study Area is presented in the Figure 5.2. Referring to the predicted GLC’s, it can

be observed that GLC levels of SO2 are concentrated towards south west direction

of the project site as the predominant wind blows from north east. The 2nd highest

predicted 24 hrs Ground Level Concentration (GLC) of sulphur dioxide in the

downwind direction will be in the order of 9.48 µg/m3 at a distance of about 2000

m, from the stacks and such concentrations would occur for minimal period of

Con

cen

trati

on

of

PM

in

µg/m

3





time. The envisaged resultant post project concentrations (Table 5.6) in the down-

wind villages will be in the range of 14.6 to 20.63 µg/m3. The concentration of SO2

in the study area during the post project scenario will be in the range 14.6 to 32.03

µg/m3. which will be below the prescribed NAAQ standard of 80 µg/m3.

Table 5-6Estimated Resultant GLC’s of Sulphur Dioxide


Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) (µg/m3)

GLCs due to MEP

Average Baseline

concentration


AAQ1 Plant Site - 0 0.11 15.5 15.61

AAQ2 Banglifoliya SE 1.69 3.01 15 18.01

AAQ3 Bardipada SW 2.04 5.05 14.1 19.15

AAQ4 Moti Khervan W 5.04 0.205 14.4 14.605

AAQ5 Songadh SW 4.20 2.63 18 20.63

AAQ6 Amlipada NW 6.00 0.514 16 16.514

AAQ7 Patharda N 4.13 1.212 23.1 24.312

AAQ8 Bhimpura NE 1.44 6.03 26 32.03

National Ambient Air Quality standards- 80µg/m3

Figure 5-2 Predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of Sulphur Dioxide within 10 km Radius of

the Study Area


Diagram for the Study

Period

Predominant Wind

direction is north-east

to south-west.

The 2nd highest

predicted 24 hrs GLC of

SO2 will be in the order

of 9.48 μg/m3 at a

distance of about 2000

m from the stacks.

Con

cen

trati

on

of

SO

2in

µg/m

3





5.3.3.3. Prediction of Air Quality Impacts -Oxides of Nitrogen

Air quality modelling was undertaken for uncontrolled emissions scenario and thus

the emission rates of 4 g/s, 9.33 g/s and 0.90 g/s have been considered from the

proposed power boiler, recovery boiler and lime kiln respectively in the present

study for predicting GLC of NOx.

The isopleths of the predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of NOx within 10 km Radius of the

Study Area is presented in the Figure 5.3. Referring to the predicted GLC it can be

observed that GLC levels of NOx are concentrated towards south west direction of

the project site as the predominant wind blows from north east. The 2nd highest

predicted 24 hrs GLC of NOx in the downwind direction will be in the order of 6.03

µg/m3 at a distance of about 900 m from the stacks. The envisaged resultant post

project concentrations in the down-wind villages (Table 5.7) will be in the range of

25.81 µg/m3 to 30.61 µg/m3. The concentration of NOx in the study area during the

post project scenario will be in the range of 25.81 µg/m3 to 32.52 µg/m3 which will

be below the prescribed NAAQ standard of 50 µg/m3.

Table 5-7 Estimated Resultant GLC’s of Oxides of Nitrogen


Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) (µg/m3)

GLCs due to

MEP

Average Baseline

concentration


AAQ1 Plant Site - 0 0.12 27.5 27.62

AAQ2 Banglifoliya SE 1.69 3.72 25.6 29.32

AAQ3 Bardipada SW 2.04 4.29

24.4 28.69

AAQ4 Moti Khervan

W 5.04 0.51 25.3 25.81

AAQ5 Songadh SW 4.20 1.71 28.9 30.61 AAQ6 Amlipada NW 6.00 0.52 27.5 28.02

AAQ7 Patharda N 4.13 0.74 28.1 28.84

AAQ8 Bhimpura NE 1.44 3.93 28.6 32.53 National Ambient Air Quality standards- 80µg/m3





Figure 5-3 Predicted 24-Hrs Avg. GLC’s of Oxides of Nitrogen within 10 km Radius of the Study Area


Diagram for the Study

Period

Predominant Wind direction is north-east to south-west.

The 2nd highest

predicted 24 hrs GLC

of NOx will be in the

order of 6.03 μg/m3 at

a distance of about

800 m from the stacks

5.3.3.4. Summary of Air Quality Modelling Results

Based on the findings of the detailed air quality modelling exercise, it has been

inferred that the resultant cumulative concentration for estimated air pollutant

emissions at around 10 Kms radius distance from proposed project will comply

with the NAAQ Standards. Since there are no ecologically sensitive locations

present in the down-wind direction of the Project site, environmental risks due to

release of emissions from the proposed units will be insignificant. Also, Fort

Songadh, a tourist attraction place is located at a distance of 4.2 km from project

site and no significant impact is observed. The summary of the predicted GLC’s is

predicted in Table 5.8.

Con

cen

trati

on

of N

Ox in

µg/m

3





Table 5-8 Summary of the Predicted GLCs in the Nearby Areas

Parameter

Peak Average Baseline

concentration (µg/m3)

Peak Predicted GLCs due to MEP (µg/m3)

Envisaged Peak

Resultant concentration

(µg/m3)

NAAQ Standards as

per CPCB (µg/m3)

PM10 86.5 1.59 88.09 100

SO2 26 9.48 35.48 80

NOX 28.9 6.03 34.93 80

5.3.4. Control of Air Emissions

Necessary efficient air pollution control equipment will be installed to control air

emissions from the boilers.


Matter (PM) emissions from the proposed boiler in the captive power plant. ESP will

be designed to achieve new Thermal Power Plant emission norms of 30 mg/Nm3 as

per MoEF&CC, December 2015 regulations. Imported coal and Indian coal with

sulphur content less than 1% will be utilized to reduce the SO2 emissions along

with lignite. In addition to this, A dry limestone injection system shall be installed

for the proposed CFBC boiler to meet the new SO2 emission norms of 100 mg/Nm3.

The proposed boiler will be designed with necessary NOx control system such as

NOX burners to meet the new NOX emission standards of 100 mg/Nm3. Stack(s)

with adequate height will be installed as per the CPCB guidelines for the proposed

boiler emissions. Continuous online stack emission monitoring unit will be

installed to monitor particulate matter, SO2 and NOX emissions from the proposed

boilers.

ESPs will be installed for the control of Particulate Matter (PM) from new recovery

boiler and new lime kiln. Stacks of adequate height will be installed for the

recovery boiler and lime kiln as per the minimum stack height norms by CPCB for

efficient dispersion of gases.

To control the wind-borne coal dust fugitive dust emissions, closed type storage

sheds and coal conveyer will be provided with water sprinkling system





arrangement. Necessary dust collection systems will be installed at coal handling,

conveyors and storage areas.

5.3.5. Non-Condensable Gases and Impacts

Air emissions of hydrogen sulfide, methyl mercaptan, dimethyl sulfide, dimethyl

disulfide, and other volatile sulfur compounds are the cause of the odor

characteristic of pulp mills utilizing the kraft process. The primary source of such

emissions are digester vents, pulp blow-tanks, Brown stock Washer and vents from

Multiple effect Evaporator. Typical estimation of the possible NCG and H2S

emissions from the facility are presented in Table 5.9.

Table 5-9 Estimated NCGs and H2S emissions from the Pulp Mill during Post Project

Scenario based on USEPA AP42 emission factors

Emission Sources

NCG H2S

Factor (Kg/T of dry pulp)

Kg/day Factor

(Kg/T of dry pulp)

Kg/day

for 460 tpd wood

pulp

for 460 tpd wood

pulp

Digester relief and blow tank 0.6 276 0.02 9.2

Brown stock Washer 0.2 92 0.01 4.6

Multiple effect Evaporator 0.05 23 0.55 253

Recovery boiler 1.5 690 6 2760

Total 2.35 1081 6.58 3027

As a part of MEP, it is proposed to install ECF Chemical Wood Pulp Mill for cooking

processes. Non-Condensable Gases (NCG) generated in pulp and recovery sections

will be controlled by installing NCG gas extraction system to collect the NCGs and

Mercaptans which will be incinerated in the lime kiln.

5.3.6. Traffic Impact Study

The site is well connected to State Highway SH-174 which lies adjacent to the

project site (Figure 5.4).

The existing State Highway is of width 8 m with two lanes that can accommodate

about 2400 Passenger Vehicles Units (PCUs) per hour.





Figure 5-4 Project Site Showing Nearest State Highway

At JKPL, Unit CPM the raw materials are transported through trucks that utilizes

the existing SH-174.

In order to assess the present traffic scenario in the study area traffic volume study

was conducted at two locations in Songadh. Based on the movement of trucks into

the existing facility, the location for the traffic volume survey was selected. It was

identified that the trucks utilize the Songadh-Ukai Road (toward Songadh) for

upward movement, and Songadh-Ukai (toward Ukai) for downward transportation,

for the conveyance of raw materials to and from the existing facility and the same

will be utilized during the post project scenario. The variations of traffic densities

depend upon the working days and time and also vary in day and night times.

The survey was conducted during normal working days of the week by avoiding

local holidays or abnormal situations to reflect the true picture of the traffic

densities. The traffic study was conducted at two locations for 48 hours.

The vehicles passing through sampling point was counted manually for a period of

48 hours. The vehicles were counted for every hour and recorded under the

respective category. The vehicles were categorized into two wheelers, tractors, auto

SH 174





rickshaws, Light Motor Vehicles (LMV) including car, jeep etc., Medium Motor

Vehicles (MMV) including bus, mini truck, mini bus etc and Heavy Motor Vehicles

(HMV) including lorry, tankers and all vehicles with more than 2 axles.

The Passenger Car Unit (PCU) factors considered for this study was referred from

the Journal of Indian Roads Congress (IRC), 65(1), September 20046. The PCU

factors considered for LMV, MMV and HMV is presented in the Table 5.10 and the

average traffic count for the two locations are shown in the Table 5.11.

Table 5-10 PCU Equivalent Factor

Type of vehicle PCU Conversion Factor

LMV 1 and 0.5

MMV 3.1

HMV 3.1

Table 5-11 Average Traffic Count for the Location

Location Total Average Traffic Count

Total PCU LMV PCU MMV PCU HMV PCU

Songadh Ukai Road (Toward Ukai)

143 143 49 152 51 158 453

Songadh Ukai Road (Toward Songadh)

80 80 59 183 54 167 430

As stated in chapter 3 of this report, raw-materials, finished products and coal will

be transported by road in trucks. The trucks to be used for transportation will be

PUC certified and will consume Bharat Stage IV fuel. In order to assess the impact

of additional traffic requirements due to the proposed MEP was estimated based on

the inventory as per the raw material requirement. Hence the additional number of

trucks required for the movement of raw materials during the post project scenario

is presented in the Table 5.12.

6 Satish Chandra, “Capacity Estimation Procedure for two-lane roads under mixed traffic conditions”, Journal of

Indian Roads Congress, 65(1), September 2004, pp. 139 – 171.





Table 5-12 Estimated Traffic Volume during Post Project Scenario

S. No.

Description

Quantity (tpd) Truck Capacity (t) Number of truck trips (per-day)

Existing After

Expansion Existing

After Expansion

Existing After

Expansion

1 Wood 1130 3074 20 20 56 154

2 Chemicals and others

125 209 10 10 12 21

3 Coal 658 1405 12 12 55 117

4 Total ash 72 115 8 8 9 14

5 WWTP Sludge 15 55 8 8 2 7

6 Lime Sludge 60 40 8 8 8 5

7 Finished product 480 1080 20 20 24 54

Total Trucks Per day 166 372

Therefore, from the above Table, it can be noted that additional 200 trucks are

envisaged post MEP which is equivalent to 26 PCU/hr considering 3.1 as the PCU

factor for HMV (Heavy Motor Vehicles). The additional 26 PCU/hr can be easily

accommodated in the existing road (SH-174) Post MEP and thus impacts due to

increase in traffic is not envisaged.

5.3.7. Noise Emissions and Compliance Status

The major noise emitting sources at the project site are from proposed new Board

machine, Turbo Generator and Chipper. Board Machine will be housed inside

building and Entire Turbo Generators will be housed in co-generation power house

with suitable acoustic enclosure. Hence, the expected noise levels outside the room

will be maintained around 75 dB (A)and the same noise power levels are used to

predict the propagation of noise levels due to the proposed power house (boiler and

turbo generator) and new Board machine. Whereas about 85 dB(A) of noise is

considered as noise power level input from the chipper section for the noise

modeling study.

According to the environmental regulations, industrial facilities should adopt

sound noise abatement and control program to meet the following criteria. Sound

pressure levels at the property boundary should be less than 75 dB (A) during

daytime hours and 70 dB (A) during night time hours. Noise levels near the work-

zone areas should comply with a maximum permissible level of 85 dB (A). As a part





of this EIA study, a noise propagation modeling was undertaken to establish the

abated noise levels at the facility boundary. Noise propagation from proposed

power house (boiler and turbo generator),Board machine and Chipper Section have

been modeled based on the international outdoor noise propagation standards.

ISO 9613-1:1996 Acoustics- attenuation of sound during propagation

outdoors- Part 1: Calculation of the absorption of sound by the atmosphere

ISO 9613-2:1996 Acoustics- attenuation of sound during propagation

outdoors- Part 2: General method of calculation

Noise propagation software model, Noise Sim Version 2.1 has been used for

estimating the sound pressure levels due to cumulative dispersion of noise

emissions from the designated sources. Predicted sound pressure levels in around

the proposed plant due to operation of the facility are presented in Figure 5.5 It

can be inferred from the modeled data that the increment in sound pressure levels

at the facility boundary will be below 45 dB (A), which is well within the stipulated

threshold noise level of 75 dB (A) for industrial areas. Noise levels outside the

facility boundary will be further attenuated due to the proposed green belt all along

the plant boundary. Based on this noise modelling analysis, it has been concluded

that the additional noise emissions from the proposed project is insignificant and

well within the standards prescribed by the CPCB.

Figure 5-5 Predicted Noise Levels from the Proposed Project





5.3.8. Impact on Water Environment

5.3.8.1. Water Withdrawl Permission

Fresh Water Consumption for the proposed MEP will be increased from existing

consumption of 20,500 m3/day to 37,000 m3 day. Water allocation from Narmada

W.R.W.S and Kalpasar Department is about 5 MGD (22,730 m3/day). Necessary in-

principle permission for 10 MGD has been obtained from the concerned authority

for the drawl of additional fresh water. Ukai dam has a storage capacity of about

7,400 Million m3. Ukai left bank canal is supplying about 35 m3/sec (3 million

m3/day) to more than 65,000 ha of land. Considering water demand for irrigation

needs of 30 m3/ha, about 2 million m3/day of water is utilized for irrigation needs.

Therefore, there is abundant water available for industrial and commercial use in

the region from Ukai dam.





5.3.8.2. Water Balance for Post MEP scenario

In the current operations, JKPL, Unit CPM could bring down the fresh water

consumption for the plant to a level of 20,500 m3/day equivalent to around 40

m3/t of paper/board. The specific water consumption per tonne of paper/board

production will reduce considerably from 40m3/T to 32 m3/T, post MEP due to the

adoption of ECF Bleaching technologies and other efficient water use processes

and water conservation operations. As part of MEP, the following major measures

will be adopted to achieve the specific fresh water demand in the plant during the

post project scenario:

Increasing the quantity of treated wastewater reuse/recycling by 2000 m3/day

Reusing and recycling the wastewater generated from the proposed multi-layer

coated board machine unit

Collection of foul condensates from the stripper and reusing for sprinkler system at

coal and wood yard

The water balance for the proposed MEP is presented in the Table 5.13.

Table 5-13 Water Balance for the Proposed MEP

SL.No

Description Fresh Water

make-up (m3/day) Evaporation

(m3/day) Wastewater to ETP

(m3/day)

1

Existing Board machine and paper machine

9,600 600 9000

2 New Board machine 6,000 700 5,300

3 Chemical Pulp Mill 12,000 1200 10,800

4 BCTMP 2,000 2000 No wastewater from BCTMP

5 Chemical Recovery Plant 2,000 500 2,500

6 Power Plant 3,000 900 2,100

7 Others 400 100 300

Total for Plant 35,000 5,900 30,000

8 Domestic 2,000 Sewage to Proposed STP

Total water requirement

37,000





Figure 5-6 Water Balance Diagram for the Proposed MEP

Existing Board and Paper Machine

New BoardMachines

Power Plant

Domestic

Fresh Water Requiremen

t

Treated Water reuse in process, dust suppression

& fire water etc.

37,000

9,600

6,000

12,000

2,000

2,000

2000

1200

700

600

ETP

9,000

5,300

2,500

30,000

2,100

27,800 Treated

wastewater for Land Irrigation

BCTMP

Chemical Recovery Plant

Chemical Pulp Mill

Others

3,000

400

2,000

500

900

100

Sewage to proposed STP

300

10,800

200

ETP Sludge loss

2,000





5.3.8.3. Wastewater Generation and Treatment Facilities

The total wastewater generated from the existing facility of JKPL Unit CPM is about

17,500 m3/day which is treated in the existing Activated Sludge Biological

Treatment plant of capacity 30,000 m3/day.

Post MEP, the total wastewater generation during the post MEP scenario will be in

the order of 30,000 m3/day. The specific wastewater generation per tonne of

paper/board production will reduce from 36 m3/T to 29 m3/T. In addition to this,

due to the adoption of ECF Bleaching operations, the specific COD load on the ETP

will reduce considerably. The existing ETP of capacity 30,000 m3/day will be

upgraded with addition of required new pollution abatement equipment and

processes to meet the additional hydraulic volumes during the post MEP.

5.3.8.4. Upgradation of Existing ETP

As a part of MEP, it is proposed to segregate the streams from pulp and

paper/board mill and treat separately. In addition to the existing ETP, a new ETP

shall be installed for treating the effluents upto the tertiary level.

The existing ETP will be large enough to handle proposed non-color effluents from

paper and board machines. Hence it is recommended to segregate the total

wastewater from the mill into the following streams:

Stream 1: Pulp mill wastewater (coloured and High COD streams)

Stream 2: Paper mill wastewater (Non-coloured and Low COD streams)

Stream 3: Utilities, DM plant rejects, CT blowdowns etc.

Existing ETP shall be utilized for Paper and board mill wastewater (Stream 3)

treatment. Pulp mill wastewater (Stream 2) shall be treated in a new biological unit

with DAF (for colour removal). Other utilities wastewater (Stream 1) shall be treated

in a dedicated clarifier. The treated wastewater from all the above streams shall be

collected in monitoring pond conforming to the discharge standards of GPCB.

The recommended design of the ETP scheme is presented in the Figure 5.7





Figure 5-7 Recommended ETP Scheme for the proposed Project

Flow: 13,300 m3/day TSS: 7980 kg/day

COD; 11,970 kg/day

Flow: 14,300 m3/day TSS: 14,300 kg/day

COD; 8,580 kg/day

Flow: 29,800 m3/day TSS: <100 mg/l COD:<200 mg/l TDS: <2100 mg/l

Flow: 2,400 m3/day TSS: 250 kg/day

TDS: 12,500 kg/day EQ

Clarifier-2 Aeration tank 2 (Conventional ASP or MBR

or Hybrid system)

Aeration tank 1 Existing Aeration Tank

Existing

Clarifier

DAF and

Colour

removal

Final combined

collection tank (monitoring pond)

Stream 3:

Utilities and

DM plant etc

Stream 1:

Pulp Mill

Streams

Stream 2:

Paper mill

streams

Tertiary

Treatment





The treated wastewater characteristics Post MEP is presented in the Table 5.14.

Table 5-14 Treated Wastewater Characteristics Post MEP

Description Unit Paper and

board

Pulp mill and other streams

Utilities Combined

treated wastewater

Wastewater flow m3/day 14300 13300 2400 30000

TSS mg/l 100 100 100 100

TDS mg/l 1650 2640 5500 <2100

BOD mg/l 15 26 0 19

COD mg/l 108 210 0 < 200

AOX mg/l - - - <2

AOX Kg/T of paper

- - - 0.06

SAR

<6

The treated wastewater quality will be maintained within the standards as

prescribed by GPCB/CPCB. Bio Assay tests will be conducted to evaluate the effect

of discharge of treated wastewater caused on the fish population. Dedicated STP is

proposed to be installed to treat the domestic sewage generated from the colony

and plant.

5.3.8.5. AOx levels in the Treated Wastewater

The Adsorbable Organic Halides (AOx) are adsorbable compounds containing

chlorine, bromine or iodine. The formation of these compounds is traceable to the

use of chlorine and chlorinated compounds in the various industrial processes

including the bleaching process in the pulp and paper industries. As per MEP, the

existing older generation chemical wood pulp mill will be replaced with ECF

(Elemental Chlorine Free) pulp mill. Hence the AOx levels will be maintained within

the GPCB limit of 8 mg/l and 1 kg/T of paper production as per EPA Notifications.

In the existing facility AOx levels in the treated wastewater is about 5.79 as against

the GPCB limit of 8 mg/l.

Similarly Post MEP the AOx levels will be maintained within 8 mg/l due to the

following reasons;





New Chemical Recovery Boiler will help better cooking of chips and reduce

the kappa no of pulp

Kappa no. of the unbleached pulp will be maintained on the lower side

Hydrogen Peroxide in bleaching sequence instead of chlorine will help to

achieve desired brightness

Oxygen De-lignification and Chlorine Dioxide Bleaching will be adopted as

per existing practice

The details of AOx levels in the treated wastewater is presented in the Table 5.15.

Table 5-15 AOx levels in Treated Wastewater Post MEP

Parameter Units Existing facility

Post MEP Remarks

Bleached Chemical Pulp capacity

AD-TPD 175 460 Bleaching sequence: Existing mill: O-CD-EOP-DP Post MEP: O-A/D-EOP-DP

Paper/board capacity

TPD 480 1080 Increase in production capacity during post MEP.

Wastewater discharge

m3/day 17,500 30,000 Increase in wastewater generation during post MEP

AOx levels mg/l 5.7 <8

As per EU Bench-mark report for elemental chloride free bleaching with oxygen de-lignification process, AOX levels in wastewater will be less than 8 mg/l.

AOx mass discharge

Kg/day 99 240 Reduction in AOx mass discharge will be achieved during post MEP.

AOx – specific mass

Kg/T of pulp

0.56 0.52 No specific standard

AOx – specific mass

Kg/T of paper

0.20 0.22 Values will be maintained less than 1 Kg/T of paper as per EPA standards.

5.3.8.6. Treated Wastewater Utilization

The treated wastewater will be utilized for various applications as per the existing

practices such as chips washing, coal dust scrubbing, bamboo wetting, ash dust

suppression and floor washing and reusing in process areas such as pulp mill, re-

causticizing unit, utilities including cooling tower etc.





Currently, the balance treated wastewater generated from the existing mill is

utilized for land irrigation to a maximum possible extent covering about 1050 acres

of land in the nearby areas. All efforts will be made to utilize the additional

wastewater generated from the expansion project for irrigation in the nearby areas

during the post project scenario. The existing treated effluent supply pipe network

will be augmented to meet the additional hydraulic volumes. About 28,000 m3/day

of treated wastewater will be generated during post MEP. Considering the rate of

application as 45 m3/ha (clayey soil) as per the MoEF&CC notification dated 14th

January 2016, about 1525 acres of land is required for the land irrigation.

Therefore, additional land of 475 acres is required to discharge the additional

treated wastewater for land irrigation. Thus, CPM unit has approached nearby

farmers to meet the additional land requirement for reusing the treated wastewater

for irrigation and a sample MoU with farmers for additional land for irrigation is

attached as Annexure 19. Additional pumping and pipeline systems will be

installed for disposal of additional treated wastewater for irrigation in the area.

However, considering the challenges in utilizing 100% of the treated wastewater

quantity for irrigation due to variations in the cropping pattern, JKPL, Unit CPM

requests MoEF&CC to grant permission to discharge treated wastewater of about

15 % into Goda Nala during off crop seasons and monsoon after conforming to the

discharge standards prescribed by GPCB.

The details of the treated wastewater utilization during monsoon and non-monsoon

period is presented in the Table 5.16.

Table 5-16 Utilization of Treated Wastewater (Monsoon and Non-Monsoon Period)

Category

Monsoon Season Non- Monsoon Period (100 % utilization for

land irrigation)

m³/day m3/day

Wastewater to ETP 30,000 30,000

ETP sludge loss 200 200

Treated wastewater from ETP 29,800 29,800

Treated wastewater Recycle to Process 2,000 2,000

Treated wastewater discharged for Land Irrigation/river disposal

27,800 27,800





Category

Monsoon Season Non- Monsoon Period (100 % utilization for

land irrigation)

m³/day m3/day

Wastewater disposal to River @ 20% of the total

5560 0

Wastewater disposal to irrigation 22,240 27,800

Land requirement for irrigation @ 45 m3/ha during non-monsoon season

1525 1525

Land available for irrigation (as per PFR) - Acres

1050 1050

Additional land required for irrigation - Acres

475 475

Table 5-17 Treated Wastewater Application Rates as per MoEF&CC notification dated

14th January 2016 for different soil conditions

SI. No Soil Texture Loading Rate in m3/ha/day

1 Sandy 225 to 280

2 Sandy Loam 170 to 225

3 Loam 110 to 170

4 Clay Loam 55 to 110

5 Clay 35 to 55

5.3.8.7. Impact on River Tapi

It is proposed to utilize 100% of total treated wastewater generation for land

irrigation. However, during monsoon seasons and off crop seasons the process

becomes non-feasible. Hence, during these periods, about 20 % of the treated

wastewater (5,500 m3/day) will be discharged into the Goda Nalah after conforming

to the discharge standards prescribed by GPCB. Goda Nalah joins River Tapi at

about 8 km distance from the point of discharge. Therefore, there will be a

considerable dilution occurring at the Nalah before the point of confluence at the

River Tapi.

Also, JKPL had engaged Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) Mumbai to conduct a

study for the assessment of treated wastewater discharge from JKPL, unit CPM

and water quality assessment of Goda Nala and River Tapi. Based on the results of

the study conducted in the year 2015, it is indicated that treated wastewater

discharge from JKPL doesnot have much impact at the confluence point with River

Tapi. Also, it is concluded in the study that Goda Nala has no significant influence





on river water quality at the sampling point immediately downstream of the

confluence point of Goda Nala and Tapi River.

River Tapi

The River Tapi is perennial in nature with length of about 724 km and catchment

area of about 62225 sq. Km. The drainage area in Gujarat is about 3,837 sq. km

which constitutes to about 5.9 %. Ukai Dam is located across the Tapi River near

Ukai Village in Surat Disctrict. The photgraphs of the River area is presented in the

Figure 5.8.

Figure 5-8 Photographs of River Tapi in the Study Area





As per the baseline study, the river water quality at the upstream and downstream

is within the permissible limits as per Drinking water IS:1500-2012 standards. The

dissolved oxygen is about 6 mg/l. BOD and COD levels are within 5 and 25 mg/l

respectively for upstream and downstream sides.

It is assumed that after discharge of treated wastewater into the river, the entire

wastewater will get mixed with the background river water and will atain resultant

BOD, DO and temperature. The following formula was adopted to estimate the

resultant concentrations.

.

Where,

C1 =Concentration river water (BOD or DO or temperature of river water)

Q1=Discharge of river

Ukai Dam

River Tapi

Project Site





C2= Concentration of effluent (BOD or DO or temperature of effluent)

Q2=Discharge of Effluent

Table 5-18 River Water Quality due to the discharge of treated wastewater

SI No Description Unit Value

1 Total Effluent Discharge m3/day 5,500

2 Flow of River7 MCum/day 877

3 BOD of Treated wastewater mg/l 30

4 Background BOD of River mg/l 5

5 DO at the point of discharge mg/l 2

6 DO of River mg/l 6

7 Estimated BOD of Mix mg/l 5

8 Estimated DO of Mix mg/l 6

From the above table it can be inferred that no significant impact on River quality

is envisaged due to the discharge of 20 % of total treated wastewater (5500 m3/day)

during the off crop and monsoon seasons.

5.3.8.8. Impact on Soil Quality due to Utilization of Treated Wastewater

for Land Irrigation

As per the existing scenario, about 17,000 m3/day of treated wastewater is utilized

for irrigation in 1050 acres of land in the area. Various types of crops such as

sugar cane, paddy, vegetables etc are grown in the areas where treated wastewater

is used for irrigation by the farmers. Apart from treated wastewater, farmers are

also utilizing the fresh water from Ukai lest bank canal for irrigation in the area.

Based on the baseline study results, parameters such as Chlorides, Sodium, Mg

and Ca are reported to be in the order of 55 to 85 mg/100g, 31-48mg/kg, 18-35

mg/100g and 45-73 mg/100g respectively. The estimated SAR value of 6.5 is well

below the acceptable level of 10 as per ICARC.

Soil quality in the study area vs. areas with application of treated wastewater are

presented in the following Table 5.19.

7http://www.india-wris.nrsc.gov.in/wrpinfo/index.php?title=Tapi

http://www.india-wris.nrsc.gov.in/wrpinfo/index.php?title=Tapi





Table 5-19 Soil Quality in the Study Area v/s areas with Application of treated

Wastewater

Parameter Units

Soil samples collected in 10Km radius

Samples collected

from effluent irrigation

areas

Remarks

pH - 7.2 to 8.3 7.5 to 8.3 Optimum pH range for most plants is between 5.5 and 7.5

Conductivity μs/cm 0.2 to 0.52 0.28 to 0.36

An electrical conductivity more than 0.4 μs/cm at 25 °C of saturated soil extract is the generally accepted limit above which soils are classed as ‘saline’.8.

Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP)

% 20 to 55 40 to 47

An exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP) of 15 or more is the generally accepted limit above which soils are classed as ‘sodic’.

In addition, JKPL has engaged Navsari Agriculture University (NAU) to carry out

the assessment study of the quality of treated effluent and its effect on soil and

crop pattern by its utilization for agricultural crops. Based on the study, it was

concluded that treated wastewater is most suitable for irrigation in the area and as

per test report from NAU dated 17/12/2018 no contamination of soil is indicated

due to the utilization of treated wastewater.

5.3.8.9. Impact of TDS on Ground Water due to the utilization of treated

wastewater for land irrigation

It is proposed to utilize 100 % of the treated wastewater for land irrigation during

non-monsoon seasons. About 1525 acres of land will be irrigated utilizing 27,800

m3/day of treated wastewater @ 45 m3/ha/day.

8http://www.fao.org/docrep/005/y4263e/y4263e0e.htm

http://www.fao.org/docrep/005/y4263e/y4263e0e.htm





Therefore, ground water quality modelling has been undertaken for the worst-case

scenario considering 1800 mg/l of TDS from the treated wastewater to evaluate the

impact of TDS from the treated wastewater on the groundwater.

The site is located in Shallow, Moderately drained, Clayey soils. The soil sample

collected from the project site during the study period also indicates that the

porosity of the soil is 45% which indicates moderate permeability. As per the

ground water quality monitoring studies conducted in the study area as part of

baseline environmental studies, the TDS of about 400 mg/L was observed in the

area where treated wastewater was utilized for irrigation and the same value was

considered for modelling studies to evaluate the impact on ground water.

The Hydraulic Gradient is estimated from the water table contour. The estimated

pre- monsoon hydraulic gradient of 5.8 m/km is considered with ground water

level of 5.5 m. The effective porosity of the formation is considered as 45 %. The

transmissivity of the shallow aquifer is around 20 sq.m/day. The hydraulic

conductivity is estimated as 0.90 m/day. The velocity of the ground water is

computed as 0.015 m/day.

Based on the aquifer parameters, the model is computed for 10-year period for a

worst-case scenario without considering the dilution factor during the monsoon

period. As per the output of the model, the highest predicted value of TDS in the

ground water in the study area of the project site is 840 mg/L. However, it can be

observed that the value of TDS concentration is well within the permissible range

of 2000 mg/L as per Drinking Water Standards (IS 10500:2012), such

concentrations are less likely to occur considering the soil conditions and dilution

during monsoon. Also, as per the existing study data, no such increase in TDS

concentrations are observed over a period of 10 years. The above indicates that

there would be no adverse impact on ground water during the post project

scenario.

In addition, considering the return seepage of 30 % for the total treated wastewater

discharge of 27,800 m3/day, about 8100 m3/day is estimated as return seepage

water which will further increase the ground water level in the irrigated area.





The predicted dispersion model of TDS in the Ground water is presented in the

Figure 5.9.

Figure 5-9 Predicted dispersion model of TDS in the Ground water

5.3.9. Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The expected increase in the solid and hazardous waste due to proposed

MEP and the respective proposed disposal practices are presented in the

Table 5.20.





Disposal

1 Bamboo/Wood Dust

20 40 60

Considering the carbon content, the wood dust will be used as alternative fuel in Boiler as per existing practice








Disposal

2 Fly Ash 120 300 420

Will be used for Cement/Brick manufacturing as per existing practice Existing MoUs will be further augmented (Annexure 12)

3 Lime Sludge/Grit

60 - 40

Due to the installation of new lime kiln along with existing one and

operating lime kiln with full capacity, only lime grit will be generated which will be used as backfilling material at abandoned stone quarry as per existing practice. Existing MoUs will be further augmented

4 ETP Sludge 16 40 56 Will be sold to board manufacturers as per existing practice.

6 Spent Oil 725

kg/Month 1000

kg/Month 1725

kg/Month

Will be disposed to authorized recyclers as per existing practice. Existing MoUs will be further augmented

5.3.10. Impacts on Ecological Environment

The construction activities of new installations will be carried out in the existing

mill premises. This phase does involve minor changes in the terrain. Impacts on

flora during construction period are envisaged only in close vicinity of proposed

development due to vehicular movements. However, JKPL Unit CPM has developed

green cover around the periphery of the plant which will act as buffer zone and will

help in mitigating impacts on ecology in vicinity.

Impacts on flora are envisaged only in close vicinity of proposed development due

to emissions and vehicular movements. However, further development of greenbelt

will attenuate any further impact. Greenbelt development will enhance floral





diversity and proposed development will have positive impact on ecology by

providing suitable habitats for avifauna, reptiles and arboreal mammals.

5.3.11. Impacts on Socio Economic Environment

The proposed expansion project is to increase the production capacity of paper

along with the increase in the inhouse pulp production. The proposed project does

not envisage any additional land requirement and the project is to be developed

within the existing site premises. Hence, Rehabilitation and Resettlement process

is not applicable under “The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land

Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013”. Some of the observations or

findings based on the study are listed below. The workable mitigation plan to be

developed to mitigate any impacts if any.

Impact on Ground Water Quality:

The Central Pulp Mill unit is active since year 1966, Tapi district is dominated by

the tribal population who are mainly agrarian population. Though Tapi River and

Ukai dam are present within the study area due to inadequate irrigation schemes

and infrastructure, the farmers are mostly dependent on monsoon. On demand of

water for irrigation by the local farmers the surplus treated waste water is supplied

to the nearby villages for irrigation. Therefore, it is required to monitor the quality

of treated wastewater, soil and ground water regularly to avoid any contamination.

Impact on Odour:

Odour problem reported by the villages adjacent to the project site are negligible

and not causing any major concern when compared to the economic development,

as majority of the people in the study area are dependent on the CPM for their

livelihood either directly or indirectly.

Impact on Local Employability:

The existing project had developed a considerable amount of employment

opportunities and various economic activities through small business and trade.

About50-60% of the population dependent on CPM and GSECL directly or

indirectly. The proposed project will have considerable amounts of beneficial

impact in the region by way of employment and business opportunities both during

the construction phase and operation phase.





Agro Forestry and Farm Forestry:

In addition to the local economic activity, company is also promoting agro forestry

as the local sustainable sources of raw material through which create advantages

of local economic development. Under the ‘Agro Forestry and Farm Forestry

Initiatives’ the company had included around 56000 hectares of land under

cultivation and about 7000 hectares of land are added every year under the

scheme to meet the future demand of the plant. The main aim of the project is to

include the barren and unproductive land under cultivation through local farmers

and ensuring the raw material supply locally. The project developed a considerable

amount of economic activity among the people around 350km of the CPM. In

addition, also increased employment opportunities among the local people in the

plantation farms. This program also reduces the import of raw material. Under the

program about 68,000 farmers have been enrolled and 100% of the wood

requirement is sourced through the Agro Forestry and Farm Forestry plantations.

Impact on Traffic:

100% of the raw material i.e. Pulp Wood, Coal and other raw materials and

finished goods are transported through Trucks. Considering the proposed

production expansion and current traffic volume as per Traffic Assessment study is

conducted under the EIA study to estimate the increase in the number of trucks in

the existing road and impact on the traffic due to the proposed expansion was

found to be insignificant.



Chapter-6, Analysis of Alternatives


6. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

6.1. Introduction

The process of analysis involves identifying the constraints, avoiding activities

causing adverse impact and maintaining the economic feasibility. The

environmentally sound technologies proposed under the capacity enhancement

project are discussed under this section.

The proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) includes installation of new paper Multi-

Layer Coated board machine, chemical wood pulp mill (shifted from Rayagada unit

and reinstalled), installation of BCTMP Mill, DIP and SFT Plants, installation of

new chemical boiler, augmentation of co-generation plant, water treatment plant,

effluent treatment plant and supporting infrastructure.

A comparative analysis of various alternatives was considered to avoid or minimize

the impacts that would be inevitable in the process. The process of analysis

involves identifying the constraints, avoiding activities causing adverse impact and

maintaining the economic feasibility. Environment Protection and management are

integral part of JKPL’s activities. With regards to this, environmentally sound

technologies are proposed under the MEP.

The range of alternatives selected for the purpose of analysis includes:

Site alternative

Technology alternative

6.2. Site Alternative

As the JKPL, Unit CPM site has adequate space for project facilities and has well

developed infrastructure like water intake, approach roads, internal roads, offices

etc., no alternate site is considered.

6.3. Technology Alternative

The technology selected in the proposed expansion project is the improved version

of existing technologies currently being used by JKPL.





Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) chemical wood pulp mill proposed under the MEP

based on chlorine dioxide is the superior choice for pulp and paper manufacturing.

The technology is proven in terms of pollution prevention, resource conservation

and product quality with a strong market demand. ECF pulp provides strong paper

products and the technology places a lower strain on forest resources. The existing

Bleached Hard Wood Pulp (HWP) mill will be replaced with Rapid Displacement

Heating (RDH) Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) Hard Wood Pulp (HWP) mill which

will be shifted from JKPL Rayagada unit and re-installed with upgradation.

One of the key benefits of kraft process compared with other alternatives is the

capability to recover the cooking chemicals and to generate the energy need in the

process from the black liquor in a very efficient way, which is why a new, more

efficient recovery boiler will be installed, and more bio-fuel based energy will be

used. Recovery island will consist of falling film evaporator, high efficiency recovery

boiler, causticizer plant having CD and LM filters for better efficiency and modern

lime kiln, etc.

The modernization and capacity building will help to consolidate and further

improve on the operational and financial performance. Thus, meeting the

increasing demands of paper board, and developing into a more environmentally

friendly technology. Modernization and Expansion of existing plant includes

adopting Best Available Technologies (BAT) which will help to enhance to

environmental performance coupled with sustainable economic growth of the plant.

The salient features of the proposed MEP are as below;

Replacing existing chlorine-based pulp mill with ECF pulp mill

Replacing existing conventional old digesters with state-of-the-art RDH

cooking


boiler









High pressure, high efficiency FBC boiler for better power generation

through co-generation


High efficiency ESP for coal fired boiler boiler, Recovery boiler and Lime kiln

to meet stringent Particulate Matter (PM) norms



Producer Gas (PG) plant to fire gas in lime kiln to reduce consumption of

costly furnace oil.



Upgradation of Wastewater treatment plant by segregating the colored and

non-colored effluents with tertiary treatment



Chapter-7, Environmental Monitoring Plan


7. ENVIROMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

7.1 Introduction

Environmental monitoring is essential to ensure that environmental impacts are

prevented and mitigated by following the Environmental Management Plan that is

formulated based on the baseline data collected on various environmental

parameters and the prediction of impacts. An Environmental Monitoring Plan

provides feedback about the difference between actual environmental scenario and

the impacts of the project on the environment and helps to judge the adequacy of

the mitigation measures in protecting the environment.

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters is of immense importance to

assess the status of environment during plant operation. With the knowledge of

baseline conditions, the monitoring program will serve as an indicator for any

deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of the project, to enable

taking up suitable mitigative steps in time to safeguard the environment.

Monitoring is as important as that of control of pollution since the efficiency of

control measures can be determined only by monitoring.

7.2 Objectives of Environmental Monitoring Plan

The key issues associated with the life cycle of a project are the monitoring of

environmental parameters. Following three types of Environmental Monitoring are

associated with the project, which includes

a) Baseline Monitoring

b) Effects / Impacts Monitoring and

c) Compliance Monitoring

7.1.1. Baseline Monitoring

Baseline monitoring deals with the measurement of environmental variables during

pre-project period to determine existing conditions, ranges of variation and process

of change.





Regional laboratories of GPCB, monitor the quality of environmental parameters on

regular basis. Besides, four numbers of PM10, PM2.5, and gas samplers are installed

and air quality is monitored once in a month internally and the data is submitted

to GPCB and CPCB.

Selection of monitoring stations for Environmental Monitoring:

Under the Environment Monitoring Plan of JKPL, Unit CPM the sampling stations

for Ambient Air Quality is selected based on the wind direction at the time of

sampling.

7.1.2. Effects/Impact Monitoring:

It involves measurement of environmental variables during construction and

operation phase of the project to assess the impact that may have been caused by

the project.

7.3 Compliance Monitoring:

It takes the form of periodic sampling and continuous measurement of level of

pollutant emissions in the air, waste discharge on land or water, level of noise to

ensure that standards are met.

The basic objective of Environment Monitoring Program is:

To develop a database against which the short term and long-term

environmental impacts of the project can be determined.

To ensure implementation of mitigation measures during project

implementation.

To evaluate the effectiveness of the mitigation measures implemented

through periodic monitoring.

To evaluate and ensure the statutory compliance of the project with respect

to various environmental parameters.

To define the responsibilities of the project proponents and environmental

monitors and to ensure effective communication of environmental issues

amongst them.

To provide feedback to the decision makers about the effectiveness of their

actions.





To determine the project’s actual environmental impacts so that

modifications can be made to mitigate the impacts.

To identify the need for enforcement action before irreversible environmental

damage occurs.

To provide scientific information about the response of an ecosystem to a

given set of human activities and mitigation measures.

7.4 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Monitoring shall ensure that commitments are being met. This may take the form

of direct measurement and recording of quantitative information, such as amounts

and concentrations of discharges, emissions and wastes, for measurement against

corporate or statutory standards, consent limits or targets. It may also require

measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity of a site using

ecological/biological, physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring may include

socio-economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even assessment of

complaints.

7.5 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

JKPL, Unit CPM is committed for environmental protection and thus the facility

has implemented robust environmental monitoring programs to achieve the

regulatory compliance and beyond in the existing facility. The same monitoring

program shall be adopted for the proposed MEP. The existing monitoring programs

implemented in the facility are as follows;

Online Monitoring systems are installed in all the stacks.

Four numbers of PM10, PM2.5, and gas samplers are procured and air quality

is being monitored once in a month and the data is regularly submitted to

GPCB.

In addition to this, JKPL has installed manual board depicting the critical

pollutant levels at the main entrance of the unit in the public domain.

Regular monitoring of fugitive emission levels are measured in chipper area,

Paper Machine rewinder area, coal handling and SPCC area and are

regularly monitored by NABL certified 3rd party Lab and recorded.





Monthly monitoring of noise emissions at 15 locations in the existing plant

area is carried out.

Wastewater quality parameters are monitored on daily basis at the JKPM

central lab. An online wastewater quality monitoring system is installed and

the data is submitted to GPCB/ CPCB server.

In addition to this, treated wastewater is getting analyzed by NABL/GPCB

accredited lab every month by third party. Online monitoring systems are

installed on all ESPs and also ETP outlet.

AOx levels in the treated wastewater is monitored Six Monthly by the

external qualified laboratory.

Soil quality monitoring is undertaken yearly once by Department of Soil

Science and Agro Chemistry, Navsari Agricultural University where treated

wastewater is utilized for land irrigation.

Ground water monitoring is carried out quarterly from bore wells at the

areas where treated wastewater is utilized for land irrigation at 4 locations.

The following monitoring program will be implemented for the proposed expansion

project as against the existing monitoring programs based on baseline data

compliances.

Table 7-1 Environmental Monitoring Program

Environmental

Component Monitoring Type

Monitoring Location

Monitoring/ recording Frequency

Monitoring Program for

Proposed Project

Air Environment

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx)

4 locations inside the Project site

Internally Monthly once and by NABL certified lab

Existing practices will be continued including the monitoring of the proposed chemical recovery boiler.

Stack Monitoring (SO2, NOx, CO, PM)

All Stacks (4 power boilers, recovery boiler and lime kiln)

Continuous

by Online continuous Monitoring

system. Monthly once

by NABL certified

External Lab and

periodically by GPCB.





Environmental

Component Monitoring Type

Monitoring Location

Monitoring/ recording Frequency

Monitoring Program for

Proposed Project

Fugitive Emissions Monitoring

Across plant premises

Monthly

Noise Environment

Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring (Existing ambient noise level in Leq)

15 locations in the plant premises

Monthly once by NABL certified

External Lab

Existing practices will be continued

Water Environment

Influent and Effluent Quality

Monitoring for relevant parameters

Inlet and

Outlet from ETP

Periodically by

GPCB and External Lab


Treated Effluent Quality (pH, BOD, COD, Total Suspended Solids)

Treated Effluent

Continuous Existing practices will be continued

Treated Effluent Quality (pH, BOD, COD, Total Suspended Solids, Oil & Grease)

Treated Sewage

Periodically

STP will be installed. Treated

sewage will be monitored

Ground water analysis

Irrigation Area at 4 locations

Quarterly Existing practices will be continued

Soil Environment

Soil Quality Monitoring (pH, Texture, Electrical Conductivity, Organic Matter, Nitrogen, Phosphate, Sodium, Calcium, Potassium and Magnesium

Irrigation Area

Periodically by Navsari

Agricultural University


7.6 Data Analysis

The monitored data will be analyzed and compared with the baseline levels as

established in the EIA study and the regulatory standards specified by different

government agencies. The standards against which the different environment

components will be compared are as per Table 7.2.





Table 7-2 Recommended Environmental Monitoring Plan

S.No Component Applicable Standards

1 Ambient Air Quality National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), Central Pollution Control Board, Gujarat Pollution Control Board GPCB)

2 Noise Quality Ambient Air Quality Standards with respect to Noise, CPCB

3 Surface Water Quality

IS:2296: Class ‘C’ Water, CPCB

4 Groundwater Quality IS: 10500 Standards, BIS

5 Soil Quality --

6 Treated wastewater CPCB Industrial effluent standards

7.7 Reporting Schedule

The monitoring results of the different environmental components will be analyzed

and compiled report will be sent to Regional office MoEF&CC and concerned

authorities on monthly basis. PM10, PM2.5, SOx, NOx, BOD, COD, TSS will be

online and logged on to GPCB / CPCB web portals. The report will also list the

project activities along with the environmental mitigation measures and will

evaluate the efficacy of the Environmental Management Plan.



Dated: January 2019

Chapter-8 Additional Studies


8. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

This chapter describes the public consultation, risk assessment and disaster

management plan, Fire Safety Systems and Flood Risk Assessment.

Also as per the additional ToR for pulp and paper industry issued by MoEF&CC,

the studies shall be conducted and a chapter to be included to show that soda

pulping process can be employed for Eucalyptus/Casuarina to produce low kappa

(bleachable) grade of pulp.

This section of the EIA report also presents the residual safety and environmental

risks, if any that are associated with operation of the proposed facility at the site

and proposed risk mitigation measures as per the applicable regulations and

guidelines. Safety related aspects are grouped into three aspects such as fire

safety, road safety and occupational safety.

Fire risk aspects are related to the possible hazards due to storage and handling of

flammable and combustible material at the site. Road safety addresses the plant

layout, exit routes and parking lots etc. Occupational health aspects are addressed

in terms of exposure to noise, thermal radiation, indoor air pollutants and toxic

chemicals.

The following aspects of the Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC have been

addressed in this section.

Specific ToR No. i - PH for the project should be conducted by GPCB

Specific ToR No. ii- Issues raised during PH & Commitment of Project proponent

along with time bound action plan to implement the commitment and financial

allocation shall be provided

Additional ToR No iii- Studies shall be conducted and a chapter to be included to

show that soda pulping process can be employed for Eucalyptus/Casuarina to

produce low kappa (bleachable) grade of pulp.

General ToR No. xiii- Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made)

Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and

damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with District Disaster

Management Plan.



Dated: January 2019



8.1. Public Consultation

Since the proposed MEP involves manufacturing of additional product including

pulp, the proposed project falls under category “A” under sector 5(i) of the EIA

notification 2006. In addition, it is proposed to increase the existing captive power

plant capacity from 30.25 MW to 72.00 MW which falls under category “B” under

sector 1(d) of the EIA Notification 2006. Since the existing mill site does not fall

under any notified industrial area, public consultation will be conducted as per the

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification 2006.

The public hearing meeting will be advertised in English and the local language

(Gujarati) newspapers to invite the public to attend the meeting, wherein the

suggestions/views/comments will be recorded and addressed. A copy of the draft

EIA and executive summary of the EIA both in English and Gujarati language will

be placed in different public offices for public references.

The public hearing meeting will be recorded and photographed, and the details of

the public hearing meeting will be available in the final EIA report.

8.2. Additional ToR for pulp and Paper Industry

8.2.1. Additional ToR No i (A note on pulp washing system capable of handling

wood pulp)

Pulp washing provides desirable benefits associated with increased efficiency in

both screening and bleaching of the pulp. Washing results in reduced effluent

color, chemical oxygen demand (COD), and biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) in

the wastewater.

Modern washing systems have been integrated into the heart of the kraft recovery

cycle. Satisfactory pulp washing will be achieved with a multistage counter-current

sequence where the cleanest water is added in the last stage and the resulting

filtrate will be used in the preceding stage until it reaches the blow tank or wash

zone in a continuous digester. The dominant type of pulp washing has been and

still is the multistage rotary vacuum washer. Multistage vacuum washer systems



Dated: January 2019



employ dilution/thickening, mixing, diffusion, and displacement washing

principles, i.e., every aspect of washing.

The existing pulp mill consists of chipper unit, chips grading and separation unit,

chemical digesters, black liquor evaporation plant, solids firing (recovery boiler), re-

causticizing unit, lime kiln and coal gasification unit to supply fuel gas to the kiln.

The digested pulp is screened and then processed through three-stage oxygen

delignification process and then bleached. After washing the pulp is taken for

oxygen delignification which is performed with oxygen (O2) and caustic (NaOH)

serving as the active chemicals. Pulp after Oxygen Delignification is sent to bleach

plant wherein it is bleached to the desired level using bleaching chemicals like

Chlorine, Caustic Soda, Hydrogen Peroxide and finally with Chlorine Dioxide.

During the Post MEP this bleaching sequence will be replaced with proposed ECF

Bleaching sequence “A/D-EOP-DP (chlorine dioxide, caustic, oxygen and hydrogen

peroxide)” sequence comprising of Acid treatment for pH adjustment, Chlorine

dioxide, Caustic, Oxygen and peroxide bleaching. The details are explained in

chapter 3 of EIA report.

8.2.2. Additional ToR No 2, 3, 4 & 5 (Pulping and Bleaching, Chemical

Recovery, Commitment that only elemental Chlorine-free technology

will be used for the manufacture of paper)

The detailed manufacturing process of the existing facility is included in Section

2.3 of Chapter 2 and of the proposed plant is included in Section 3.2 of Chapter 3

of the EIA report.

The mill has proposed modern wood pulp line consisting of wood chipping and

chips screening, cooking and screening, brown stock washing, oxygen

delignification, bleaching “A/D-EOP-DP” sequence comprising of chlorine dioxide

and alkaline extraction bleaching.

The recovery unit adopted in JKPL constitutes black liquor evaporator, solids

recovery boiler, re-causticizing unit and lime kiln. Entire black liquor will be



Dated: January 2019



recycled back into the system and dedicated spill collection tank and recycling

pump will be provided in the pulp mill.

Black liquor will be pre-concentrated from 14% to about 65% solids in a dedicated

evaporator and these solids will be further fired in chemical recovery boiler for

recover of chemicals. A dedicated ESP will be installed to control the emissions

from recovery boiler. NCG gases will be collected and fired in recovery boiler.

Foul condensate will be subjected to steam stripping to remove VOCs, if any and

reused for the washing and other plant applications.

During the post project scenario ECF Bleaching sequence where Chlorine Dioxide

(ClO2) will be adopted and use of nonintegrated ClO2 bleaching will be eliminated.

The dry solids generated will be processed in existing recovery boiler to produce

steam.

Kraft process will be adopted in the proposed pulp mill using Caustic Soda to

generate low Kappa number pulp, to recover the cooking chemicals and to generate

the energy need in the process from the black liquor in the recovery boiler. Lime is

also recovered in the re-causticizing plant. Rapid Displacement Heating (RDH)

technology will be adopted for wood cooking.

8.3. Risk Assessment Study and Risk Mitigation Measures

According to the standard ToR items 7(xiii) and 8 (i to iv) of the Terms of Reference

(ToR) issued for this project, preliminary hazard identification and risk assessment

were undertaken to quantify the possible fire and occupational health risks

associated with the operation of the project at the designated location. The good

engineering practices suggested by the Central Pollution Control Board for risk

assessment in industries (CPCB document Probes/133/2009-10) and CPR-18E

risk assessment procedures' guidelines which are widely accepted by the Ministry

of Environment Forests and Climate Change(MoEF&CC) India, have been adopted

while assessing the residual risks associated with the operations of the project with

specific reference to fire hazards, chemical exposure hazards, occupational hazards

and natural hazards.



Dated: January 2019



As part of the risk assessment, a preliminary review on the hazardous materials

and chemicals proposed to be handled at the site were reviewed and the storage

capacities and design features of such hazardous materials were also reviewed

while assessing the residual risks. Occupational health hazards such as exposure

to dust emissions, thermal stress and work-zone levels were also studied.

Qualitative analysis of risks associated with natural hazards such as earth quakes,

floods and cyclones were also undertaken.

8.3.1. Fire Safety

Black liquor (generated in-house), indigenous, imported coal, lignite, furnace oil

and pet coke are the fuels proposed to be used Post MEP. Furnace oil with

producer gas or with pet coke will be used in lime mud reburning kiln and furnace

oil will be used in start-up and stabilizing the operations of chemical recovery

boiler. Since the existing facility is currently using the above-mentioned fuel except

pet coke, the adequate storage and safety systems are already in place. The same

will be utilized post MEP.

Necessary permission will be obtained for the usage of pet coke during MEP.

Dedicated storage yard with necessary sprinkler system will be provided. Additional

closed storage sheds coal with water sprinkler arrangements will be provided as

the existing coal storage will not be adequate during the post project scenario.

Other combustible chemicals such as paper plant additives will be stored in sealed

drums and stored in secured warehouse so that the possibility of exposure to fire

hazards will be minimal. However there exists some remote possibility of fires in

the raw material handling operations.

Combustible chemicals- The facility is handling only “C” type combustible

chemicals such as additives and lube oils, whose flash point will be greater than

200OC as per the National Fires Safety Code, USA and these chemicals will not fall

under any of the hazard chemical category under the Schedule 1 of the

Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, issued by Govt. of

India. These chemicals are stored in drums and placed in secured areas in the



Dated: January 2019



warehouse. Required number of fire hydrant systems and extinguishers are placed

in the warehouse.

8.3.2. Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Systems

The mill has adequate fire-fighting facilities with full-fledged fire safety systems at

the existing facility as per the National Building Codes and other good engineering

practices. The existing fire-fighting arrangements will be suitable augmented

during the MEP program of the existing plant. Photographs showing the fire

hydrant systems in the existing facilities are presented in Figure 8.1.

Figure 8-1 Existing Fire Safety Systems

The following firefighting facilities are installed at the facility:

Electrical fire pump: 137m3/hr& 250 m3/hr, diesel pump: 137 m3/hr & 250

m3/hr and Jockey pump: 1080 m3/hr.

Fire water ring main system has been provided across the plant, storage

area etc.

About 119 numbers of fire hydrants are installed as per building codes.

15 water sprinklers were installed at coal storage area.

220 fire extinguishers are installed across the facility.

20 numbers of first aid facilities are placed at all critical locations.

Necessary vacuum system and scrubbers are provided at Chlorine tonner

area.

Chlorine gas detectors are placed near the chlorine plant, and three self-

breathing operators (oxygen masks) are made available.



Dated: January 2019



Fire engine vehicle is in place.

8.3.3. Risks due to Storage and Handling of Coal and Risk Control Measures

Although coal fires are infrequent, there is a possibility of coal fires at the coal

stock yards during the summer conditions due to burning of volatile compounds.

Coal stock yard fires can be avoided by providing proper stacking design to prevent

air movement inside the coal lumps, minimizing the duration of coal storage at the

site and water sprinkling operations to maintain adequate moisture.

Captive co-generation power plants store, transfer, and use coal; therefore, careful

handling is necessary to mitigate fire and explosion risks. Recommended measures

to prevent minimize, and control fire hazards at captive co-generation power plants

include:

Use of automated combustion and safety controls

Proper maintenance of boiler safety controls

Implementation of start-up and shutdown procedures to minimize the risk of

suspending hot coal particles (e.g., in the crusher) during start-up

Regular cleaning of the facility to prevent accumulation of coal dust (e.g., on

floors, ledges, beams, and equipment)

Removal of hot spots from the coal stockpile (caused by spontaneous

combustion) and spread until cooled, avoid loading of hot coal into the

pulverized fuel system

Use of automated systems such as temperature gauges or carbon monoxide

sensors to survey solid fuel storage areas to detect fires caused by self-ignition

and to identify risk points

For planned outages, operators should take every precaution to ensure that all

idle bunkers and silos are completely empty and also verify by visual checks.

Bunkers and silos should be thoroughly cleaned by washing down their



Dated: January 2019



interior walls and any interior structural members but not their horizontal

surfaces. Idle bunkers and silos that contain coal/ lignite should be monitored

frequently for signs of spontaneous combustion by using CO monitors, infrared

scanning, or temperature scanning.

Fire-fighting systems and fire hydrant systems shall be installed at all hazard

prone areas such as coal stock yards, bunkers and silos as per the applicable

fire safety standards.

8.3. Occupational Health and Noise Management Plan

Based on the noise mapping data presented in Chapter 5 of this report, the major

noise generating sources are proposed new board machine, turbo generator and

chipper. JKPL will be procuring the equipment with guaranteed noise levels less

than 85 dBA at one (1) metre distance from the respective machines/equipment.

The predicted noise levels indicate that additional noise emissions from the

proposed project is insignificant and well within the standards prescribed by the

CPCB. In addition to the noise control programme proposed to be adopted by JKPL

as stated in Chapter 5 of this report, the following occupational noise management

plan shall be adopted:

Noise abatement measures inside the Mill site shall be undertaken, if noise levels

are above 85 dB(A); measurements must be taken and assessed by a competent

person. Such measurements should be repeated at appropriate intervals.

If noise level is above 85 dB(A) then the following procedures shall be adopted:

Inform employees of the noise levels present and measures taken to reduce

exposure.

Make ear protection available and provide training in its use.

Hearing checks must be made available to employees exposed to noise levels

in excess of 85 dB(A) over an 8-hour period.

Although ear-plugs and ear-muff will be provided to the persons working in

the Mill area, as a part of the good management practices, work rotation

scheme will be adopted for the persons working in the high noise generating

areas.



Dated: January 2019



If noise levels near the machinery exceed 90 dB(A), then the following

corrective procedure shall be adopted:

Identify reasons for excess noise and draw up a plan in place to reduce.

Identify and clearly designate hearing conservation zones.

Ear protection must be worn and its use supervised.

Employees must be trained in the hazards of noise and the correct use of

hearing protection.

8.3.4. Occupational Safety Management and Surveillance Programme

The Ministry of Labour and Employment, Government of India has a nodal

organisation, viz. Directorate General Factory Advice Service and Labour Institutes

(DGFASLI), in dealing with Occupational Safety and Health issues in Industries.

The DGFASLI is the technical arm of the Ministry on matters connected with

Occupational Health in the manufacturing and port sectors.

The Factories Act, 1948, provides for appointment of qualified Medical Practitioners

and Certified Surgeons to examine young people engaged in dangerous

manufacturing processes and to ensure medical supervision in case of illness due

to the nature of manufacturing processes. The Factories Act, 1948, also provides

for notification of certain occupational diseases as listed in the Third Schedule of

the Act. As per Section 90 of the Factories Act, 1948, the State Government is

vested with the powers to appoint a Competent Person to conduct inquiry into the

causes of any accident or notifiable diseases.

As discussed in Chapter 2, JKPL has a full-fledged Occupational Health Centre

within the mill premises. OHC is manned by a qualified two dedicated doctors,

assisted by two nurses and other supporting staff. JKPL is certified by DNV-GL as

confirming to OHSAS 18001:2007 and the certificate is valid until June 2019.

The facilities available at JKPL’s OHC are given below:

Minimum facilities such as an oxygen cylinder for emergency medical use,

Clean room with 5 beds for first aid applications, with first aid kits as per

the Factories act



Dated: January 2019



Nebulizer for treatment of COPD, Asthma and other pulmonary diseases

X-Ray Machine

ECG machine

Suction apparatus

Pulse oximeter

Audiometric test apparatus

BP apparatus

Clinical Laboratory, Routine blood and urine test facility

Ultra –Sound Scanning Machine

The hospital has an ambulance which is equipped with oxygen cylinder and

other emergency items and manned by trained drivers as per the Factories

Rules, Rule 88N.

Figure 8-2 Photographs of the OHC

OHC located inside JKPL

Oxygenator Audiometer

As part of the routine and annual medical examinations on the persons working in

the high noise generating areas, stress areas and dust exposure areas, a



Dated: January 2019



comprehensive surveillance programme may be adopted. Some of the good

management practices are suggested in Tables 8.1

Table 8-1 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health

Surveillance Programme

Age (yrs)

Periodicity Duration of exposure

Periodicity

< 30 yrs Once in five years < 10 yrs Once in five years

31-40 Once in four

years

10 to 20 Once in four years

41-50 Once in three years

21-30 Once in three years

> 51 Once a year > 31 Once a year

The regular annual medical checkups undertaken for the employees under

Occupational Surveillance program are as follows;

General Examination

Blood Pressure

Pulse

R.S

G.I.S. Liver Spleen

Musculo Skeletal System

Genito Urinary System

ENT

Neurological Examination

Skin

Dental Examination

Vision tests

Haemoglobin

Blood Biochemical Report

Lipid Profile

Urine Analysis etc

The same will be continued Post MEP.

Medical records - A record-keeping system for holding the results of medical

examinations and reports of symptoms is maintained as part of the health

surveillance scheme. These are confidential medical records relating to individuals.

As part of the health surveillance programme, employees should be informed of the



Dated: January 2019



confidential results of each assessment and of any implications of the findings,

such as the likely effects of their continuing to work.



Chapter-9, Project Benefits


9. PROJECT BENEFITS

This project, besides general economic desirability, would result in substantial

socioeconomic benefit to the country in general and more specifically to the region.

As per JKPL ‘s CSR policy, JKPL Unit CPM is taking up community welfare

activities for the benefit of people living in nearby villages. In addition, need based

activities are also carried out by JKPL.

Some of the specific benefits are presented below:

9.1. Improvement in the infrastructure

This being a mill modernization project, most of the infrastructure like water intake

system, power in take system, roads, drains, hospitals schools, etc are already

available in the vicinity of the plant location. However, the above infrastructure /

amenities / facilities available near the plant will be assessed based on need based

survey and will be taken up under CSR scheme for development.

9.2. Improvement in the social infrastructure

Some of the specific benefits and improvement in the social infrastructure due to

project implementation are as under:

9.2.1. Employment


would generate indirect employment to about 1000 persons in the industries and

service organizations and material handling, etc., which will be supported by the

operations of the mill.

During the implementation and construction stage of the project, it will generate

employment to about 1000 in direct persons for about a year

9.2.2. Revenue to State Government

The project is likely to generate income to the state by way of Goods and Service

Tax (GST) to the tune of Rs 120 crore per annum and by way of income tax and

other taxes to the tune of Rs. 30 crores per annum.



Chapter-9, Project Benefits


9.2.3. Development of ancillary industries

The implementation of the project will undoubtedly provide stimulation for added

growth to a number of other industries some of which are given below;

Trucking industry which will load and haul raw materials, coal, and other supplies

to the mill and also mill outputs. The haulage requirement due to project would be

around 0.8 million tonnes per annum comprising both inputs and outputs.

Establishment of ancillary industries such as core for paper reels, core plugs,

machining and welding units, etc.

Indigenous machinery suppliers / manufacturers.

Construction industry during erection and construction period of Ancillary Business

9.2.4. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)

The capital CER budget is arrived based on the office memorandum Corporate

Environment Responsibility (CER) issued by MoEF&CC dated 1st May 2018. As per

the circular, the project is categorized into the brown field project with the

additional capital investment of less than 1500 Crores. In this context, Rs. 375

Lakhs has been embarked for the local community development within the vicinity

of the project area for 5 years. The CER budget is arrived by considering 0.25% of

the total project cost of Rs. 1500 Crores.

A need-based CSR assessment has been carried out and accordingly the budget

allocated will be spent for various community development programs.



Chapter-10, Environmental Management Plan


10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1. General

Based on detailed analysis on the possible residual environmental risks associated

with the project, a comprehensive environmental management plan has been

developed and presented in this section.

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable

development in the area of the Mill site. EMP also ensures that the project

implementation is carried out in accordance with the design and the mitigative

measures as recommended in the Environment Impact Assessment study to reduce

the adverse impacts during the project’s life cycle. The plan outlines existing and

potential issues that may impact the environment and recommends corrective

measures where required. The identification and quantification of impacts based

on scientific and mathematical modelling have been presented in Chapter 5.

Mitigation measures at the source level and an overall EMP for the study area are

planned for implementation, to improve the supportive capacity of the study area

and also to preserve the assimilative capacity of the receiving bodies.

10.1.1. Administrative Aspects

The key benefits of EMP are that it provides the organization with means of

managing and improving its environmental performance thereby allowing it to

contribute to better environmental quality. The other benefits include cost control

and improved relations with the stakeholders. EMP includes four major elements;

Commitment & Policy

Planning

Implementation

Measurement & Evaluation

10.1.2. Commitment and Policy

JKPL, Unit CPM has adopted a structured approach for managing environmental

and regulatory responsibilities to improve overall environmental performance,





including areas that are not subjected to regulation such as unregulated risk,

resource conservation, energy efficiency etc.

The facility has been accorded with ISO 9001:2015, ISO 14001:2015 certification

for environmental management program, OSHAS 18001:2007 certification for

Occupational Health and Safety Management and FSC (Forest Stewardship

Council) Certification.

Figure 10-1 Certification of JKPL, Unit CPM

ISO 9001:2015 ISO 14001:2015





OSHAS 18001:2007 FSC

JKPL, Unit CPM strives to provide and implement the Environmental Management

Plan that incorporates all issues related to environmental and social components

and comply with the suggestions given by the Ministry of Environment and Forests

& Climate Change (MoEF&CC) and Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB). In this

regard, JKPL, Unit CPM has a well laid down Integrated Management Policy

(Quality, Health, Safety and Environment Management) which was approved by

their Board of Directors and is presented in the Figure 10.2.





Figure 10-2 Integrated Management System Policy of JKPL, Unit CPM

10.1.3. Planning

This includes identification of environmental impacts, and setting environmental

objectives. JKPL, Unit CPM is committed to follow the said plan for pollution

control arrangements/ mitigation measures for different types/ sources of

pollution in letter and in spirit. As a part of the environmental management

systems (ISO 14001) of the facility, JKPL, Unit CPM has identified and captured all





possible significant environmental aspects and also adopted environmental risk

mitigation plans as per the applicable standards and environmental clearance

issued for the facility. A core environmental management committee is formed

headed by qualified senior personnel to ensure Environmental Management

Systems that have been designed to implement Environmental Management Plans

in the existing facility.

10.1.4. Implementation

The JKPL, Unit CPM has been adopting various cleaner production technologies to

achieve waste minimization, cost reduction and sustainable development. Also, the

unit has been ensuring that trained manpower is available for operating,

maintaining and documenting the effective environmental operations. Thus, the

same measures will be continued during the post project scenario.

10.1.5. EHS Management System

For the effective implementation of the mitigation measures and consistent

functioning of the project, an Environment Health and Safety (EHS) Management

System has been adopted by JKPL, Unit CPM. The EMS includes the following:

10.1.6. Environmental Management Records

The unit has been maintaining a system of records to demonstrate compliance with

the environmental performance management system and the extent of achievement

of the environmental objectives and targets

10.1.7. Environmental Management Plan Structure

The facility has a full-fledged environmental cell headed by qualified senior

personnel to ensure Environmental Management Systems that have been designed

to implement Environmental Management Plans in the existing facility by adopting

ISO-14001 certified system. JKPL, Unit CPM is committed to implement

environmental management programs on continual basis. The environmental

department work towards ensuring 100% compliance with stipulated regulations





and guidelines. The facility has been accorded with ISO 14001:2015 certification

for environmental management program. The emissions and treated wastewater

quality are continuously being monitored at the site. A full-fledged R&D lab is

established within the facility for effective monitoring. The organogram of

environmental management cell is presented in the Figure 2.7, Chapter 2 of the

report.

10.1.8. Measurement & Evaluation

This includes monitoring and implementation of the identified mitigation

measures, corrective actions and record keeping. Wherever required, appropriate

mitigation measures have been recommended to minimize the impact on the

environmental and social parameters.

The existing facility has been adopting various environmental monitoring programs

as per the consent to operate issued by state pollution control board and the

environmental monitoring data is submitted to state pollution control board

(GPCB) regularly. Online emission monitoring and wastewater quality monitoring

are being adopted on designated and mandated emissions and discharges as per

the state pollution control board guidelines. The same will be continued during the

post project scenario.

10.2. Environmental Management Plan During Construction Phase

During construction phase, the construction activities like excavation, leveling,

grading and transportation of the construction material may cause impacts on the

surroundings for a shorter period within a limited time. However, the

constructional phase impacts are temporary and localised phenomena except the

permanent change in local landscape and land use pattern of the project site.

10.2.1. Site Preparation

Since the project site is fully developed and an existing fully-fledged plant is

already existing, leveling and other site preparation activities are not envisaged.

Cutting of trees for the construction of the proposed facilities within the plant are

not envisaged. The Proposed MEP of JKPL, unit CPM involves shifting and re-





installation of bleached chemical wood pulp mill from JKPL, unit Rayagada, Orissa.

The applicable Construction and Demolition waste Rules 2016 will be adopted

during the construction phase of the project.

During dry weather conditions, dust may be generated by activities like excavation

and transportation through unmetalled roads. The dust will be suppressed using

water sprinkling. The mill shall make provision for water sprinklers at the

construction areas. Demolition waste consists of concrete works, sanitary utilities,

wooden and roofing materials, metals and removal of all the electrical fittings and

associated cables. Proper handling of the demolished materials will be done

through the authorized and guided transportation and will be disposed away from

the site area.

10.2.2. Air quality Management during Construction Phase

The activities like site development, grading and vehicular traffic contribute to

marginal increase in PM, SO2 and NOx concentrations. The following management

measures will be recommended to minimize the impacts:

Most of the places of the existing facility are already paved and hence the possibility

of generation of dust emissions from the plant during the construction phase will be

less significant. However, sprinkling of water on roads and construction site will be

adopted during the construction phase of the MEP project.

Implementing proper upkeep and maintenance of vehicles. Pollution under Control

(PUC) certified vehicles will be used for transporting machinery and materials.

Power required for the construction activities will be sourced from the existing

captive power plant, hence no additional diesel engine generators will be installed or

used at project sites for power requirements.

10.2.3. Noise Level Management During Construction Phase

Noise emissions from the construction activities will be limited to movement of

trucks and material transfer operations. Construction activities will be limited to

day time (8am – 5pm) to avoid any possible noise related impacts on the nearby

areas during the night time conditions. In case of any necessity to carry out works

in night, only limiting measurements and markings will be done. High noise





generating systems such as generators will not be operated as the power plant will

be sourced from captive power plant for construction activities. High noise and

vibration causing construction activities such as blasting and drilling etc are not

envisaged under the current scenario. Earmuffs will be provided to the workers.

In the event construction noise levels at the facility boundary exceed the industrial

limit of 70 dB(A), temporary noise barriers shall be installed to minimize the overall

noise related impacts on the nearby areas.

10.2.4. Water Quality Management during Construction Phase

The proposed MEP activities will be developed within the existing facility and hence

diversion of natural streams and canals are not envisaged. Water for construction

will be supplied from existing mill water supply systems. The chemicals (paints,

oils etc) shall be stored in designated areas. There is no likelihood of groundwater

contamination as there will not be any process wastewater discharge on to the

ground during construction. As far as possible, the work-force will be sourced from

the local areas and hence onsite construction workers camps are not envisaged.

Existing toilets, rest rooms and drinking water facilities will be made available to

all contract workers during the construction phase. No sewage will be discharged

outside the mill facilities.

Onsite construction vehicle maintenance and washing activities are not envisaged

at site. Hence discharges from construction vehicle maintenance activities are not

envisaged.

10.2.5. Solid & Hazardous Waste Management During Construction Phase

The hazardous materials used during the construction may include petrol, diesel,

welding gas and paints. Construction sites handle small quantities of lube oils and

diesel for running the construction equipment. In order to avoid soil contamination

due to accidental spills, it has been recommended to provide spill absorbing

material at the construction site and the contaminated soil should be excavated

and these materials shall be stored, and disposed off to hazardous waste disposal

sites according to the guidelines specified.





10.2.6. Ecological Management During the Construction Phase

As the proposed facilities for MEP will be located within the existing mill premises,

no effect on vegetation is anticipated. Greenbelt is already in place in the existing

facility which acts as barrier for any noise emissions and construction dust

emissions

10.2.7. Socio-Economic Aspects during the Construction Phase

The proposed MEP project will be developed within the existing facility and no

additional land will be acquired for the same. Hence Resettlement and

Rehabilitation (R&R) aspects are not applicable. Thus, there will not be any adverse

socio-economic implications due to the proposed MEP project. The existing facility

is already providing employment to more than 2230 and indirect employment to

more than 4500 people. The economic activities in the area have been improved

due to the operation of the facility.

10.3. Environmental Management Plan during Operation Phase

The Environmental Management Plan for the proposed project aims at minimizing

the pollution the source. Management of JKPL, Unit CPM is committed to

implement all applicable environmental and safety guidelines. Operational phase

environmental management plan includes the following;

Air quality Management Plan

Noise Management Plan

Water and Wastewater Management

Solid and Hazardous Waste Disposal Management

Sustainable Agro Forestry

Storm Water Management Plan

Ecological/ Biodiversity Improvement Plan

Community Development Plan





10.3.1. Air Quality Management Plan

The main sources of air pollution from the proposed project and most likely

possible residual impacts on air environment due to the operation of the plant have

been discussed in Chapter 5 of the report.

It may be seen that the prevailing ambient air quality in the study area is within

the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQs). It may also be noted that the

predicted ground level concentrations due to emissions from proposed coal fired

boiler, chemical recovery boiler and lime kiln represent the worst-case scenario

considering the maximum limit of emission standards prescribed for MoEF&CC.

Also, it is to be noted that, the existing power boilers (CFB#1- 20tph and CFB#2-

30 tph) will be retired and existing recovery boiler will be kept as standby. Thus,

the net increase in emissions from the proposed project will be much lower than

the predicted levels.

The emission rates for the proposed coal fired boiler were estimated based on the

new thermal power plant standard dated 2015 for PM, SO2 and NOX (i.e. 30

mg/Nm3, 100 mg/Nm3 and 100 mg/Nm3 respectively).

The emission rates for the proposed chemical recovery boiler are estimated based

on MoEF&CC limits for boilers used in the other industries including paper and

pulp, as per MoEF&CC notification dated 29th January 2018 which is 600 mg/Nm3

and 300 mg/Nm3 respectively for SO2 and NOx.

Whereas, the emission rates for the proposed limekiln are estimated based

MoEF&CC standard for lime kiln dated 22nd March 2018 which is 400 mg/Nm3

and 500 mg/Nm3 respectively for SO2 and NOx.

Hence necessary control measures will be adopted to limit the pollutant

concentration from the proposed coal fired boiler, chemical recovery boiler and lime

kiln well within standards prescribed by MoEF&CC. At any given point of time, the

controlled PM, SO2 and NOx emissions from the above-mentioned sources will not





exceed the prescribed standards. The following management plan will be adopted

in the plant during operation phase.

10.3.1.1. Reduction of Emissions at Source


Matter (PM) emissions from the proposed boiler in the captive power plant,

proposed chemical recovery boiler and lime kiln. ESP will be designed to achieve

emission norms of 30 mg/Nm3 for the proposed coal fired boiler as per MoEF&CC

December 2015 notification for the new boilers to be installed from 1st January

2017.

It is proposed to adopt dry limestone addition method for capturing SO2 emissions

within the combustion chamber of the proposed CFBC boiler. The uncontrolled

emissions from the boiler when operated with 100% Indian coal will be in the order

of 200 Kg/hr, which will be further reduced to 16 Kg/hr through dry lime addition

process (@90 % efficiency). About 3 Kg limestone (80% quality) would be required

for removing every kilogram of SO2 emissions in the combustion chamber. This

means about 13 tpd of limestone would be required for the control emissions to the

desired levels. Limestone and spent lime mud (80% purity) form the chemical

recovery plant will be utilized in the proposed CFBC boiler to meet the emission

norms.

Based on the continuous emission data, NOx levels in the existing boiler is

reported less than 50 mg/Nm3, hence the NOx emissions will be maintained below

100 mg/Nm3 as per FBC technology to meet the emission norms. The low

combustion temperature in the Fluidized bed type boiler results in minimal NOx

formation.

Stacks of adequate height will be installed for the proposed coal fired boiler,

chemical recovery boiler and lime kiln as per the minimum stack height norms by

CPCB for efficient dispersion of gases.





10.3.1.2. Fugitive Emissions Control

To control the wind-borne coal dust fugitive dust emissions, closed type storage

sheds and coal conveyer will be provided with water sprinkling system

arrangement. Necessary dust collection systems will be installed at coal handling,


Also the unit has already implemented various fugitive emissions control plan in

the existing facility and similar practices will be continued after MEP program and

summary of various such measured proposed to be adopted are presented

hereunder;

As per the existing scenario, closed type storage sheds and coal conveyer

will be provided with water sprinkling system arrangement.

All coal transfer points are provided with dust extraction and collection

systems. Bag filter type dust collectors are provided at coal crusher, grizzle

hopper screen, coal bunker, fly ash silo and all transfer points. Similarly,

Necessary dust collection systems will be installed at coal handling,


Adequate numbers of water sprinkling systems are installed at coal and ash

handling areas and based on amount of coal handled and meteorological

conditions, the intensity of the water sprinkling shall be adopted.

Unloading of coal trucks shall be carried out with proper care, avoiding

dropping of the materials from height. It is advisable to moisten the material

by sprinkling water while unloading, handling and during storage

Mobile road dust cleaning machines shall be employed to collect coal fines if

any

The sprinkling of water has been done along the internal roads in the plant

in order to control the dust arising due to the movement of vehicular traffic

High efficiency bag filters were installed at the coal yard, coal transfer points

and preparation yards for the control of dust.





Green belt and plantation in the existing facility is maintained as per CPCB

guidelines. Adequately designed additional greenbelt will be developed for

further control the fugitive emissions, if any.

10.3.1.3. Management of Non-Condensable Gases

As discussed in Chapter 5, it is proposed to install ECF Chemical Wood Pulp Mill

for cooking processes. The NCGs and Mercaptans formed at the pulp mill section

digesters, blow tank systems and evaporators will be controlled by installing NCG

gas extraction system to collect the NCGs and Mercaptans which will be fired in the

lime kiln.

10.3.2. Noise Management Plan

The impact of noise generated due to plant operations has been estimated in

Chapter 5. Sound pressure levels at the facility boundary will be maintained below

50 dB (A), which is well within the stipulated threshold noise level of 75 dB (A)-(day

time) for industrial area.

The specifications for procuring major noise generating machines/

equipment shall include built-in design requirements to have minimum

noise levels meeting Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA)

requirement.

Steam turbine and turbo-generator in the co-generation plant will be

provided with acoustic insulation and, also, will be placed in a closed room.

Proposed New Board Machine will be housed inside building.

Appropriate noise barriers/shields, silencers etc will be provided in the

equipment, wherever feasible and necessary. As far as possible, noise

emanating from noisy equipment shall be adequately attenuated by

enclosures, insulations etc.

Ear plugs are being provided to workmen working near high noise

generating sources

The existing greenbelt around the plant will further attenuate noise levels





10.3.3. Water and Wastewater Management

10.3.3.1. Water Conservation

The existing mill has adopted various water conservation measures to bring down

the specific water consumption upto 40 m3/t of product. The improved recycling

from paper machines in the existing mill, increased use of paper machine effluent

after treatment in clarifier, recycling of filtrate from chlorine washer of bleach plant

for dilution of chlorinated pulp from chlorine tower to chlorine washer vat,

introducing poly disc filter in paper machine-2 for fiber recovery and filtrate water

recycling, water saving due to board plant effluent mixed with paper machine

effluent and recycled after primary clarifier etc are some of the major water

conservation measures adopted at the existing facility.

Further to this, the specific water consumption per tonne of paper/board

production will reduce considerably from 40m3/t to 32 m3/t during the post MEP

scenario due to the adoption of ECF Bleaching technologies and other efficient

water use processes and water conservation operations.

Total fresh water requirement for the post MEP is about 37,000 m3/day. The

additional fresh water required for the proposed project (16,500 m3/day) will also

be sourced from Ukai Left Bank Canal as per the existing scenario. Necessary in-

principle permission for 10 MGD has been obtained from the concerned authority

for the drawl of additional fresh water.

10.3.3.2. Wastewater Generation and its Treatment

The specific wastewater generation per tonne of paper/board production will

reduce from 36 m3/T to 29 m3/T during the Post MEP scenario. In addition to this,

due to the adoption of ECF Bleaching operations, the specific COD load on the ETP

will reduce considerably. The total wastewater generation during the post MEP

scenario will be in the order of 30,000 m3/day. The existing ETP of capacity 30,000

m3/day will be upgraded with addition of required new pollution abatement

equipment and processes to meet the additional hydraulic volumes during the post

MEP. The recommended ETP design scheme is presented in the Chapter 5.





As a part of MEP, it is proposed to segregate the streams from pulp and

paper/board mill and treat separately. In addition to the existing ETP, a new ETP

will be installed for treating the effluents.

The existing ETP will be large enough to handle proposed non-color effluents from

paper and board machines. Hence it is recommended to segregate the total

wastewater from the mill into the following streams:

Stream 1: Pulp mill wastewater (coloured and High COD streams)

Stream 2: Paper mill wastewater (Non coloured and Low COD streams)

Stream 3: Utilities, DM plant rejects, CT blowdowns etc

Existing ETP shall be utilized for Paper and board mill wastewater (Stream 2)

treatment. Pulp mill wastewater (Stream 1) shall be treated in a new biological unit

with DAF (for colour removal). Other utilities wastewater (Stream 3) shall be treated

in a dedicated clarifier.

The treated wastewater quality will be maintained within the standards as

prescribed by GPCB/CPCB. Dedicated STP is proposed to be installed to treat the

domestic sewage generated from the colony and plant.

The AOx levels in the treated wastewater will be maintained within the GPCB limit

of 8 mg/l by adopted better cooking processes and reducing the kappa no of pulp,

ECF bleaching technology will be adopted in the pulp production process.

10.3.3.3. Wastewater Utilization

The treated wastewater of about 2000 m3/day will be utilized for various

applications as per the existing practices such as chips washing, coal dust

scrubbing, bamboo wetting, ash dust suppression and floor washing and reusing

in process areas such as pulp mill, re-causticizing unit, utilities including cooling

tower etc.

The balance 27,800 m3/day of treated wastewater is proposed to be 100 % utilized

for land irrigation. The mill has about 1050 acres currently available for the

utilization of treated wastewater for land irrigation. Considering the application





rate of 45 m3/ha/day for clayey soil as per the MoEF&CC notification dated 14th

January 2016, about 475 acres of additional land is required for the complete

utilization of treated wastewater for land irrigation. Thus, CPM unit has

approached nearby farmers to meet the additional land requirement for reusing the

treated wastewater for irrigation. Additional pumping and pipeline systems will be

installed for disposal of additional treated wastewater for irrigation in the area.

However, considering the challenges in utilizing 100% of the treated wastewater

quantity for irrigation due to variations in the cropping pattern, JKPL unit CPM

requests MoEF&CC to grant permission to discharge treated wastewater of about

20 % into Goda Nala during off crop seasons and monsoon after conforming to the

discharge standards prescribed by GPCB.

10.3.4. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

No major solid wastes are generated from the paper and pulp mill and associated

processes. All the solid wastes generated in the mill are from the auxiliary plants

and they include lime sludge from the recausticising section, ash from the boilers,

sludge from the wastewater treatment plant and wood dust from the pulp mill.

As per the existing practices, the wood dust will be used as alternative fuel in

Boiler, fly ash will be used for Cement/Brick manufacturing, lime grit will be used

as backfilling material at abandoned stone quarry, ETP sludge will be sold to board

manufacturers and spent oil will be disposed to authorized recyclers. The details of

the quantities generated post MEP are presented in the section 5.3.9, Chapter 5

of the report.

10.3.5. Sustainable Agro Forestry

JKPL, Unit CPM has implemented social and farm forestry plantations of

Eucalyptus, Subabul and Casuarina within 350 Km radius of the mill covering

different parts of Gujarat, Maharashtra and Madhya Pradesh in about 1,35,000

acres of land. Gujarat state forest department is also promoting social & farm

forestry plantations. They are also providing financial assistance for the farmers for

their agro forestry plantations in their regime. In line with the same, JKPL unit





CPM has distributed about 2556 lakhs of saplings to the nearby farmers from the

year 2002 to 2018. The unit has already developed year wise for contract farming

plantation program up to year 2028 covering 314000 acres of land to implement

agro forestry and farm forestry in order to meet the wood demand in the future.


plantation by planting saplings within the facility. The main aim of the project is to

include the barren and unproductive land under cultivation through local farmers

and ensuring the raw material supply locally. The project developed a considerable

amount of economic activity among the people around 350km of the CPM. In

addition also increased employment opportunities among the local people in the

plantation farms. This program also reduces the import of raw material. Under the

program about 68,000 farmers have been enrolled and 100% of the wood

requirement is sourced through the Agro Forestry and Farm Forestry plantations

10.3.6. Feasibility of Rainwater Harvesting in the Existing Project Site

For evaluating the feasibility of Rainwater harvesting within the project site, 5

years monthly normal rainfall has been considered. The pre and post project runoff

from the project site is estimated based on Rational method. The Co-efficient used

to estimate the runoff from the different surfaces is as follows. The co-efficient are

considered are as per the MoEF and CGWA Guidelines.

Roof Area - 0.95

Asphalt and Paved Area - 0.85

Green Belt Area - 0.20

Open and Vacant Area - 0.30

Volume of rainwater that can be collected from the project site has been estimated

for the monthly normal rainfall.

Vacant & Green belt area, Roof top area and paved area of the project site have

been separated for the run off estimation and conservation measures have been

suggested.

The details of various areas are as follows





Table 10-1 Details of the Area in the Existing mill

Description Total area in Sq.m

Roof Area 623216

Asphalt/ Paved area 40469

Green belt, Lawn/ Vacant area 805325

Total Area 1469010

10.3.6.1. Pre-construction Runoff

Rational method has been used to estimate the runoff for the project site. As the

site is an undisturbed land the volume of water that is being generated after

natural recharge is about 483443 m3/Year. The calculation is presented in the

form of table below;

Table 10-2 Predicted Pre-Construction Runoff

Month Rainfall

(mm)

Area in

Sq.m

Runoff Coefficient

Monthly Pre Project Runoff in m3

January 0.0 1469010 0.3 0

February 0.0 1469010 0.3 0

March 2.8 1469010 0.3 1234

April 0.0 1469010 0.3 0

May 0.0 1469010 0.3 0

June 109.1 1469010 0.3 48081

July 484.7 1469010 0.3 213626

August 213.5 1469010 0.3 94108

September 232.6 1469010 0.3 102508

October 45.8 1469010 0.3 20184

November 0.8 1469010 0.3 370

December 7.6 1469010 0.3 3332

Total Annual Pre Project-Runoff in m3 483443





10.3.6.2. Post Project Run-off

The same rainfall and the land area have been taken up for the estimation of runoff

for the prediction from the project site. As the vacant exposed land would be

converted in to build up land, the natural recharge that had taken place during the

pre-construction period would not occur and hence there would be meager

infiltration. The losses such as, Percolation, evaporation and other unforeseen

loses has been considered.

Post – construction runoff from different surfaces are presented in the Table below;

Table 10-3 Predicted Post Construction Run-Off

Month Rainfall in mm

Runoff Roof area Cum

Runoff Asphalt /

Paved area Cum

Runoff Green belt area Cum

Total Monthly Runoff Cum

January 0.0 0 0 0 0

February 0.0 0 0 0 0

March 2.0 1184 69 322 2759

April 0.0 0 0 0 0

May 0.0 0 0 0 0

June 109.1 64593 3753 17572 150511

July 484.7 286993 16674 78075 668735

August 213.5 126428 7345 34394 294595

September 232.6 137712 8001 37464 320889

October 45.8 27116 1575 7377 63184

November 0.8 497 29 135 1158

December 7.6 4476 260 1218 10430

Total 1096.2 649000 37707 176556 1512263

Total Predicted Annual Runoff from Different Surfaces in Cum 1512263

Total Predicted Post project runoff from the project site – 1512263 m3/Year

10.3.6.3. Conservation Measures

The estimation of runoff from the project site has been assessed. Based on vacant,

roof top area and the monthly rainfall and runoff, the storage structures and

percolation pond with recharge tube well have been contemplated.





Roof top collection:

The roof water collection is estimated as 3600 m3/year

9 sumps with a total capacity of 450 m3 have been suggested to capture the

roof water. Each sump size is 5m X 4m X 2.5m

The rainwater that is been generated from the roof is proposed to pass through a

filter media. The proposed filter media is multiplayer vertical filters. The size of the

filter media is as follows:

The size of the multiplayer vertical filter is 2m X 2m X 0.9m

The outlet pipes from the roof area are connected with 115 mm dia PVC pipe

allowing the water to pass through the filter media before storing in the

sump

Rainwater Harvesting scheme for the proposed site - Roof top Collection

Location Area

(sq m) Runoff Coefficient

Total Roof Area 623216 0.95

Actual Sump Capacity m3 450

Harvestable water m3 649000

Water harvested m3 3600

Surplus outflow from Sump

m3 645399

Month Rain fall

(mm) Harvestable Water (m3)

Sump Storage

(m3)

Surplus out flow

from Sump (m3)

January 0.0 0 0 0

February 0.0 0 0 0

March 2.0 1184 450 734

April 0.0 0 0 0

May 0.0 0 0 0

June 109.1 64593 450 64143

July 484.7 286993 450 286543





August 213.5 126428 450 125978

September 232.6 137712 450 137262

October 45.8 27116 450 26666

November 0.8 497 450 47

December 7.6 4476 450 4026

TOTAL 1096.2 648999 3600 645399

The surplus runoff after roof top collection and from the green belt, asphalt area

has been estimated for Plant area

Surplus runoff after roof top collection – 645399 m3/Year

Runoff from Asphalt area - 37707 m3/Year

Runoff from Green belt area - 17656 m3/Year

Total runoff - 859662 m3/Year

25 numbers of recharge shaft with bore well in the storm water drain have been

recommended.

Recharge shaft with bore well to a depth of 15 m is recommended in the Storm

water drain. The size of the recharge shaft may 3m length X 3m width and 3m

depth. In the center of the recharge shaft a bore well with a dia of 6 inches may be

drilled and perforated pipes shall be inserted to facilitate the vertical and horizontal

movement of ground water. The Recharge shaft with bore well not only recharges

the shallow water table aquifer but also the deepens fractured aquifer.





Figure 10-3 Existing Storm Water drain

Figure 10-4 Picture showing Rain water harvesting through storm water drain





Existing water storage reservoir would be used within the project site to capture

the runoff.

Sl. No Description Capacity in m3

1 Pond 1 150000

Total Capacity 150000

The total capacity of the pond is 150000 m3/Year

The rainwater from the above area is proposed to take to the storage pond

through unlined open channel with a width of 0.5 m

The reservoir collection is estimated as 496008 m3 / Year

Evaporation losses (monthly evaporation has been considered – 20%) are

estimated as 170258 m3/Year.

Quantity of water added to the ground water reservoir from the storage /

percolation with recharge bore well is estimated as 325750 m3/Year.

The surplus from the storage pond is proposed to let out through the

natural stream

10.3.7. Ecology and Biodiversity Management Plan

The best available technologies that ameliorate the negative impacts of the project

on the local vegetation and wildlife have been incorporated in the design and

construction of the existing facility and similar practices will be adopted in the mill

expansion plan. Efforts will be taken to increase the green-cover, primarily, around

the project-site, and secondarily, in the successive outer zones within a 10 km

radius of the project site, using native plants with a view to ameliorating project-

related disturbances and enhancing the ecological value of the area. Plantations

should include only native species. No exotic or non-native species should be

planted in the area.





10.3.7.1. Greenbelt Enhancement Plan

The greenbelt development plan aims at overall improvement in the environmental

conditions of the region. The plan is developed with following objectives.

Prevention of land degradation due to activities during construction phase

Enhancing the forest cover for increasing the biodiversity of the region

Providing aesthetic value to the project area

Enhancing the ecological equilibrium of the area

Prevention of negative impacts on crop fields

A detailed survey was conducted with respect to existing forest types and

vegetation diversity in the project area for development of greenbelt around project

components. The greenbelt plan has been formulated considering the parameters

such as climate, soil types etc. Greenbelt around project location will attenuate

dust emission and noise during project activities.

Nursery Development

Nurseries would be developed with 6 to 8 seedlings per m2 for potted plants.

Nursery saplings would be developed for species such as Cocos nucifera, Leucaena

leucocephala, Mangifera indica, Polyalthia longifolia, Casuarina equisetofolia, Melia

dubia, Acacia auriculiformis, Albizia lebbeck, Azadiracta indica, Butea monosperma,

Dalbergia sisoo, Tectona grandis, Gmelina arborea, Pongamia pinnata, Terminalia

arjuna and Tamarindus indicus. Methods like seed sowing and grafting shall be

adopted.

General Guidelines Regarding the Plantation-plan

Ground-vegetation should be allowed to shed seeds before cutting or mowing it for

mulch. This would leave behind a seed-bank to flourish in the next growing-

season, providing a natural source of mulch for the following year. Burning of land

must be avoided, as it reduces soil-quality, and harms the ground-vegetation,

invertebrates, amphibians, reptiles, mammals and ground-nesting birds.

The original topography and vegetation of the site must be retained, that newly-

planted saplings may get the benefit of their natural micro-climate and may survive

with relatively less inputs. Soil from the site should be used for the plantation, as

far as possible, and supplemented with external nutrients only where necessary.

Chemical fertilizers or pesticides must be avoided, as they reduce soil-quality and





integrity, as also, the food/medicinal value of plants. Locally available leaf-litter,

grass-cuttings, agricultural residue, compost or other organic material may be

used as supplementary plant-nutrients.

Dumping of waste on the soil must be avoided. Non-biodegradable waste must be

carefully collected and safely disposed. Biodegradable waste should be collected

and processed, that it may be used to enrich the site-soil. Water-saving practices,

such as drip-irrigation and mulching, are recommended.

Biodiversity Enhancement Plan

A three-tier approach is suggested for biodiversity enhancement around project

site. In first tier efforts should be made to enhance green cover within plant

premises. In tier two, plantation activities should be extended to 5 km radius. In

third stage efforts should be taken for conservation of Reservoir and other

Conservation Reserve, in consultation with forest department and NGOs working in

this field. On successful implementation of Tier 1 and 2 plantations, diversity of

region is expected to be increased.

10.4. Corporate Environment Responsibility

In addition to CSR activities, need based CER plan is developed based on the

socioeconomic indicators, field observations and based on the felt needs of the

people during the primary survey. The need based CER programs are proposed for

the villages adjacent to the project site. In addition to the existing CSR activities,

additional support needs to be given for the proposed CER. Some of the key

observations related to lack of facilities or people’s basic needs are illustrated

below.

10.4.1. Proposed CER Programs:

Drinking water: Most of the adjacent villages in the study area are in need of safe

drinking water facility. Most of the villages deprived by safe drinking water and are

left to drink the ground water. Treated drinking water shall be provided to the

villages adjacent to the plant.

Health Care Facilities: In addition to the health care programs carried under

existing CSR program, JKPL, Unit CPM shall expand the health care facilities such





as developing a Primary Health centre adjacent to the CPM to provide free medical

care to the poor and needy and by expanding the Mobile Health Van (MHV)

network to the other villages.

Road Safety programs: The proposed project raw material and finished products

are proposed to handle in the existing road. Traffic load adequacy study shall be

carried out along with the road safety awareness programs for the truck drivers

and to the local community.

Irrigation Facilities: Agriculture is the major source of economic activity in the

region and major portion of the land is rain fed due to lack of irrigation facilities.

Providing irrigation facilities such as expanding the treated waste water irrigation

network to the other adjacent villages and providing irrigation infrastructure

facilities such as Lift Irrigation facilities, Canals, etc from the Tapi River.

Education Facilities: Schools in the study area are deprived by the basic facilities

such as safe drinking water facility, sanitation facilities and other infrastructure

facilities. Ground water quality is not within the drinking water standard and most

the schools are using ground water for drinking purpose. RO system, safe

sanitation facilities, etc can be taken as part of CER program.

Environment Protection: Most of the villages adjacent to the project site reported

to environmental issues such as Odour, dust emission related problems. As

inferred from the baseline environmental study data, all the pollution related

parameters are within the permissible limits. To overcome the same the additional

environmental protection measures, community plantations, etc can be taken as

part of CER.

10.4.2. Proposed CER Budget

The capital CER budget is arrived based on the office memorandum Corporate

Environment Responsibility (CER) issued by MoEF&CC dated 1st May 2018. As per

the circular, the project is categorized into the brown field project with the

additional capital investment of less than 1500 Crores. In this context, Rs. 375

Lakhs has been embarked for the local community development within the vicinity

of the project area for 5 years. The CER budget is arrived by considering 0.25% of

the total project cost of Rs. 1500 Crores. The project proponent will ensure in

allocating the below mentioned funds for timely implementation.





Table 10-4 Proposed CER Budget

S.No Program Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Total

(Rs. Lakhs)

1 Drinking Water 22.5 22.5 22.5 22.5 22.5 112.5

2 Health and Road Safety 15 15 15 15 15 75

3 Irrigation Facilities 15 15 15 15 15 75

4 Education Facilities 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 37.5

5 Environment 15 15 15 15 15 75

Total 75 75 75 75 75 375

10.5. EMP Budget

Total investment for the installation of project is Rs 1500 Crore. Out of which,

about Rs. 55 crore is allocated towards pollution control and monitoring systems.

The budget allocation for EMP is presented in the Table 10.2.

Table 10-5 EMP Budget Allocation

SL. No Pollution Control Systems Capital Cost

in Lakhs

A Air Pollution Control:

1 Closed storage sheds for coal with water sprinklers arrangements

250

2 Dust collection systems for coal handling, conveyors, silos and storage areas

120

3 ESP for the proposed power boiler with stack

600

4 In order to meet the new power plant standards, provision for blending of lime stone powder

40

5 ESP for the proposed recovery boiler with stack height of 70 m

300

6 ESP for proposed limekiln with stack

300

7 Dust collection systems for handling of lime mud and lime stone

80

8 NCG gas collection and firing in lime kiln. Dedicated scrubber for NCG emissions from pulp mill (low volume NCG gases)

200

Sub Total (A) 1890

B Water Conservation and Wastewater treatment facility:

1 Paper/board machine water recycling facilities including SAVE 900





SL. No Pollution Control Systems Capital Cost

in Lakhs all clarifier system

2 Existing ETP upgradation/augmentation 1550

3 Tertiary treatment facility for removing colour (chemical treatment with DAF) in the pulp mill stream wastewater

500

4 Sludge from biological treatment units (existing and proposed ETP) will be treated in a new sludge decanter

100

5 A new STP will be installed to treat the entire domestic wastewater

100

6 Additional pumping and pipeline systems for disposal of additional treated wastewater for irrigation in the area.

50

Sub Total (B) 3200

C Solid waste management

1 Collection and disposal of lime mud to cement plants and brick manufacturers

10

2 Collection and disposal of primary clarifier sludge to secondary board manufacturers

10

Sub Total (C) 20

D Environmental monitoring systems

1 Continuous emission monitoring systems for boilers and kiln 50

2 Continuous ambient air quality monitoring systems (three units as per CPCB guidelines)

150

Sub Total (D) 200

E Fire safety systems (E) 200

Total in Lakhs (A+B+C+D+E) 5510



Chapter-11, Conclusions


11. CONCLUSIONS

Based on the information stated in the project report and also an independent

assessment on the baseline environmental status and prediction of impacts, the

following conclusions are made.

Based on the findings of the detailed air quality modelling exercise, it has

been inferred that the resultant cumulative concentration at around 10 Kms

radius distance from project site post MEP will comply with the NAAQ

Standards.

Full-fledged wastewater treatment facilities and high efficiency Electrostatic

Precipitators (ESP) and other pollution abatement measures will result in

minimizing the adverse impacts on the environment

The NCGs and Mercaptans formed at the pulp mill section digesters, blow

tank systems and evaporators will be controlled by installing NCG gas

extraction system

In addition to the existing pollution control systems and environmental

management program of the existing facility, the management of JKPL, Unit

CPM has proposed to invest additionally about Rs.55 crores towards

various pollution control and environmental management programs under

the MEP project

The management of JKPL, Unit CPM has spent about Rs.39.68 Lakhs on

various CSR activities in the financial year 2017-2018. In addition to CSR

activities, need based CER plan is developed. Rs. 375 Lakhs has been

embarked for the local community development within the vicinity of the

project area for 5 years as a part of Corporate Environment Responsibility.

The project will create direct employment to about 300 persons. In addition,

it would generate indirect employment to about 1000 persons in the

industries and service organizations and material handling, etc., which will

be supported by the operations of the mill.

This project will have significant beneficial effects in terms of growth and

development of the regional economy



Chapter-11, Conclusions


The project will also pave way for additional growth of ancillary industries in

the region, which will not only increase the employment potential but also

further strengthen the economic base of the region.

The proposed project is structured to be in line with the requirements of

MoEF/CPCB/GPCB



Chapter-12, Disclosure of Consultants


12. DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

12.1. Introduction

The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Plan

(EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. The

studies have been carried out by M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services

Limited, Chennai, India with technical support from SPB Projects and

Consultancy Limited.

The profiles of the Consultants are given below,

12.2. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant

M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd (CMSRSL) is a joint venture between

the Murugappa group, India and Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Group, Japan.

CMSRSL is an ISO 9001:2008 certified company. CMSRSL offers safety and

environmental consulting services across India, Middle East and East Asian

countries. CMSRSL consists of six consulting domains such as environmental

engineering and management, process safety, fire safety, electrical safety,

construction safety and logistics risk assessment. CMSRSL is a NABET accredited

EIA consulting organization for undertaking EIA studies in the following sectors:

paper and pulp, thermal power plants, petroleum refineries, petrochemical

complex, chemical fertilizers, synthetic organic chemical industries, ports and

harbours and area development projects. CMSRSL has offered environmental and

safety related consulting services for more than 5000 clients during last decade.

12.2.1. Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study

Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study





S. No.

Name Role in the EIA Study

1 Mr V S Bhaskar EIA Coordinator – Pulp & paper industry and Thermal Power Plants. Functional Area Expert(FAE) - Meteorology, Air Quality Modelling and Prediction Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Noise / Vibration Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Risk & Hazards Management

2 Mr. T.P Natesan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Land Use, Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation

3 Dr. T. Balakrishnan

Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Ecology and Biodiversity

4 Mr. C.S. Karthick Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics

5 Ms. Sathya S. Functional Area Expert (FAE) – MSW and Team Member

7 Mr. Pudi Rama Sathya Kamesh

Functional Area Expert (AFAE)- Air Pollution and Air Quality

8 Mr. Mahendra B Functional Area Associate (FAA)- Air Pollution and Air Quality

9 Ms. Sujatha Gurudev

Functional Area Associate (FAA)- Water Pollution, Noise and Vibrations

Other Technical Team Members

S. No. Technical members

1 Ms. Shalini Sourav

2 Ms. Supritha V.

3 Ms. Megha Merin Joy

External Labs/Agencies involved in EIA Study

1 Base line Environmental data – Ambient air Quality, Water, Soil and Noise sampling & analysis.

M/s. Vardan Enviro Laboratory, Gurgaon (NABL accredited Lab)

NABET Certificate of M/s. Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd (CMSRSL) and is given below





12.2.2. NABET Certificate





12.3. SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited –Technical Consultant

SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited (SPB-PC) specialises in providing a wide

range of Consultancy Services in the field of Pulp and Paper, Sugar, Ceramics,

Power etc. Pulp and paper sector, however, represents the main thrust areas of

specialisation, with extensive experience with pulping processes practically for all

grades of pulp qualities and for almost all possible paper/newsprint grades from a

wide spectrum of fibrous raw materials including a variety of non-wood fibres.

Among the non-wood fibres, SPB-PC’s exposure to bagasse pulping is unique,

having been associated in the development of the bagasse-based newsprint mill

that is in successful operation in Tamil Nadu namely Tamil Nadu Newsprint and

Papers Limited (TNPL)

SPB-PC's expertise includes feasibility studies, preparation of Detailed Project

Reports (DPR), Evaluation of Technology, Rendering Basic Engineering Services,

Detail Engineering and a wide range of Project Management and Operations

Services besides Technical Audits, Mill Development Studies and Development of

Revival/Rehabilitation Proposals for sick units and Environmental Impact

Assessment (EIA) Studies.

SPB-PC has been rendering technical assistance in EIA studies since year 1995

and involved in 40 EIA studies in Pulp and Paper industries.

12.3.1. Work-Place Facilities

SPB-PC, located at Chennai, India, operates from its modern, fully air-conditioned

office (floor area: 25,000 ft2) with three full-fledged conference halls equipped with

digital projection facilities for multimedia presentations, latest telecommunication

facilities, video conferencing, high speed photocopier machines with reversible

automatic document feeders, besides binding facilities. The Company has state-of-

the-art computer-aided facilities, fully networked, for engineering, analysis, design

and documentation and communication facilities like e-mail and telefax. The

Company has a 380 kVA Diesel Generator, as insulation against power outages.





12.3.2. Structure

The SPB-PC Organisation is structured broadly into three distinct groups viz. a

Consultancy Services Group, a Project Services Group and an Operations

Management Group. The Consultancy Services Group, which forms the core of the

Organisation, is manned by engineers, planners, specialists, financial experts,

economic analysts and design specialists with extensive experience in the related

industries. SPB-PC, being the engineering base of a multi-sector Group of

Companies, the Project Services Group and the Operations Management Group are

augmented by Consulting Technologists and Specialist manpower seconded from

the associate group companies operating in the fields of pulp and paper, sugar,

ceramics and refractories.

12.3.3. Manning

The Company is manned by experienced and capable engineering staff covering all

disciplines like mechanical, process, environment, electrical, instrumentation and

civil. The engineering staffs have extensive experience in construction, operation

and maintenance in the fields of pulp and paper, newsprint, sugar, ceramics,

power etc and most of them have over 10/15 years of experience in the relevant

discipline. The Company is also well supported by finance, marketing, accounting

and general administrative staff.

environmental impact assessment · ´environmental impact assessment study for the proposed...

Documents